NA 60 Manual 02 2016 A8a5b0253e

NA60
PHASE & RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT,

PHASE & GROUND DIRECTIONAL,
THERMAL IMAGE, UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION RELAY
MANUAL
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S
1 INTRODUCTION 6
Scope and liability............................................................................................................................................................................................6
Applicability.......................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Conformity.........................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Copyright............................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Warranty............................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Safety recommendations................................................................................................................................................................................6
Insulation tests.................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Product identification......................................................................................................................................................................................7
Environment......................................................................................................................................................................................................7
Graphical conventions....................................................................................................................................................................................7
Glossary/definitions.........................................................................................................................................................................................7
2 GENERAL 11
Preface.............................................................................................................................................................................................................11
Photo................................................................................................................................................................................................................11
Main features..................................................................................................................................................................................................12
3 TECHNICAL DATA 13
3.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Product standard for measuring relays..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Mechanical data........................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Insulation........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Voltage dip and interruption........................................................................................................................................................................ 13
EMC tests for interference immunity......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Emission...........................................................................................................................................................................................................14
Mechanical tests............................................................................................................................................................................................14
Climatic tests...................................................................................................................................................................................................14
Safety...............................................................................................................................................................................................................14
Certifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................14
3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS................................................................................................................................................................................................15
Auxiliary power supply Uaux .......................................................................................................................................................................15
Phase current input circuits (traditional CTs)............................................................................................................................................15
Residual current input circuit.......................................................................................................................................................................15
Voltage input circuits (traditional VTs)........................................................................................................................................................15
Residual voltage input circuit (traditional VTs).........................................................................................................................................15
Phase current input circuits (ThySensor)..................................................................................................................................................15
ThySensor primary ratings............................................................................................................................................................................15
Binary input circuits.......................................................................................................................................................................................16
Block input (Logic selectivity)......................................................................................................................................................................16
3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS.............................................................................................................................................................................................16
Relays...............................................................................................................................................................................................................16
Block output (Logic selectivity)....................................................................................................................................................................16
3.4 MMI......................................................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES....................................................................................................................................................................16
Local port.........................................................................................................................................................................................................16
Remote ports...................................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS.........................................................................................................................................................................................17
Rated values for version with CT and VT traditional inputs....................................................................................................................17
Rated values for version with ThySensor inputs......................................................................................................................................17
3.7 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Base current - IB........................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Thermal protection with Pt100 probes - 26............................................................................................................................................... 18
Undervoltage - 27.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Thermal image - 49........................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (traditional CT inputs).................................................................................................................................... 19
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (ThySensor inputs)......................................................................................................................................... 20
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N..................................................................................................................................................................21
Overvoltage - 59............................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
Residual overvoltage - 59N (traditional VT inputs).................................................................................................................................. 23
Residual overvoltage - 59N (ThySensor inputs)........................................................................................................................................24
Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (Traditional CT & VT inputs)...........................................................................................................24
Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (ThySensor inputs)...........................................................................................................................26
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (Traditional CT & VT inputs)................................................................................................ 28
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (ThySensor inputs)................................................................................................................31
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 2
Breaker failure - BF....................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING.........................................................................................................................................................................34
Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST....................................................................................................................................................34
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS...................................................................................................................................................................34
Selective block - BLOCK2.............................................................................................................................................................................34
Internal selective block - BLOCK4...............................................................................................................................................................34
Circuit Breaker supervision..........................................................................................................................................................................34
VT supervision - 74VT....................................................................................................................................................................................34
CT supervision - 74CT....................................................................................................................................................................................34
Pilot wire diagnostic......................................................................................................................................................................................35
Demand measures.........................................................................................................................................................................................35
Oscillography (DFR).......................................................................................................................................................................................35
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)........................................................................................................................................................35
3.9 METERING..........................................................................................................................................................................................................36
Accuracy (type tests)....................................................................................................................................................................................36
Measures.........................................................................................................................................................................................................36
4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS 38
4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................................................................. 38
Power supply board...................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
CPU board....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Input board..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
MMI (keyboard, LED and display).............................................................................................................................................................. 39
4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................................................. 40
Base software................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40
Real-time operating system......................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Task.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
Drivers..............................................................................................................................................................................................................41
Application Software.....................................................................................................................................................................................41
Data Base........................................................................................................................................................................................................41
Self test (Application)....................................................................................................................................................................................41
Development tools (Builder).........................................................................................................................................................................41
4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................................................................................................42
Metering inputs..............................................................................................................................................................................................42
Signal processing...........................................................................................................................................................................................42
Conventions.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Use of measured values................................................................................................................................................................................51
Binary inputs...................................................................................................................................................................................................52
Output relays...................................................................................................................................................................................................57
LED indicators................................................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Communication interfaces............................................................................................................................................................................61
4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS..................................................................................................................................................................................62
Rated values....................................................................................................................................................................................................62
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26........................................................................................................................ 68
Undervoltage - 27.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
Thermal image - 49........................................................................................................................................................................................ 78
Phase overcurrent - 50/51.............................................................................................................................................................................91
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N............................................................................................................................................................... 103
Overvoltage - 59............................................................................................................................................................................................114
Residual overvoltage - 59N.........................................................................................................................................................................121
Phase directional overcurrent - 67........................................................................................................................................................... 129
Ground directional overcurrent - 67N...................................................................................................................................................... 148
Breaker failure - BF......................................................................................................................................................................................174
4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING.......................................................................................................................................................................176
Logical block - BLOCK1...............................................................................................................................................................................176
Selective block -BLOCK2........................................................................................................................................................................... 178
Internal selective block -BLOCK4............................................................................................................................................................. 183
Remote tripping............................................................................................................................................................................................186
Frequency tracking......................................................................................................................................................................................187
Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST............................................................................................................................................... 188
Cold Load Pickup - CLP.............................................................................................................................................................................. 189
CT supervision - 74CT..................................................................................................................................................................................191
VT supervision - 74VT..................................................................................................................................................................................192
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS.................................................................................................................................................................194
Circuit breaker supervision........................................................................................................................................................................197
Virtual I/O...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Demand measures...................................................................................................................................................................................... 203
Oscillography .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 203
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 3

5 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS 204
Measures.......................................................................................................................................................................................................204
Protection......................................................................................................................................................................................................205
Delayed inputs..............................................................................................................................................................................................205
Internal states...............................................................................................................................................................................................205
Relays.............................................................................................................................................................................................................205
Counters.........................................................................................................................................................................................................205
Self test..........................................................................................................................................................................................................206
Pilot wire diagnostic....................................................................................................................................................................................207
Selective Block - BLOCK2...........................................................................................................................................................................207
Fault recording - SFR...................................................................................................................................................................................207
Event recording - SER..................................................................................................................................................................................207
Oscillography - DFR.................................................................................................................................................................................... 208
6 INSTALLATION 210
6.1 PACKAGING..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 210
6.2 MOUNTING...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 210
6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.........................................................................................................................................................................214
6.4 NOMINAL CURRENT I n AND I En SETTING.................................................................................................................................................225
6.5 LED ALLOCATION............................................................................................................................................................................................ 230
6.6 FINAL OPERATIONS....................................................................................................................................................................................... 230
7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS 231
7.1 SW ThyVisor.....................................................................................................................................................................................................231
ThyVisor installation.....................................................................................................................................................................................231
ThyVisor use..................................................................................................................................................................................................231
7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface).....................................................................................................................................................................232
Reading variables (READ)...........................................................................................................................................................................232
Setting modifying (SET)...............................................................................................................................................................................232
TEST................................................................................................................................................................................................................234
COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................................................................................................234
Circuit breaker commands.........................................................................................................................................................................235
Enable / block changes via keyboard - Password..................................................................................................................................235
7.3 MODULES MANAGEMENT............................................................................................................................................................................236
7.4 MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................................................................................237
7.5 REPAIR...............................................................................................................................................................................................................237
7.6 PACKAGING......................................................................................................................................................................................................237
8 APPENDIX 238
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves ................................................................................................................................................... 238
Mathematical formula................................................................................................................................................................................ 238
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A).................................................................... 239
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)............................................................................ 240
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)....................................................................241
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)..........................................................242
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B).................................................................. 243
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C).........................................................244
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)......................................................245
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)..............................................................246
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C).....................................................247
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)................................................ 248
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)........................................................ 249
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)............................................... 250
8.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves........................................................................................................................................251
Mathematical formula.................................................................................................................................................................................251
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI).............................................................................252
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)......................................................................................... 253
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI).................................................................................254
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)..................................................................255
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)................................................................................256
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI).......................................................................257
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)............................................................ 258
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI).......................................................................... 259
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)................................................................. 260
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)........................................................261
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)......................................................................262
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)............................................................ 263
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 4
8.3 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time - RECTIFIER, I2t and EM curves.................................................................................................................264
Mathematical formula.................................................................................................................................................................................264
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Rectifier curves.............................................................................................................................................265
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Rectifier curves..............................................................................................................................266
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K).............................................................................................................................267
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K)............................................................................................................. 268
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM).................................................................................................. 269
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)....................................................................................... 270
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)....................................................................................271
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)...............................................................................272
8.4 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram......................................................................................................................................................................... 273
8.5 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................................275
8.6 APPENDIX B3- Connection diagrams..........................................................................................................................................................276
8.7 APPENDIX C - Dimensions............................................................................................................................................................................ 280
8.8 APPENDIX D - Setting table...........................................................................................................................................................................281
8.9 APPENDIX F - EC Declaration of conformity...............................................................................................................................................341
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 5

1 INTRODUCTION
Scope and liability
This document describes the functions, the technical data of NA60 devices; instructions for mount-
ing, setting and commissioning are included.
This manual has been checked out, however, deviations from the description cannot be completely
ruled out, so that no liability in a legal sense for correctness and completeness of the information or
from any damage that might result from its use is formally disclaimed.
The information given in this document is reviewed regularly; any corrections and integration will be
included in subsequent editions that are identified by the date of revision.
We appreciate any suggestions for improvement.
We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice.
Applicability
This manual is valid for NA60 devices with firmware version 3.50 and following.
Conformity
The product complies with the CEE directives:
• EMC Council Directives: 2014/30/EC
• Low voltage Directives: 2014/35/EC
Copyright
All right reserved; It is forbidden to copy, modify or store material (document and sw) protected by
copyright without Thytronic consent.
Warranty
Thytronic warrants devices against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a
period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of retail purchase by the original end-user purchaser (“War-
ranty Period”).
Safety recommendations
The warming contained in this document are all-important for safety; special attention must be paid
to the following symbols:
Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
DANGER are not taken
Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions
WARNING are not taken.
CAUTION Minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken
Installation and commissioning must be carried out by qualified person; Thytronic assumes no re-
sponsibility for damages caused from improper use that does not comply all warning and caution in
this manual.
In particular the following requirements must be met:
• Remove power before opening it.
• Verify the voltage absence by means suitable instrumentation on relay connections; attention must
be paid to all circuits supplied by external sources (binary input, CT, etc...)
• Care must be taken when handling metal parts.
Settings must be established on the basis of a coordination study.

CAUTION Numerical values inside examples have educational purpose only; they don’t be used, in no way,
for actual applications.
Insulation tests
After insulation tests, hazardous voltages (capacitor charges,...) may be arise; it is advisable to grad-
ually reduce the test voltage avoiding to erase it abruptly.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 6
INTRODUCTION
Product identification
Each device is equipped with:
• Identification label installed on the front side with following informations: code number, phase and
residual nominal currents, auxiliary voltage range and CE mark:
• Test label with following informations: data, serial number and test operator signature.
Environment
The NA60 device must be employed according to the environment conditions shown (see technical
data).
In case of different environment conditions, appropriate provisions must be provided (conditioning
system, humidity control, etc...).
If contaminants are present (dust, corrosive substances, etc...), filters must be provided.
Graphical conventions
The CEI/IEC and ANSI symbols is employed where possible:
e.g.: 51 = ANSI code concerning the overcurrent element.
Following text formats are used:
The ThyVisor[1] menu:
Phase overcurrent -50/51
The parameter description (measures, thresholds, operate time,...) and related value:
I> element
Definite time
I>def
The display messages (MMI) are shown as:

NA60
Notes are highlighted with cursive letters inside colored bar
Note: Useful description note
Glossary/definitions
I En Relay residual nominal current
I Enp Residual CT primary nominal current
I n Relay phase nominal current
I np Phase CT primary nominal current
I B Basic current: it represents the nominal current of the line or trans-
former, referred to the nominal current of the CT’s for thermal image
protection
27 Undervoltage ANSI code
49 Thermal image ANSI code
50/51 Phase overcurrent ANSI code
50N/51N Residual overcurrent ANSI code
59 Overvoltage ANSI code
59N Residual overvoltage ANSI code
67 Directional overcurrent ANSI code
67N Directional ground fault ANSI code
BF Circuit breaker failure ANSI code
74CT CT supervision
74VT VT supervision
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
DFR Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography)

SER Sequential Event Recorder
SFR Sequential Fault Recorder
ANSI American National Standard Institute
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique
52 or CB (Circuit Breaker) Circuit Breaker
52a Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the
breaker. It can be assigned to a binary input to locate the CB posi-
tion (Breaker failure and/or CB diagnostic functions). (52a open = CB
open)
52b Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the
breaker (52b open = CB closed)
K1...K6...K10 Output relays

Pulse Output relay with pulse operation
tTR Output relay minimum pulse width
Latched Output relay with latched operation (manual reset) Output relay with
latched operation (automatic reset)
No-latched Output relay with no-latched operation (automatic reset)
Note 1 The graphic interface and the operation of the ThyVisor software are described in the relative chapters
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 7
INTRODUCTION
CT Current Transformer
ThySensor Combo device
P1 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to
a ANSI dot)
P2 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to
a ANSI no-dot)
S1 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative
to a ANSI dot)
S2 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative
to a ANSI no-dot)
Self test Diagnostic
Start Leave an initial condition or reset condition (Pickup)
Trip Operation (with operate time)
Operating time Duration of time interval between the instant when the character-
istic quantity in reset condition is changed, under specified condi-
tions, and the instant when the relay operates
Dropout ratio The ratio of a reset value to an operate value in well-specified con-
ditions. The dropout ratio may be lower or greater than 1 according
as an over or under element is considered
Reset time Duration of the time interval between the instant when the charac-
teristic quantity in operate condition is changed, under specified
conditions, and the instant when the relay operates.
The stated reset time is related to a step variation of characteristic
quantity in operate condition to the reset condition.
Overshoot time The critical impulse time for a relay which is in its reset condition,
is the longest duration a specified change in the input energizing
quantity(ies) (characteristic quantity), which will cause the relay
to change to operate condition, can be applied without the relay
switches. The overshoot time is the difference from the operate time
and the critical impulse time.
The declared values for the overshoot time are applicable with the
lower setting value of the operation time.
MMI (Man Machine Interface) Operator front panel
ThyVisor Setting and monitoring software

Log file A text file that lists actions that have occurred (ThyVisor).
J2SE Java Platform Standard Edition
Subnet Mask (Ethernet nomenclature)
Sw Software
Fw Firmware
Upgrade Firmware upgrade
XML eXtensible Markup Language
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 8

INTRODUCTION
Symbols
I>> Threshold setting (e.g. pickup I>>).

The value is available for reading and is adjustable by means ThyVisor + MMI.
I Limit block (I>> threshold).

I ≥ I>>
I L1
I L2 Ma x [I L1 ,I L2 ,I L3 ] Computation block (Max phase current)
I L3
Curve type (definite/inverse time)

T 0
Logic internal signal (output); may be a logical state (e.g.I>> Start) or a numerical value
I>> Start
It is available for reading (ThyVisor + communication interface)
Logic external signal (intput); may be a command coming from a binary input or a sw command
IPh Block2
It is available for reading (ThyVisor + communication interface)
Internal signal (e.g. Breaker Failure output state concerning to the 2nd threshold of the 50 element)
I>> BF_OUT It is not available for reading (missing arrow)
Switch
& & AND and NAND logic gates
≥1 ≥1 OR and NOR logic gates
=1 EXOR logic gate
INPUT
t ON t ON t ON t ON t ON
T 0 ON delay timer with reset (t ON delay)

RESET OUTPUT
RESET
t
INPUT
t ON
ON delay timer without reset (t ON delay) t ON t ON t ON
T 0
OUTPUT
INPUT
t DROP
OFF delay timer (dropout) without reset (t DROP delay) t ON t DROP t ON
0 T
OUTPUT
Symbols.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 9

INTRODUCTION
INPUT
t OFF t OFF t OFF
0 T OFF delay timer (dropout) with reset (t OFF delay)

RESET OUTPUT
RESET t OFF
t
INPUT
t TR
Minimum pulse width operation for output relays (t TR) t TR t TR
0 T
OUTPUT
t
INPUT
Latched Latched operating mode for output relays and LEDs
OUTPUT
t
INPUT
t TR t TR
Pulse operating mode for output relays
t TR
OUTPUT
t
Symbols1 .ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 10

INTRODUCTION
2 GENERAL
Preface
The relay type NA60 can be supplied with phase input current suitable for traditional CTs and VTs, or
combined sensors ThySensor.
The relay can be typically used in radial or meshed MV and LV networks as feeder or power trans-
former protection:
• On radial, ring and parallel feeders of any length in solidly grounded, ungrounded, Petersen coil
and/or resistance grounded systems.
• On parallel connected generators and transformer on the same busbar.
• Moreover undervoltage and overvoltage functions are provided as protections or voltage con-
trols.
Following input circuits are available:
CT-VT Versions
• Three phase current and one residual current inputs with nominal currents independently select-
able at 1 A or 5 A using dip-switch.
• Three phase voltages (line-to-ground) with nominal voltages programmable in the range 50...130 V
(UR=100V) or 200...520 V (UR = 400V) and one residual voltage input with nominal voltage program-
mable in the range 50...130 V (UER=100V).
ThySensor Versions
• Three phase current inputs with primary nominal currents Inp = 630 A.
• Three phase voltages (line-to-ground) with primary nominal voltages Unp = 20 kV.
A conventional current balance transformer is required for both versions for the residual current
input; the rated current (1A or 5 A) is selectable via DIP-switches.
In addition to the main protection element, the breaker failure (BF), CT monitoring (74CT), VT monitor-
ing (74VT), Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) and programmable logic (PLC) are also provided.
Setting, programming and reading operations must be effected by means of Personal Computer with
ThyVisor software or by means of remote communication interface (RS485 bus, Ethernet network
and USB); all operations must be performed through MMI.
According to the hardware configurations, the NA60 protection relay can be shipped in various case
styles depending on the required mounting options:
• Flush.
• Projecting mounting.
• Rack.
• With separate operator panel.
Other options are:
• Auxiliary power supply operating range.
• Communication protocols.
Photo
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 11

GENERAL
Main features
• Metallic case.
• Backlight LCD 4x16 Display.
• Eight LEDs that may be joined with matrix criteria to many and various functions.
• RESET key to clear LED indications and latched output relays.
• Two free settable binary inputs.
• Independently settable for start, trip, self-test and control six output relay (K1...K6) Each output
relay may be set with normally energized or normally de-energized operating mode and manual or
automatic reset (latched/no-latched).
• Rear Ethernet communication port, with MODBUS TCP/IP® or IEC61850 protocol, with RJ45 (cop-
per wires) or FX (optical fiber) connection.
• Rear RS485 port, with ModBus protocol.
• USB front serial port (local communication for ThyVisor).
• Real time clock with super capacitor.
The most significant constructive features are:

• Galvanically insulated input and output circuits (communication and binary circuits included).
• Optimum filtering of input signals through combined use of analog and digital filters.
• Traditional electromechanical-type final output contacts with continuous monitoring of control coil
continuity.
• Auxiliary supply comprising a switching-type voltage stabilizing circuit having a very wide working
range and a very small power dissipation
• Nominal frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.
The most significant operating features are:

• Programming of operating modes and parameters by means of the front keys and alphanumeric
display, with a programming procedure based on carrying out guided selections and on explicit and
immediate signalling of the operations being performed, so that such procedure can be carried out
without coding tables or mnemonic informations.
• The feature modification operations do not interrupt the normal functions of the relay.
• Impossibility of programming unacceptable parameter values, thanks to the automatic limitation of
top and bottom scale values for the relative setting ranges.
• Currents are sampled 24 times per period and measured in the effective value (RMS) of the funda-
mental component using the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital filters.
• The fault recorder (SFR) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty events upon
trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip).
• The event recorder (SER) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred
events upon trigger of binary input/output.
• Recording of the last setting changes (Logger).
• Digital fault recorder (DFR) in COMTRADE format (oscillography).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 12

GENERAL
3 T E C H N I C A L D ATA
3.1 GENERAL
Product standard for measuring relays
Reference standards IEC 60255-1 Part 1: Common requirements
Mechanical data
Mounting:
• Flush.
• Projecting.
• Rack.
• Separated operator panel.
External dimensions (Flush mounting) 177 x 107 x 235 (high x width x depth)
Terminals screw connection
Mass (Flush mounting) 2.0 kg
Reference standards EN 60529, EN 60529/A1
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
• Front IP52
• Terminals IP20
Insulation
Reference standards EN 60255-5, IEC 60255-27
High voltage test (50 Hz - 60 s)
• Auxiliary power supply 2 kV
• Input circuits 2 kV
• Output circuits 2 kV
• Output circuits (between open contacts) 1 kV
• Comunication Circuit 500 V
Impulse voltage withstand test (1.2/50 µs):
• Auxiliary power supply 5 kV (Common mode) - 2kV (Differential mode)
• Output circuits 5 kV
• Output circuits (between open contacts) 1 kV
Insulation resistance >100 MW
Voltage dip and interruption

Reference standards EN 61000-4-29, IEC 60255-22-11
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on dc input power port immunity tests
• Interruption (UT=40%) 100 ms
• Interruption (UT=0%) 50 ms
• Voltage variations (UT=80...120%) 10 s
EMC tests for interference immunity

Reference standards IEC 60255-26, EN 60255-26
Product standard for measuring relays
Generic standards immunity for industrial environments EN 61000-6-2
• Electromagnetic compatibility requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment
Apparati di automazione e controllo per centrali e stazioni elettriche

• Compatibilità elettromagnetica - Immunità ENEL REMC 02
• Normativa di compatibilità elettromeccanica per apparati e sistemi
ENEL REMC 01
Reference standards EN 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-1
EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-12
Damped oscillatory wave
• 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz common mode 2.5 kV
• 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz differential mode 1.0 kV
• Ring wave common mode 2.0 kV
• Ring wave differential mode 1.0 kV
EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge
• Contact discharge 6 kV
• Air discharge 8 kV
EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3
Radiated radio-frequency fields
• 80...1000 MHz AM 80% 10 V/m
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 13

TECHNICAL DATA
• 900 MHz Pulse modulated 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4
Fast transient burst (5/50 ns)
• Auxiliary power supply 2 kV

EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5
High energy pulse
• Uaux (line-to-ground 10 ohm, 9 mF) 2 kV
• Uaux (line-to-line 0 ohm, 18 mF) 1 kV
• I/O ports (line-to-ground 40 ohm, 0.5 mF) 2 kV
• I/O ports (line-to-line 40 ohm, 0.5 mF) 1 kV

EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted radio-frequency fields
• 0.15...80 MHz AM 80% 1kHz 10 V
EN 61000-4-16 IEC 61000-4-16
Power frequency immunity tests
• Dc voltage 30 V
• 50 Hz continuously 30 V
• 50 Hz 1 s 300 V
• 0.015...150 kHz 30 V

Magnetic field 50 Hz
• 50 Hz continuously 100 A/m
• 50 Hz 1 s 1 kA/m

Damped oscillatory magnetic field
• Damped oscillatory wave 0.1 MHz 30 A/m
• Damped oscillatory wave 1 MHz 30 A/m
Emission
Reference standards EN 60255-25 IEC 60255-25
EN 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-4
EN 55011 CISPR 11
Electromagnetic emission tests
• Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.15...0.5 MHz 79 dB mV
• Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.5...30 MHz 73 dB mV
• Radiated emission 30...230 MHz 40 dB mV/m
• Radiated emission 230...1000 MHz 47 dB mV/m
Mechanical tests
Reference standards EN 60255-21-1 EN 60255-21-2 RMEC01
Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment
• EN 60255-21-1 Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Class 1
• EN 60255-21-2 Shock and bump test Class 1
Climatic tests
Reference standards IEC 60068-x ENEL R CLI 01 CEI 50
Environmental testing
Ambient temperature -25...+70 °C
Storage temperature -40...+85 °C
Relative humidity 10...95 %
Atmospheric pressure 70...110 kPa
Safety
Reference standards IEC 60255-27
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
Pollution degree 3
Reference voltage 250 V
Overvoltage category III
Certifications
Reference standards
Product standard for measuring relays EN 50263
CE Conformity
• EMC Directive 2014/30/EC
• Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/CE
Type tests IEC 60255-1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 14
TECHNICAL DATA
3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS
Auxiliary power supply Uaux
Voltage
Nominal value (range)[1] 24...48 V~/-
115...230 V~/110...220 V-
Operative range (each one of the above nominal values) 19...60 V~/-
85...265 V~/75...300 V-
Inrush current (max)
• 24 V- 6 A, 5 ms
• 48 V- 14 A, 5 ms
• 110 V- 20 A, 1 ms
• 230 V~ 50 A, 1 ms
Frequency (for alternate voltage supply) 45...66 Hz
Max distortion factor ( for alternating voltage supply) 15%
Max alternating component (for dc voltage supply):
• Full wave rectified sine wave 100 %
• Sine wave 80 %
Power consumption:
• Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet TX) 10 W (20 VA)
• Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet FX) 15 W (25 VA)
Phase current input circuits (traditional CTs)

Relay nominal phase current I n 1 A or 5 A selectable by dip-switch
Permanent overload 25 A
Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A
Dynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 A
Rated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.002 VA with I n =1 A
≤ 0.04 VA with I n =5 A
Residual current input circuit

Relay nominal residual current I En 1 A or 5 A selectable by dip-switch
Permanent overload 25 A
Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A
Dynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 A
Rated consumption ≤ 0.006 VA with I En =1 A
≤ 0.12 VA with I En =5 A
Voltage input circuits (traditional VTs)

Relay phase to phase nominal voltage U n [2] 50...130 V (U R = 100 V)
200...520 V (U R = 400 V)
Relay phase nominal voltage E n = U n / √3 -
Permanent overload 1.3 U n
Thermal overload (1 s) 2 Un
Rated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.5 VA
Residual voltage input circuit (traditional VTs)[3]

Relay residual nominal voltage U En 50...130 V
Permanent overload 1.3 U En
Thermal overload (1 s) 2 U En
Rated consumption ≤ 0.5 VA
Phase current input circuits (ThySensor)

Current measurement:
• Secondary nominal voltage with I np 630 A 200 mV
Voltage measurement:
• Secondary nominal voltage with U np 20/√3 kV 1.0 V
Connections RJ45 socket
ThySensor primary ratings[4]

Current measurement:
• Rated primary current I np 630 A
• Rated primary current range 50...1250 A
• Rated primary max current 22.5 kA
• Permanent overload 1.2 I pn
• Thermal overload (3 s) 16 kA
• Dynamic overload (0.01 s) 40 kA
Note 1 Version must be selected at ordering
Note 2 U R = 100 V or U R = 400 V version must be selected at ordering
Note 3 For versions with inputs from ThySensor the measuring of residual voltage is obtained by calculating the vector phase voltages
Note 4 Full technical data are available inside ThySensor data sheet
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 15
TECHNICAL DATA
Voltage measurement:
• Rated primary voltage U np 20/√3 kV
• Permanent overload 1.8
Binary input circuits

Quantity 2
Type optocoupler
Operative range 24...265 V~/-
Min activation voltage 18 V
Max consumption, energized 3 mA
Block input (Logic selectivity)

Quantity 1
Type polarized wet input (powered by internal isolated supply)
Max consumption, energized 5 mA
3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS

Relays
Quantity 6
Type of contacts K1, K2 changeover (SPDT, type C)
Type of contacts K3, K4, K5 make (SPST-NO, type A)
Type of contacts K6 break (SPST-NC, type B)
Nominal current 8A
Nominal voltage/max switching voltage 250 V~/400 V~
Breaking capacity:
• Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 50 W
• Alternating current (l = 0,4) 1250 VA
Make 1000 W/VA
Short duration current (0,5 s) 30 A
Minimum switching load 300 mW (5 V/ 5 mA)
Life:
• Mechanical 106 operations
• Electrical 105 operations
Block output (Logic selectivity)

Quantity 1
Type optocoupler
3.4 MMI
Display 16 x 4 alphanumeric LCD
LEDs
Quantity 8
• ON/fail (green) 1
• Start (yellow) 1
• Trip (red) 1
• Freely allocatable (red)
5
Keyboard 8 keys
3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

Local port
Connection USB Type B
Protocol Modbus RTU®
Remote ports
RS485
• Connection screw terminals
• Baud rate 1200...57600 bps
• Protocol[1] ModBus®RTU
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Ethernet 100BaseT
• Connection[2] Optical fiber 1300 nm, ST
100 Base TX, RJ45
• Baud rate 100 Mbps
• Protocol ModBus®TCP/IP or IEC61850
Note 1 Different version must be selected at ordering

Note 2 Different version must be selected at ordering
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 16
TECHNICAL DATA
3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS
Rated values for version with CT and VT traditional inputs
Relay nominal frequency (fn) 50, 60 Hz
Relay phase nominal current (In) 1 A or 5 A [1]
Phase CT primary nominal current (Inp) 1 A...10 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...10000 A (step 100 A)
Relay residual nominal current (IEn) 1 A or 5 A [1]
Residual CT primary nominal current (IEnp) 1 A...10 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...10000 A (step 100 A)
Relay phase to phase nominal voltage (Un) 50...130 V [2] (step 1 V)
200...520 V [2] (step 1 V)
Relay phase to ground nominal voltage (En) En = Un / √3
Relay measured residual nominal voltage (UEn) 50...130 V (step 1 V)
Relay calculated residual nominal voltage (UECn) UECn = Un · √3 = 3 · En
Line VT primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) 50 V...500 kV
50...499 V (step 1 V)
500...4990 V (step 10 V)
5000...49900 V (step 100 V)
50000...500000 V (step 1000 V)
Residual primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) ∙√3 (UEnp) 50 V...500 kV
50...499 V (step 1 V)
500...4990 V (step 10 V)
5000...49900 V (step 100 V)
50000...500000 V (step 1000 V)
Relay nominal active power (Pn) Pn = √3 ∙ Un ∙ In = 3 ∙ En ∙ In
Relay nominal reactive power (Qn) Qn = √3 ∙ Un ∙ In = 3 ∙ En ∙ In
Relay nominal apparent power (Sn) Sn = √3 ∙ Un ∙ In = 3 ∙ En ∙ In
Rated values for version with ThySensor inputs

Relay nominal frequency (fn) 50, 60 Hz
Phase sensor primary nominal current (Inp)[3] 1 A...10 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...10000 A (step 100 A)
Relay residual nominal current (IEn) 1 A o 5 A [1]
Residual CT primary nominal current (IEnp) 1 A...10 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...10000 A (step 100 A)
Relay phase to phase nominal voltage (Un) [4] 50...130 V (step 1 V)
200...520 V (step 1 V)
Relay phase to ground nominal voltage (En) En = Un / √3
Relay calculated residual nominal voltage (UECN) UECN = Un ∙ √3 = En ∙ 3
Line VT primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) [5] 50 V...500 kV
50...499 V (step 1 V)
500...4990 V (step 10 V)
5000...49900 V (step 100 V)
50000...500000 V (step 1000 V)
Note 1 The nominal current settings doesn’t concern the protection elements; they must agree with hardware setting (dip-switch 1 A or 5 A) .
Note 2 The setting ranges of the relay nominal voltage Un are dependent on the version (to be selected on purchase), with reference voltages UR 100 V
or 400 V.
Nota 3 Inp stays for the current value of rated primary current sensor (630 A) and is the reference to which all relay settings are expressed (In)
Nota 4 Un is the reference to which all relay settings are expressed; a setting Un =100 V is equivalent to a 20 kV primary rated voltage of ThySensor
Nota 5 Unp stays for the voltage value of rated primary current sensor (20 kV) and is the reference to which all relay settings are expressed with Un set
to 100 V.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 17
TECHNICAL DATA
3.7 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Base current - IB[1]

Base current (IB) 0.10...2.50 In (step 0.01 In)
Thermal protection with Pt100 probes - 26[2]

ThAL1...8 Alarm:
Alarm threshold 26 PT1...PT8 (ThAL1...8) 0...200 °C
Operating time ThAL1...8 (tThAL1...8) 0....100 s
Th>1...8 Trip:
Trip threshold 26 PT1...PT8 (Th>1...8) 0...200 °C
Operating time ThAL1...8 (tTh>1...8) 0....100 s
Undervoltage - 27
Common configuration:
Voltage measurement type for 27 (Utype27)[3] U ph-ph /U ph-n
27 Operating logic (Logic27) AND/OR
U< Element
U< Curve type (U<Curve) DEFINITE/INVERSE[4]
Definite time
27 First threshold definite time (U <def) 0.05...1.10 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U<def Operating time (t U<def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Inverse time
27 First threshold inverse time (U <inv) 0.05...1.10 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U<inv Operating time (t U<inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U<< Element
Definite time
27 Second threshold definite time (U<<def) 0.05...1.10 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U<<def Operating time (t U<<def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.03 s
Dropout ratio 1.03...1.05
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.03 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.3% with 0.1Un/En, ± 0.1% with 1Un/En
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms
Thermal image - 49
Initial thermal image DqIN (Dth IN ) 0.0...1.0 DqB (step 0.1 DqB)[5]
Reduction factor at inrush (KINR) 1.0...3.0 (step 0.1)
Thermal time constant t (T ) 1...200 min (step 1 min)
DthCLP activation time (t DthCLP) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
DthAL1 Element
49 First alarm threshold (Dth AL1) 0.3...1.0 DqB (step 0.1 DqB)
DthAL2 Element
49 Second alarm threshold (Dth AL 2 ) 0.5...1.2 DqB (step 0.1 DqB)
Dth> Element
49 Trip threshold (Dth>) 1.100...1.300 DqB (step 0.001 DqB)
Pickup accuracy ± 1% with 0.1 In, ± 1% with 1 In
Note 1 The basic current IB represents the nominal current of the line or transformer, referred to the nominal current of the CT’s for thermal image
protection. Assuming that the secondary rated current of the line CT’s equals the rated current of the NA60 relay, as usually happens, the IB value
is the ratio between the rated current of the protected element and the primary rated current of the CT’s (versions with traditional CT inputs)
For versions with input from ThySensor the relay nominal phase current is automatically set to the value of the nominal current of the secondary
phase sensor. For setting calculation the coupling relay NA60 - ThySensor is equivalent to the pair with NA60 In = 5A with 630 / 5 ratio CTs.
Note 2 The 26 element is available when the MPT module is connect on Thybus and enabled
Note 3 With U ph-ph setting all thresholds are in p.u. Un (MMI), with U ph-n setting all thresholds are in p.u En (MMI)
Note 4 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is: t= (0.75 ∙ t U< inv) / [1 - (U/U< inv)]
t : operating time (in seconds)
tU<inv : operating time setting (referred to U/U< inv = 0.25 ), U<inv: threshold setting
U: input voltage
Note 5 Dq is the thermal image (p.u. of the basic over temperature corresponding to the basic current IB).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 18
TECHNICAL DATA
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (traditional CT inputs)
I> Element
I> Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
RECTIFIER, I2t or EM
I CLP > Activation time (t CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I> Reset time delay (t > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time (I> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def within CLP (ICLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def Operating time (t > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv Operating time (t >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Element
I>> Curve type (I>>Curve) DEFINITE or I2t
I CLP >> Activation time (t CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time (I>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def within CLP (ICLP>>def ) 0.100...40.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def Operating time (t >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t>inv · {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t>inv · {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t>inv · {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t>inv / (I/I>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time
I> inv : pickup value
t>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I> nv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
With I> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 I n , the upper limit is 50 I n
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 19
TECHNICAL DATA
Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>>inv Operating time (t>>inv) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
I>>> Element
I CLP >>> Activation time (t CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time (I>>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def within CLP (ICLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def Operating time (t >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 In, ± 0.2% with 1 In
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (ThySensor inputs)

I> Element
I> Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
I CLP > Activation time (t CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I> Reset time delay (t > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time (I> def ) 0.100...30.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def within CLP (ICLP>def ) 0.100...30.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I> def Operating time (t > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t>inv · {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t>inv · {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t>inv · {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t>inv / (I/I>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time
I> inv : pickup value
t>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I> nv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
With I> inv pickup ≥ 1.75 I n , the upper limit is 35 I n
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 20
TECHNICAL DATA
50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>inv Operating time (t >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Element
I>> Curve type (I>>Curve) DEFINITE or I2t
I CLP >> Activation time (t CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time (I>> def ) 0.100...30.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def within CLP (ICLP>>def ) 0.100...30.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>> def Operating time (t >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
I>>inv Operating time (t>>inv) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
I>>> Element
I CLP >>> Activation time (t CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I>>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time (I>>> def ) 0.100...30.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def within CLP (ICLP>>>def ) 0.100...30.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
I>>> def Operating time (t >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Reference values rest: 0
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 In, ± 0.2% with 1 In
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N

IE> Element
IE > Curve type (IE > Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
EM
IECLP > Activation time (t ECLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE > Reset time delay (t E > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 21
TECHNICAL DATA
Definite time
50N/51N First threshold definite time (IE > def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE > def within CLP (IECLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 IEn)
IE > def Operating time (t E > def ) 0.04...200 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >inv within CLP (IECLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >inv Operating time (t E >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE>> Element
IECLP >> Activation time (t ECLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE >> Reset time delay (t E >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time (IE >> def 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >> def within CLP (IECLP>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >> def Operating time (t E >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IE>>> Element
IECLP >>> Activation time (t ECLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE >>> Reset time delay (t E >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time (IE >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >>> def within CLP (IECLP>>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IE >>> def Operating time (t E >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.01 IEn, ± 0.2% with 1 IEn
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E>inv / [(I E/ I E> inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E > inv / [(I E/I E> inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E > inv / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E > inv · {0.01 / [(I E/I E> inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E > inv · {3.922 / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E > inv · {5.64 / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t E > inv / [-0.236 · (I E/I E> inv)-1+ 0.339]
I E: residual current input
t: operate time
I E> inv : pickup value
t E > inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I E >
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I E/ I E> inv ≤ 20
With I E> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I En, the upper limit is 10 I En
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 22
TECHNICAL DATA
Overvoltage - 59
Voltage measurement type for 59 - phase to phase/phase to neutral (Utype59)[1] U ph-ph /U ph-n
59 Operating logic (Logic59) AND/OR
U> Element
U> Curve type (U>Curve) DEFINITE/INVERSE[2]
Definite time
59 First threshold definite time (U >def) 0.50...1.50 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U>def Operating time (t U> def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Inverse time
59 First threshold inverse time (U >inv) 0.50...1.50 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U>inv Operating time (t U>inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U>> Element
Definite time
59 Second threshold definite time (U>>def) 0.50...1.50 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U>>def Operating time (t U>> def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup accuracy ± 0.3% con 0.1Un/En, ± 0.1% con 1Un/En
Residual overvoltage - 59N (traditional VT inputs)

Residual voltage measurement type for 59N - direct/calculated (3 VoType59N) U E /U EC
U E > Element
U E> Reset time delay (t UE>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
59N First threshold definite time (U E >def) 0.01...0.70 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>def Operating time (t UE >def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Inverse time
59N First threshold inverse time (U E >inv) 0.01...0.50 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>inv Operating time (t UE >inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U E >> Element
U E>> Reset time delay (t UE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
59N Second threshold definite time (UE>>def) 0.01...0.70 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>>def Operating time (t UE >>def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1 With U ph-ph setting all thresholds are in p.u. Un; with U ph-n setting all thresholds are in p.u En
Note 2 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is: t = (0.5 ∙ t U> inv) / [(U/U> inv) - 1 ]
t: operating time (in seconds)
tU>inv: operating time setting (referred to U/U> inv = 1.5 )
U: input voltage
U>inv: threshold setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 U>inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ U/U> inv ≤ 4
With U>inv pickup ≥ 0.5 Un, the upper limit is 2 Un
Note 3 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is t= (0.5 ∙ t UE> inv) / [(UE/UE> inv) - 1]
tUE>inv: operating time setting (referred to UE/UE> inv = 1.5)
UE: residual input voltage (direct or calculated)
UE>inv: threshold setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 UE> inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ UE/UE> inv ≤ 4
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 23
TECHNICAL DATA
Pickup accuracy with measured residual voltage (UE) ± 0.05% UEn
Pickup accuracy with calculated residual voltage (UEC) ± 1% with 0.01UECn, ± 0.5% with 0.1UECn
Residual overvoltage - 59N (ThySensor inputs)

Residual voltage measurement type for 59N - calculated (3 VoType59N) U EC
U E > Element
U E> Reset time delay (t UE>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
59N First threshold definite time (U E >def) 0.01...0.70 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>def Operating time (t UE >def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Inverse time
59N First threshold inverse time (U E >inv) 0.01...0.50 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>inv Operating time (t UE >inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U E >> Element
U E>> Reset time delay (t UE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
59N Second threshold definite time (UE>>def) 0.01...0.70 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>>def Operating time (t UE >>def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (Traditional CT & VT inputs)

67 Operating mode (Mode67) I /I ∙cos
67 Operating logic (Logic67) 1/3 / 2/3
67 Operating from 74VT internal (74VTint67) OFF/Block/Not directional
67 Operating from 74VT external (74VText67) OFF/Block/Not directional
IPD> Element
IPD> Curve type (IPD>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
IPDCLP > Activation time (t PDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD> Reset time delay (t PD > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 First threshold definite time (IPD > def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD > def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
Note 1 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is t= (0.5 ∙ t UE> inv) / [(UE/UE> inv) - 1]
tUE>inv: operating time setting (referred to UE/UE> inv = 1.5)
UE: residual input voltage (direct or calculated)
UE>inv: threshold setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 UE> inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ UE/UE> inv ≤ 4
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 24
TECHNICAL DATA
IPD > def within CLP (IPDCLP>def ) 0.100...40.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD > def Operating time (t PD > def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
67 First threshold inverse time (IPD >inv) 0.100...10.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>inv) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >inv within CLP (IPDCLP>inv) 0.100...10.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >inv Operating time (t PD >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>> Element
IPD>> Curve type (IPD>>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
IPDCLP >> Activation time (t PDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>> Reset time delay (t PD >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 Second threshold definite time (IPD >> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >> def Operating time (t PD >> def ) 0.04...200 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time
67 Second threshold inverse time (IPD >>inv) 0.100...10.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>inv) 0...359° (step 1°)
EIPD >>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>>inv) 0.100...10.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >>inv Operating time (t PD >>inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t PD>inv / [(I/IPD>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t> inv / [(I/IPD>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t PD>inv / [(I/IPD>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t PD>inv · {0.01 / [(I/IPD>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t PD>inv · {3.922 / [(I/IPD>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t PD>inv · {5.64 / [(I/IPD>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t PD>inv / (I/IPD>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t PD>inv / [-0.236 · (I/IPD>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t PD>inv / [(I/IPD>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time
I PD> inv : pickup value
t PD>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I PD > inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/IPD>inv ≤ 20
With I PD> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 I n , the upper limit is 50 I n
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 25
TECHNICAL DATA
IPD>>> Element
IPDCLP >>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 Third threshold definite time (IPD >>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>> def Operating time (t PD >>> def ) 0.04...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IPD>>>> Element
IPDCLP >>>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 Fourth threshold definite time (IPD >>>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >>>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>>> def Operating time (t PD >>>> def ) 0.04...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup accuracy (current thresholds) ± 1% with 0.1 In, ± 0.5% with 1 In
Pickup accuracy (voltage thresholds) ± 0.3% with 0.1Un, ± 0.1% with 1Un
Pickup accuracy (displacements) ± 2° with 0.1 In - 0.1Un
± 0.5° with 1In - 1 Un
Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (ThySensor inputs)

67 Operating mode (Mode67) I /I ∙cos
67 Operating logic (Logic67) 1/3 / 2/3
67 Operating from 74VT internal (74VTint67) OFF/Block/Not directional
67 Operating from 74VT external (74VText67) OFF/Block/Not directional
IPD> Element
IPD> Curve type (IPD>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
IPDCLP > Activation time (t PDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD> Reset time delay (t PD > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 First threshold definite time (IPD > def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD > def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 26

TECHNICAL DATA
IPD > def within CLP (IPDCLP>def ) 0.010...30.00 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD > def Operating time (t PD > def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
67 First threshold inverse time (IPD >inv) 0.010...10.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>inv) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >inv within CLP (IPDCLP>inv) 0.010...10.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >inv Operating time (t PD >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>> Element
IPD>> Curve type (IPD>>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
IPDCLP >> Activation time (t PDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>> Reset time delay (t PD >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 Second threshold definite time (IPD >> def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >> def Operating time (t PD >> def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time
67 Second threshold inverse time (IPD >>inv) 0.010...10.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>inv) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>>inv) 0.010...10.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.010...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IPD >>inv Operating time (t PD >>inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t PD>inv / [(I/IPD>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t> inv / [(I/IPD>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t PD>inv / [(I/IPD>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t PD>inv · {0.01 / [(I/IPD>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t PD>inv · {3.922 / [(I/IPD>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t PD>inv · {5.64 / [(I/IPD>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t PD>inv / (I/IPD>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t PD>inv / [-0.236 · (I/IPD>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t PD>inv / [(I/IPD>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time
I PD> inv : pickup value
t PD>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I PD > inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/IPD>inv ≤ 20
With I PD> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 I n , the upper limit is 50 I n
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 27
TECHNICAL DATA
IPD>>> Element
IPDCLP >>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 Third threshold definite time (IPD >>> def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>> def Operating time (t PD >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IPD>>>> Element
IPDCLP >>>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IPD>>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67 Fourth threshold definite time (IPD >>>> def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>>def ) 0...359° (step 1°)
IPD >>>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>>def ) 0.010...30.0 In
0.010...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...30.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IPD >>>> def Operating time (t PD >>>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup accuracy (current thresholds) ± 1% con 0.1 In, ± 0.5% con 1 In
Pickup accuracy (voltage thresholds) ± 0.3% con 0.1Un, ± 0.1% con 1Un
Pickup accuracy (displacements) ± 2° con 0.1 In - 0.1Un
± 0.5° con 1In - 1 Un
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (Traditional CT & VT inputs)

67N Operating mode (Mode67N) I /I ∙cos
Residual voltage measurement type for 67N - direct/calculated (3VoType67N) U E / U EC
67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M) 1.5...10.0 (step 0.1)
67N Operation from 74VT internal (74VTint67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
67N Operation from 74VT external (74VText67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
IED> Element
IED> Curve type (IED>Curve)
DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM
IEDCLP > Activation time (t EDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED> Reset time delay (t ED > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N First threshold definite time (IED>def - UED>def )
Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 28

TECHNICAL DATA
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IED > def within CLP (IEDCLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED > def Operating time (t ED > def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
67N First threshold inverse time (IED>inv - UED>inv)
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >inv Operating time (t ED >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>> Element
IED>> Curve type (IED>>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
IEDCLP >> Activation time (t EDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>> Reset time delay (t ED >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Second threshold definite time (IED >> def - UED >> def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >> def within CLP (IEDCLP >> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >> def Operating time (t ED >> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED>inv / [(IE/IED>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED> inv / [(IE/IED>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t ED>inv / [(IE/IED>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t ED>inv · {0.01 / [(IE/IED>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t ED>inv · {3.922 / [(IE/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t ED>inv · {5.64 / [(IE/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t ED>inv / [-0.236 · (IE/IED>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I ED> inv : pickup value
t ED>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I ED > inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE/IED>inv ≤ 20
With I ED> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I E n , the upper limit is 10 I En
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 29
TECHNICAL DATA
Inverse time[1]
67N Second threshold inverse time (IED >>inv - UED >>inv)
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>inv Operating time (t ED >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IED>>> Element
IEDCLP >>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Third threshold definite time (IED >>> def - UED >>> def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>> def Operating time (t ED >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IED>>>> Element
IEDCLP >>>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Fourth threshold definite time (IED >>>> def - UED >>>> def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>>> def Operating time (t ED >>>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Dropout time ≤ 0.05s
Pickup accuracy with measured residual voltage (UE) ± 0.05%
Pickup accuracy for residual current ± 0.5% with 0.01 IEn,
± 0.2% with 1 IEn
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED>>inv / [(IE/IED>>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED>> inv / [(IE/IED>>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t ED>>inv / [(IE/IED>>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t ED>>inv · {0.01 / [(IE/IED>>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t ED>>inv · {3.922 / [(IE/IED>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t ED>>inv · {5.64 / [(IE/IED>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t ED>>inv / [-0.236 · (IE/IED>>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I ED>> inv : pickup value
t ED>>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I ED >> inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE/IED>>inv ≤ 20
With I ED>> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I n , the upper limit is 10 I En
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 30
TECHNICAL DATA
Pickup accuracy (displacements)
± 2° with 0.002 IEn - 0.004 UEn
± 0.5° with 0.005 IEn - 0.01 UEn
± 0.5° with 0.1 IEn - 0.5 UEn
± 0.3% with 1 IEn
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (ThySensor inputs)

67N Operating mode (Mode67N) I /I ∙cos
Residual voltage measurement type for 67N - calculated (3VoType67N) U EC
67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M) 1.5...10.0 (step 0.1)
67N Operation from 74VT internal (74VTint67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
67N Operation from 74VT external (74VText67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
IED> Element
IED> Curve type (IED>Curve)
DEFINITE,
IEC/BS A, B, C,
IEDCLP > Activation time (t EDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED> Reset time delay (t ED > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N First threshold definite time (IED>def - UED>def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED > def within CLP (IEDCLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED > def Operating time (t ED > def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
67N First threshold inverse time (IED>inv - UED>inv)
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >inv Operating time (t ED >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>> Element
IED>> Curve type (IED>>Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C
IEDCLP >> Activation time (t EDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED>inv / [(IE/IED>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED> inv / [(IE/IED>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t ED>inv / [(IE/IED>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t ED>inv · {0.01 / [(IE/IED>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t ED>inv · {3.922 / [(IE/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t ED>inv · {5.64 / [(IE/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t ED>inv / [-0.236 · (IE/IED>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I ED> inv : pickup value
t ED>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I ED > inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE/IED>inv ≤ 20
With I ED> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I E n , the upper limit is 10 I En
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 31
TECHNICAL DATA
IED>> Reset time delay (t ED >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Second threshold definite time (IED >> def - UED >> def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >> def within CLP (IEDCLP >> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >> def Operating time (t ED >> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inverse time[1]
67N Second threshold inverse time (IED >>inv - UED >>inv)
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>inv Operating time (t ED >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IED>>> Element
IEDCLP >>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Third threshold definite time (IED >>> def - UED >>> def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>> def Operating time (t ED >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IED>>>> Element
IEDCLP >>>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Fourth threshold definite time (IED >>>> def - UED >>>> def )
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED>>inv / [(IE/IED>>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED>> inv / [(IE/IED>>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t ED>>inv / [(IE/IED>>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t ED>>inv · {0.01 / [(IE/IED>>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t ED>>inv · {3.922 / [(IE/IED>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t ED>>inv · {5.64 / [(IE/IED>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t ED>>inv / [-0.236 · (IE/IED>>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I ED>> inv : pickup value
t ED>>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I ED >> inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE/IED>>inv ≤ 20
With I ED>> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I n , the upper limit is 10 I En
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 32
TECHNICAL DATA
IED >>>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn
0.002...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn)
1.00...10.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)
IED >>>> def Operating time (t ED >>>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup accuracy with measured residual voltage (UE) ± 0.05%
Pickup accuracy with calculated residual voltage (UEC) ± 1% with 0.01UECn,
± 0.5% with 0.1UECn
Pickup accuracy for residual current thresholds ± 4% with 0.1 In,
± 1% with 1 In
Pickup accuracy (displacements) ± 2° with 0.1 In - 0.004 UEn
± 0.5° with 1 In - 0.01 UEn
Breaker failure - BF
BF Phase current threshold (IBF >) 0.05...1.00 I n (step 0.01 I n )
BF Residual current threshold (IEBF >) 0.01...2.00 I n (step 0.01 I En )
BF Time delay (tBF) 0.06...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IBF >Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 InL
± 0.2% with 1 InL
IEBF >Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.01 IEn
± 0.2% with 1 IEn
tBF Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 33

TECHNICAL DATA
3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING
Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST
Second harmonic restraint threshold (I 2ndh >) 10...50 % (step 1 %)
I 2ndh > reset time delay (t 2ndh>RES) 0...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup accuracy I 2ndh > ± 4% ± 1% I n
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS

Operate time:
• One binary input supervision 40 s
• Two binary inputs supervision 2s
Reset time delay:
One binary input supervision/two binary inputs supervision 6 s / 0.6 s
Selective block - BLOCK2

Selective block IN:
• BLIN1 Selective block operating mode (ModeBLIN1) OFF-ON IPh/IE-ON IPh-ON IE
• BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections (t B-IPh) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections (t B-IE) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Selective block OUT:
• BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode (ModeBLOUT1) OFF-ON IPh/IE-ON IPh-ON IE
• BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections (t F -IPh ) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections (t F -IE ) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections (tF-IPh/IE) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Internal selective block - BLOCK4

Output internal selective block dropout time for phase protections (t F I-IPh )
0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Output internal selective block dropout time for ground protections (t F I-IE )
0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Circuit Breaker supervision

Circuit breaker diagnostic
Number of CB trips threshold (N.Open) 0...10000 (step 1)
Cumulative CB tripping currents threshold (SumI) 0....5000 I n (step 1 I n )
Cumulative CB tripping I2t threshold (SumI^2t) 0....5000 (I n )2∙s (step 1 I n 2∙s)
Circuit Breaker opening time for I^2t calculation (t break ) 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Circuit Breaker maximum allowed opening time (t break >) 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
VT supervision - 74VT
74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold (U 2 V T> ) 0.05...0.50 E n (step 0.01 E n )
74VT Negative sequence overcurrent threshold (I 2 V T> ) 0.05...0.50 I n (step 0.01 In)
74VT Phase undervoltage threshold (U V T< ) 0.05...0.50 E n (step 0.01 E n )
74VT Minimum change of current threshold (D I V T< ) 0.05...0.50 I n (step 0.01 In)
74VT Undercurrent inhibition threshold (I V T< ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
74VT Alarm time delay (t V T-A L ) 0.0...10.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup accuracy for negative sequence voltage ± 5% with 0.01 Un
± 0.5% with 0.15 Un
Pickup accuracy for negative sequence current ± 1% with I2 = 0.5 In
± 1% with I2 = 1 In
CT supervision - 74CT
74CT Threshold (S<) 0.10...0.95 (step 0.01)
74CT Overcurrent threshold (I * ) 0.10...1.00 I n (step 0.01 In)
S< Operating time delay (t S <) 0.03...200 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Dropout ratio for the I * pickup 0.95...0.98
Pickup accuracy S< ± 1% with 0.1 In , ± 0.5% with 1 In
Pickup accuracy I * ± 0.5% with 0.1 In , ± 0.2% with 1 In
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 34
TECHNICAL DATA
Pilot wire diagnostic
• BLOUT1 Diagnostic pulse period (PulseBLOUT1) OFF-0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s
• BLIN1 Diagnostic pulse control time interval (PulseBLIN1) OFF-0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s
Demand measures
• Fix on demand period (t F I X ) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
• Rolling on demand period (t ROL ) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
• Number of cycles for rolling on demand (N. ROL ) 1...24 (step 1)
Oscillography (DFR)[1]
Format COMTRADE
Recording mode circular
Sampling rate 24 samples / cycle
Trigger setup:
• Pre-trigger time 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
• Post-trigger time 0.05...60.00 s (step 0.05 s)
Set sample channels:
iL1, uL1, iL2 , uL2 , iL3, uL3, iE , uE[2]
Set analog channels:
Analog 1...Analog 12 Frequency, IL1, UL1, IL2 , UL2 , IL3, UL3,
IE , UE , U12 , U23, U31, UEC, PhiL1, PhiL2 ,
PhiL3, Alpha1, Alpha2, Alpha3, PhiE ,
PhiEC, IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd, I-2nd /IL ,
T1...T8[3]
Set digital channels:
Digital 1...Digital 12 K1... K6, K7...K10,
IN1, IN2, IN3...IN42[4]
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)[5]

Reference standard IEC 61131-3
Language[6] IL (Instruction List)
Inputs:
Binary inputs IN1, IN2 on board
IN8...IN10 with MRI module
IN11...IN26 with one MID16 module
IN27...IN42 with two MID16 modules
Delayed binary inputs[7] IN1, IN2 on board
Start (all elements) Start U<, Start U<<,...etc
Trip (all elements) Trip U<, Trip U<<,...etc
Measures IL1, IL2,...ecc
Temperature Pt100
Block inputs BLK2IN-Iph, BLK2IN-IE,...etc
Outputs:
Relays K11...K6 on board
K7...K10 with MRI module
LEDs START, TRIP, L1...L6 on board

L7...L10 with MRI module
Block outputs BLK2OUT-Iph, BLK2OUT-IE,...etc
Current converter DAC
Note 1 For the DFR function a licence is required; call Thytronic for purchasing.
Nota 2 Available with CT-VT versions only
Note 3 The measures of temperature are available only when the MPT module on Thybus is enabled (eigth Pt100 inputs)
Note 4 Output relay K7...K10 and binary input IN3...IN42 states are available only when the concerning I/O circuits are implemented (MRI and MID16
modules on Thybus)
Note 5 For the PLC function a licence is required; call Thytronic for purchasing.
Note6 With ThyVisor V3.4.3 release and compiler IEC 61131-3 V1.2.7 only the IL language is implemented (Instruction List);
other languages, according with IEC 61131 standard (ST (Structured Text)), LD (Ladder Diagram), FBD (Function Block Diagram), SFC (Sequential
Functional Chart), will be available soon
Note 7 The input state is acquired downstream the tON and tOFF timers
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 35
TECHNICAL DATA
3.9 METERING
More data are available inside Section 5 - MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
Accuracy (type tests)
MEASURE Reference values Accuracy Reference values Accuracy

Phase current 0.1 In 0.2% 1 In 0.03%
Measured residual current 0.01 IEn 0.3% 1 IEn 0.02%
Calculated residual current 0.1...1 IECn 2% 1 IECn 0.3%
Phase voltage 0.1 Un 0.2% 1 Un 0.03%
Measured residual voltage 0.01 UEn 0.02% 0.1 UEn 0.02%
Calculated residual voltage 0.01 UECn 0.5% 0.1 UECn 0.3%
Power - Energy 0.01 Pn 2% 0.1...1 Pn 0.3%
Frequency 0.02 Un 3 mHz 1 Un 2 mHz
Phase 0.002 IEn - 0.004 UEn 1.5° 0.005 IEn - 0.01 UEn - 0.1 IEn - 0.5 UEn 0.2°
Positive/Negative sequence current I1 = 0.5 In 0.5% I1 = 1 In 0.5%
Positive/Negative sequence voltage 0.01 Un 4% 0.15 Un 0.3%
Pickup and operate time 1.5 x setting for fist element 5% ± 10 ms 2.5 x setting for other elements 5% ± 10 ms
Measures
Direct
Frequency (f )
RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents (I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 )
RMS value of fundamental component for phase voltages (U L1, U L 2 , U L 3 )
RMS value of fundamental component for residual current (I E )
RMS value of fundamental component for residual voltage (U E ) [1]
Calculated
Thermal image (DTheta)
Phase-to-phase voltages (U 12 , U 23 , U 31)
Calculated residual voltage (U EC )
Maximum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I Lmax)
Minimum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I Lmin)
Average current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I L)
Maximum voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 (U Lmax)
Average voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 (U L )
Maximum voltage between U 12 -U 23 -U 31 (U max)
Average voltage between U 12 -U 23 -U 31 (U)
Displacement
Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U L1 (PhiL1)
Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U L 2 (PhiL2)
Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U L 3 (PhiL3)
Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U 23 (Alpha1)
Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U 31 (Alpha2)
Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U 12 (Alpha3)
Displacement angle of U E respect to I E (PhiE) [1]
Displacement angle of U EC respect to I E (PhiEC)
Sequence
Positive sequence current (I 1)
Negative sequence current (I 2 )
Negative sequence current/positive sequence current ratio (I 2 /I 1)
Negative sequence voltage (U 2 )
Power
Total active power (P )
Total reactive power (Q )
Total apparent power (S )
Power factor (cosPhi )
Phase reactive powers (P L1, P L 2 , P L 3 )
Phase reactive powers (Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3 )
Phase power factor (cosPhiL1, cosPhiL2, cosPhiL3 )
Note 1 Available with CT-VT input versions only

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 36
TECHNICAL DATA
2nd harmonic
Second harmonic of phase currents (I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3-2nd )
Maximum of the second harmonic phase currents/
Fundamental component percentage ratio I-2nd /IL (I -2nd /I L )
3rd harmonic
Third harmonic of phase currents (I L1-3rd , I L 2-3rd , I L 3-3rd )
Third harmonic of residual current (I E-3rd )
Third harmonic of residual voltage (U E-3rd )
4th harmonic
Fourth harmonic of phase currents (I L1-4th , I L 2-4th , I L 3-4th)
5th harmonic
Fifth harmonic of phase currents (I L1-5th , I L 2-5th , I L 3-5th)
Demand phase
Phase fixed currents demand (I L1FIX , I L 2FIX , I L 3FIX )
Phase rolling currents demand (I L1ROL , I L 2ROL , I L 3ROL )
Phase peak currents demand (I L1MA X , I L 2MA X , I L 3MA X )
Phase minimum currents demand (I L1MIN , I L 2MIN , I L 3MIN )
Demand power
Fixed active power demand (P FIX )
Fixed reactive power demand (Q FIX )
Rolling active power demand (P ROL )
Rolling reactive power demand (Q ROL )
Peak active power demand (P MA X )
Peak reactive power demand (Q MA X )
Minimum active power demand (P MIN )
Minimum reactive power demand (Q MIN)
Energy
Positive active energy (E A +)
Negative active energy (E A -)
Total active energy (E A )
Positive reactive energy (E Q +)
Negative reactive energy (E Q -)
Total reactive energy (E Q )
PT100 [1]
Temperature PT1 (T1)
Temperature PT2 (T2 )
Note 1 The measures of temperature are available only when the MPT module on Thybus is enabled (eight Pt100 inputs)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 37
TECHNICAL DATA
4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
The following figure illustrates the device layout.
MMI
LCD
LEDs
ETHERNET
USB
RS485
1A/5A
EEprom SRam CTs & VTs
EEprom Flash SRam
≈ INPUT MODULE
≈
CPU
SPI
DSP ≈
Thybus
DUAL
PORT ≈ Alternative
RTC ThySensor
INPUT MODULE
I L1 -
I L2 -
CPU BOARD I L3 -
POWER FAIL
RESET
+10 V
+24 V
-10 V
+5 V
0V
BINARY INPUTS
POWER SUPPLY IN1
Input
IN2
BLOCK I/O
BLKIN Input
BLKOUT Output
Uaux
RELAYS
K1...K6 Output contacts
POWER SUPPLY BOARD

hw.ai
Printed boards hold the circuit components arranged according to a modular allocation of the main
functions.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 38

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Power supply board
All the components necessary for conversion and stabilization functions are present.
Two versions are envisaged suited to the input ranges 24...48 V and 115...230 V.
The circuit provides stabilized voltages of +10 V and -10 V, required for the analogue measurement,
+24 V for relays and +5 V for supplying the digital circuits.
The circuit board additionally comprises:
INPUT CIRCUITS:
• Two binary input circuits,
• One block input circuit (BLIN1).
The logical input circuits and the block circuits include photo-couplers which provide for galvanic
separation.
OUTPUT CIRCUITS:
• One block output circuit (BLOUT 1),
• Six output relays (k1...K6).
CPU board
This circuit board contains all the circuits necessary for performing the analogue and digital pro-
cessing of the signals.
Analog processing
The following are envisaged:
• Anti aliasing filter circuits,
• Amplifier circuits for conditioning the input signals,
• Reference voltage adjustment circuits for the measurement A/D converter.
The Pro-n relays use a DSP processor operating at 40 MHz; it performs all the processing on the
analogue signals and furthermore coordinates management of the TX-RX signals to the CPU.
The input currents are sampled at a frequency of 24 samples per period by means of a dual conver-
sion system which allows the attainment of information pertaining to polarity and amplitude with high
resolution. The measurement criterion allows precise measurement of even those signals having a
unidirectional component, such as transient currents with overlapping exponential, which typically
appear during faults.
The circuit board also houses the output relays with the corresponding command and control cir-
cuits, communication circuits, buttons, LCD display, LEDs and the key switch.
CPU
A 32 bit CPU is provided.
The following are envisaged:
• Real Time Clock circuits with oscillator and super capacitor,
• USB communication port,
• RS485 communication port,
• Thybus communication circuits for external modules and MMI board,
• Network communication circuits (optional Ethernet).
Memories:
• SRam: high speed static memory, used for data and cache,
• Flash memory: used for fw storage and upgrade,
• EEprom memory: used for calibration data storage,
• Dual port Ram for data transfer between CPU and DSP.
Input board
CT & VT input versions
• Three CTs committed for phase currents acquisition
• One CT committed for residual current acquisition
The input circuits are suitable for 1 A or 5 A external CTs[1]
• Three VTs committed for phase voltages acquisition
• One VT committed for residual voltage acquisition.
ThySensor input versions

• One CT committed for residual current acquisition
• Three low voltage inputs for phase currents acquisition from ThySensor
• Three low voltage inputs for phase voltages acquisition from ThySensor
MMI (keyboard, LED and display)

The MMI module (Man Machine Interface) includes:
• An eight keys 8 keyboard,
• a backlight LCD display,
• Eight signalling LEDs,
The removable plug allows separation of the MMI module for free access to the CPU board when
DIP-switch setting is required.
Note 1 The phase and residual nominal currents must be adjusted by means dip-switch.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 39
4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION
The program which handles operation of the Pro-N relays is made up of three fundamental elements
shown in the following block diagram.
Ethernet RS485 USB

TIMER I/O boards
RTOS timer KEYS

PC com
Sync +
RTOS timer RTC refresh
Messages
EEPROM Binary inputs
RTOS timer update
Output relays
RAM/EPROM Diagnostic
memory check
LEDs
I/O
Data Base DATA BASE Thybus
Fast devices
Counters
EEPROM
Events
MMI Slow devices
sampling Measures
DSP
RTOS timer
Oscillography
KEYS
SIMBOLOGIA
task Processo (task)
Drivers Libreria funzionale (Drivers)
RTOS timer Timer del sistema operativo

Interrupt sw.ai
Base software
Single modules are application independent with modular and scalable structure.
The system can be assimilated to the PC BIOS (Basic Input-Output System); three main function are
provided:
• Start-up test execution;
• RAM loading of the operating system;
• Provide a suitable interface to access the relay hardware.
Real-time operating system

An embedded operative system is employed suitable for real-time applications (RTOS).
A multithread preemptive structure is able to menage several task with multiple priority levels .
The kernel represents the nucleus of the system: it includes the processing functions closest to the
electronic circuits.
In addition, the kernel manages a service communication protocol known as Basic Protocol (BP).
Task
The task (process e thread) are the base components.
Example are:
• Keyboard management
• RTC (Real Time Clock) updating
• RAM/EEPROM updating
• Diagnostic
• Input acquisition
• Output relay management
• MMI
• I/O updating
• DSP data processing
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 40

DSP Firmware
By means of Discrete Fourier Transform calculation, based on 24 samples/period, information is de-
duced in relation to the amplitude and phase of all the current measurements; these are constantly
updated and at the disposal of all the protection and control application algorithms.
Drivers
Inside the driver library, all the specialized module for protection and control function are provided.
They are the link from kernel and application layer. Examples are:
• Data base management
• PC messages management
• TCP/IP messages management
• Basic Protocol management
• Counter management
• Event and fault management
• Measuring management
• Oscillography management
Application Software
The software acts the specialization of the base system; all protective and control elements are
inside it.
The main modules ate:
• Diagnostic function for application layer,
• Input management (binary inputs),
• Protective functions,
• Event recording,
• Output management (LEDs and relays)
Each element (Kernel, Drivers and Application) may, in turn, be split into modules:
Base protocol (kernel)

The module known as the Basic Protocol (BP) manages the service communication between the
kernel and the other modules through the communication buses with the following services:
• Data and information exchange,
• Calibration,
• Upgrade fw DSP,
• Upgrade application sw
Communication (drivers)
The ModBus TCP/IP or IEC61850 protocol, with ethernet interface, the ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103
and DNP3 protocol over RS485 interface and the ModBus RTU USB for ThyVisor are provided.
MMI (drivers)
The drivers deal with the menu management (MMi and/or communication messages).
Data Base
The data base is split into three main sections:
• RAM for volatile data,
• REE and PAR for non volatile data.
Self test (Application)

The main hw and sw function are permanently verified in background; no additional delay are intro-
duced.
In particular the following function are tested:
• Reference voltages;
• Output relays;
• Sw flow with execution time monitoring;
• REE and PAR data congruence.
Development tools (Builder)

For the development of the project, a CASE instrument has been developed, responsible for the opti-
mized production of software code for the management of collaboration, the database and the MMI
data and the Xml files used for communication. The automatic code generation criteria ensures the
quality of the result in terms of the reusability, verifiability and maintainability of the software life
cycle.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 41

4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION
Metering inputs
CT-VT input versions
The following inputs are provided:
• Three phase current inputs
• One residual current input
• The nominal currents are independently adjustable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches
• Three phase voltage inputs with programmable nominal voltages within range 50...130 V (UR=100 V)
or 200...520 V (UR=400 V) to be select on order. The nominal voltages is user adjustable inside a
wide setting range, so the relays can be employed on plants with TV different secondary voltages
(50...130 V for versions with U R =100V and 200...520V for versions with U R =400 V). The version with
U R =400V allows a direct measure without interposing VTs for low voltage applications (200...520 V
nominal voltage). The voltage inputs must be connected for measuring phase-to-neutral voltages.
From the U L1 , U L2 , U L3 measures the phase-to-phase voltages U L12 , U L23 , U L31 are calculated
• One residual voltage input, with programmable nominal voltage within range 50...130 V (UER=100 V).
NA60
One residual voltage input

Three phase voltage inputs
Three phase current inputs
One residual current input
sensori.ai
THySensor input versions

The following inputs are provided:
• One residual current input adjustable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches
• Three low voltage phase current inputs
• Three low voltage phase voltage inputs; the phase-to-ground voltages are acquired (U L1 , U L2 , U L3 )
and the phase-to-phase voltages are computed (U L12 , U L23 , U L31 ).
NA60
Three phase voltage inputs
Three phase current inputs
One residual current input
Thysensor1i.ai
The input circuits are appropriately dimensioned in order to withstand the currents which arise
when a fault occurs, both in transient and steady state condition.
Signal processing
Various processing levels are involved:
• Acquisition (base level).
• Direct measures of physical channels (first level).
• Calculated measures (second level).
• Derived (third level).
The measures concerning a level are based on data worked out in the previous level.
For each level the required resources concerning the priority for tasks (conditioning circuits, DSP
and CPU) are on hand.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 42

ACQUISITION (base level)
The input signals are sampled 24 times per period:
ACQUISITION
≈ instantaneous measures
acquisizione.ai
- iL1...iL3 Phase current instantaneous values

- iE Residual current instantaneous value
- uL1...uL3 Phase voltage instantaneous values
- uE Residual voltage instantaneous value (traditional VT inputs only)
From the sampled quantities, several measures are computed for protection, monitoring and meter-
ing purposes.
• Direct
• Calculated
• Phase
• Sequence
• Power
• Harmonic
• Demand
• Energy
Direct
• Frequency. The measure of period is taken preferably from voltage inputs; when all voltage are
missing the input current are employed.
VT ACQUISITION
uL1
UL1 ≈
uL2 f
UL2 ≈ (Hz)
T
uL3
UL3 ≈
CT
i L1
IL1 ≈
i L2 f
IL2 ≈ (Hz)
T
i L3
IL3 ≈
F. a i
Samples are processed by means DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and the phase and
amplitude of fundamental are computed:
• Phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3
ACQUISITION
CT
i L1, i L2 , i L3 IL1, IL2 , IL3
≈ DFT (In)
IL1.ai
• Phase voltages UL1, UL2, UL3
ACQUISITION
VT
u L1, u L2 , u L3 U L1, U L2 , U L3
≈ DFT (Un)
UL 1 . a i
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 43

• Residual current IE
ACQUISITION
CT
iE IE
≈ DFT (IEn)
IE.ai
• Residual voltage UE (traditional VT inputs only)
ACQUISITION UE
VT DFT (fundamental) (UEn)
uE
≈
U E3H
DFT (3rd harmonic) (UEn)
UE . a i
Calculated
By means vector addition of direct measures the following are calculated (RMS value of fundamen-
tal components):
• Phase-to-phase voltages: U12, U23, U31
UL1
U12
UL2 U12 = UL1 - UL2 (Un)
UL2 U31 UL1 U12

U23
UL3 U23 = UL2 - UL3 (Un)
UL3 UL2
UL1
U 31
UL3 U 31 = UL3 - UL1 (Un)
U23
U1 2 . a i
• Fundamental component of the calculated residual voltage UEC[1]
UL1
UL2 UEC
UEC = UL1 + UL2 + UL3 (UEn)
UL3
UE C . a i
• Thermal image ∆θ
IL1
I1
I1 = (IL1 + e+j120°IL 2 + e-j120°IL 3 ) It h
( )
2
IL2 2 2 2 ∆θ
It h = √(I1 + K2 ∙I2 ) d∆θ ∆θ IB (∆θB )
-j120° +j120° I2 + =
IL3 I2 = (IL1 + e IL 2 + e IL 3 ) dt T+ T+
Theta.ai
Note 1 In versions with VT inputs, the residual voltage is available as a direct measure UE as a computed measure UEC, while versions with input from
ThySensor residual voltage is only available as a calculated measure UEC
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 44
Phase
• Displacement angle of any phase current respect the corresponding phase-to-neutral voltage
(negative with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiL1, PhiL2, PhiL3,
• Displacement angle of any phase current respect the remaining phase-to-phase voltages (nega-
tive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): AlphaL1, AlphaL2, AlphaL3,
• Displacement angle of the residual current respect the corresponding measured residual voltage
(positive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiE (traditional VT inputs only),
• Displacement angle of the residual current respect the corresponding calculated residual voltage
(positive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiEC
UL1
UL2 ϕL1 = ∠U L1 - ∠IL1 Phi L1 , Phi L 2 ,Phi L 3
(° )
UL2 ϕL 2 = ∠U L 2 - ∠IL 2
IL1 ϕL 3 = ∠U L 3 - ∠IL 3
AlphaL1 , AlphaL 2 , AlphaL 3
IL2 αL1 = ∠U 2 3 - ∠IL1 (° )
IL3 αL 2 = ∠U 3 1 - ∠IL 2
Phi E
UE αL 3 = ∠U12 - ∠IL 3 (° )
UEC ϕE = ∠IE - ∠U E
Phi EC
IE ϕEC = ∠IE - ∠U EC (° )
Fase.ai
Sequence
• Fundamental RMS positive sequence current: I1
• Fundamental RMS negative sequence current: I2
IL1
I1
IL2 I1 = (IL1 + e+j120°IL 2 + e-j120°IL 3 ) / 3 (In)
-j120° +j120° I2
IL3 I2 = (IL1 + e IL 2 + e IL 3 ) / 3 (In)
1 √3 1 √3
e-j120°= - +j120°
-j e =- +j
2 2 2 2 I 1 -I 2 . a i
• Fundamental RMS negative sequence voltage: U2
UL1
UL2 U2
U 2 = (U L1 + e-j120°U L 2 + e+j120°U L 3 ) (un)
UL3
1 √3 1 √3
e-j120°= - +j120°
-j e =- +j
2 2 2 2 U2 . a i
Demand
• Fixed demand (IL1FIX, IL2FIX, IL3FIX, ±P FIX, ±Q FIX)
Inside an adjustable time interval t FIX, an average magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1, IL2,
IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second. The average values are
stored at the end of the same time interval.
IL1 tF I X ∙ 60
1 IL1F I X, IL 2 F I X,IL 3 F I X
IL2
IL x F I X
tF I X ∙ 60
∑ IL x n (In )
n=1
IL3 tF I X ∙ 60
±PF I X = 1 ∑ ±Pn ±PF I X
(Pn )
tF I X ∙ 60
n=1
1s
tF I X tF I X tF I X tF I X tF I X ∙ 60
±P ±Q F I X = 1 ∑ ±Q n
±Q F I X
(Qn )
tF I X ∙ 60
±Q n=1
F i x -De m a n d . a i
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 45

• Rolling demand (IL1ROL, IL2ROL, IL3ROL, ±PROL, ±Q ROL)
Inside an adjustable time interval NROL∙t ROL , an average magnitude is calculated for phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second, where t ROL is
the length of any time subinterval and NROL is the number of the time intervals. The average values
are stored at the end of the same time subinterval.
IL1ROL
Rolling demand example with N ROL=4 N R OL t R OL∙60
IL1 IL 2 ROL
Average inside subinterval t ROL
IL x ROL = 1 ∑
1
∑ IL x k IL 3 ROL
IL2 NROL tROL∙60 (In )
n=1 k=1 n
IL3
N R OL t R OL∙60
1 1 ±PROL
±PROL =
NROL
∑ tROL∙60
∑ ±Pk (Pn )
1s n=1 k=1 n
±P tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL N R OL t R OL∙60
±Q ROL
±Q ±Q ROL = 1 ∑
1
∑ ±Q k (Qn )
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 NROL tROL∙60
n=1 k=1 n
NROL
Rol-Demand.ai
• Peak (IL1MAX, IL2MAX, IL3MAX, ±PMAX, ±Q MAX)

Inside an adjustable time interval t ROL, the maximum magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1,
IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second. The average values
are stored at the end of the same time interval t ROL (Rolling demand common parameter).
IL1MA X
Maximum value of averages inside time interval t ROL t R OL∙60
IL1 Average inside time interval t ROL 1 IL 2 MA X
IL x MA X= MAX
tROL∙60
∑ IL x n IL 3 MA X
IL2 n=1 (In )
IL3 t R OL∙60
1 ±PMA X
±PMA X= MAX
tROL∙60
∑ ±Pn (Pn )
n=1
±P 1s
t R OL∙60
±Q tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL 1 ±Q MA X
±Q MA X= MAX
tROL∙60
∑ ±Q n (Qn )
n=1
Max-Demand.ai
• Minimum (IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN, ±PMIN, ±Q MIN)

Inside an adjustable time interval t ROL, the minimum magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1,
IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second. The average values
are stored at the end of the same time interval t ROL (Rolling demand common parameter).
IL1MIN
Minimum value of averaged inside time intervalt ROL t R OL∙60
IL1 1 IL 2 MIN
Average inside time intervalt ROL IL x MIN = MIN
tROL∙60
∑ IL x n IL 3 MIN
IL2 n=1 (In )
IL3 t R OL∙60
1 ±PMIN
±PMIN = MIN
tROL∙60
∑ ±Pn (Pn )
n=1
±P 1s
Reset
t R OL∙60
1 ±Q MIN
±Q tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL ±Q MIN = MIN
tROL∙60
∑ ±Q n (Qn )
n=1 Min-Demand.ai
Power
• Phase active power: ±PL1, ±PL2, ±PL3,
• Total active power: ±P
UL1
UL2 ±PL1 = U L1∙ IL1∙ cos ϕL1
UL3 ±PL1 , ±PL 2 ,±PL 2 ,±P
±PL 2 = U L 2∙ IL 2∙ cos ϕL 2 (Pn )
IL1
±PL 3 = U L 3 ∙ IL 3 ∙ cos ϕL 3 cosPhi L1 , cosPhi L 2 ,cosPhi L 3
(p.u.)
IL2
±P = PL1+ PL 2+ PL 3
IL3
P. a i
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 46

• Phase reactive power: ±Q L1, ±Q L2, ±Q L3,
• Total reactive power: ±Q
UL1
UL2 ±Q L1 = U L1∙ IL1∙ sinϕL1
UL2 ±Q L 2 = U L 2∙ IL 2∙ sinϕL 2 ±Q L1 , ±Q L 2 ,±Q L 2 ,±Q
IL1 (Qn )
±Q L 3 = U L 3 ∙ IL 3 ∙ sinϕL 3
IL2
±Q = Q L1+ Q L 2+ Q L 3
IL3
Q. a i
• Total apparent power: S
±P
S
S = P2 + Q2 (Sn )
±Q
S.ai
Energy
• Positive and negative active energy (one second refresh): +EA, -EA,
• Total active energy (one second refresh): EA,
• Positive and negative reactive energy (one second refresh): +EQ, -EQ,
• Total reactive energy (one second refresh): EQ
+P
EA +, EA -,EA
-P EA + = ∫(+P dt) EA - = ∫(-P dt) EA = ∫(P dt) (Wh)
+Q
EQ +, EQ -,EQ
-Q EQ + = ∫(+Q dt) EQ - = ∫(-Q dt) EQ = ∫(Q dt) (varh)
E.ai
Use of over-described measures is shown in the following tables.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 47

Conventions
Phase rotation direction
The conventional rotation direction for the current phasors is counter-clockwise.
fasori.ai
Cyclic phase sequence order

For three phase rotating currents, a direct cyclic sequence is defined when the three phases are
L1, L2, L3 ordered, while an inverse cyclic sequence is defined when the three phases are L1, L3, L2
ordered.
UL1 UL1
UL3 UL2 UL2 UL3
Direct sequence cyclic order Inverse sequence cyclic order

fasori1.ai
Convention for
displacements[1]
U L1 U L1
PhiL1=30°
I L1
I L1
PhiL1=330°
UL 3 UL2 UL 3 UL2
(leading current) (lagging current)
Displacement angle of I L1 respect U L1 phase-to-neutral voltage

(allways counted counterclockwise)
U L1 U L1
I L1 I L1
Alpha1=120°
Alpha1=60°
U2 3 U2 3
UL 3 UL2 UL 3 UL2
U2 3 U2 3
Displacement angle of I L1 respect U 2 3 phase-to-phase voltage

(allways counted counterclockwise)
Displacements convenzioni-sfasamenti.ai
Note 1 The adjustment and display range of displacements are 0°... 359°
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 48
Convention for measuring
active power, reactive power
and power factor.
• Resistive-inductive load.
NA60
C1-C3-C5 terminals UL3
IL1 IL3
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS
IL3
B1-B3-B5 terminals UL1
IL1
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS IL2
UL2
UL3
SYSTEM UL2
II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°
-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3
S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3

SYSTEM
-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3
-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-inductive load convenzioni.ai
• Resistive-capacitive load.
NA60
C1-C3-C5 terminals UL3
IL1
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS IL3
IL3
IL1
B1-B3-B5 terminals UL1
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS

UL2
UL3
IL2
SYSTEM UL2
II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°
-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3
S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3 SYSTEM
-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-capacitive load convenzioni2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 49

• Resistive-inductive load.
SYSTEM
NA60 UL3
C1-C3-C5 terminals
IL1
IL1
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS IL2
IL3
UL1
B1-B3-B5 terminals
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS

UL2
UL3 IL3
UL2
II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°
-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3
SYSTEM S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3
-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-inductive load convenzioni3.ai
• Resistive-capacitive load.
SYSTEM
NA60 UL3
IL2
C1-C3-C5 terminals
IL1
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS
IL3
UL1
B1-B3-B5 terminals IL3
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS IL1

UL2
UL3
UL2
II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°
S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3

SYSTEM
-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3
-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
resistive-capacitive load convenzioni4.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 50

Use of measured values
Selective block output BLOUT1
Internal selectivity block (Block4)

Selective block input BLIN1
Start (START) Relays K1...K6
Start (START) LEDs L1...L5

Temperature (PT1....PT8)
Second harmonic restraint

Binary inputs IN1, IN2

Trip (TRIP) Relè K1...K6
Trip (TRIP) LEDs L1...L5
VT monitoring (74VT)
Cold Load Pickup (CLP)
IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd
Logic block - BLOCK1

UL1, UL2 , UL3
U12, U23 , U31
u L1, u L2 , u L3
IL1, IL2 , IL3
iL1, iL2 , iL3
P, Q, S
UEC
UE
U2
uE
IE
iE
I1
I2
E
f
PROTECTION
Thermal with Pt100 probes (26) 
Undervoltage (27)        
Thermal image (49)              
Phase overcurrent (50/51)            
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N)            
Overvoltage (59)         
Residual overvoltage (59N)          
Directional phase overcurrent (67)              
Directional earth fault overcurrent (67N)              
Breaker failure (BF)        
CONTROL and MONITORING
CT Monitoring (74CT)  
VT Monitoring (74VT)      
Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) 
Second harmonic restraint (2NDH-REST) 
Logic block (BLOCK1) 
Selective block (BLOCK2)   
Internal selectivity block (Block4)
Diagnostic   
Element states  
Binary input states 
Selective block state (Block2)  
Output relay states    
MEASURES
Frequency 
Phase currents 
Measured residual current 
Positive sequence current 
Negative sequence current 
Thermal image 
Phase voltages 
Phase-to-phase voltages 
Residual voltage 
Negative sequence voltage 
Active power 
Reactive power 
Apparent power 
Phase current /phase voltage displacement  
Power factor  
Reactive energy 
Temperature (Pt100 on MPT module) 
EVENT RECORDER
Event 0     
Event 1     
Event ...     
Event 299     
FAULT RECORDER
Fault 0           
Fault 1           
Fault ...           
Fault 19           
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Record 1                   
Record 2                   
Record ...                   
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 51

Binary inputs
Two binary inputs are available on board.
The dry inputs must be powered with an external voltage, (usually the auxiliary power supply).
The connections are shown in the schematic diagrams.
The following settings can be used to configure each input:
• Logic Active-ON (activated when powered), or Active-OFF (activated when power is turned off).
• ON Timer (OFF-to-ON time delay) and OFF Timer (ON-to-OFF time delay).
• Binary input allocation.
Adjustable debounce timer allows any transient to decay avoiding false activation of the input; the
positive transition is acquired if the input is permanently high for a time interval longer than the t ON
setting delay; similarly for the negative transitions, the negative transition is acquired if the input is
permanently high for a time interval longer than the t OFF setting delay.
BINARY INPUT
t ON t ON t OFF t OFF
INTERNAL STATE
t
binary-timers.ai
In the above shown diagram, INTERNAL STATE represents the logical state of the binary input used
in the following processing.
Each binary input may be matched to one of the following default functions.
Binary inputs
FUNCTIONS
IN1 IN2
Reset LEDs  
Set profile (switching setting A and B)  
Fault trigger (fault recording)  
Block2 IPh/IE (selective block from phase and/or ground elements)  
Block2 IPh (selective block from phase elements)  
Block2 IE (selective block from ground elements)  
Block1 (logic block)  
TCS1 (Trip Circuit Supervision)  
TCS2 (Trip Circuit Supervision)  
Trip ProtExt (trip from external protection relays)  
Reset counters  
Reset CB Monitor (clear CB monitoring data)  
52a (CB auxiliary contact)  
52b (CB auxiliary contact)  
Open CB  
Close CB  
Preset DTheta (thermal image preset)  
Remote trip  
MCB VT OPEN (MCB auxiliary contact)  
Reset on demand measures  
Reset energy measures  
74VT ext. (74VT from external protection relays)  
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 52

Reset LEDs
If the element tripped have gone back to rest condition, the latched LEDs and/or relays may be
reset.
Set-Reset latch
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
S
Set (ON≡turn on LED/relay)
≥
Reset LEDs Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

&
R ≥
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Reset (ON≡turn off LED/relay) &
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for reset signalling (LEDs) Reset-led.ai
Set profile
Inside Pro-N devices, two independent setting profiles (A and B) are available. Whereas different
settings are required, they are made in the setting profiles and stored in the non volatile memory of
relay. Applicable setting profile is activated usually via a binary input; when the programmed input is
activated, the profile B becomes operative as a replacement for the default profile A.[1]
Profile B Profile A Profile selection

Profile B Profile A (A, B, from binary input)
Set profile Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF OFF≡Profile A, ON≡Profile B

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for switching of setting profiles Switch-profile.ai
Fault trigger
When the programmed input is activated, a trigger is issued for fault record SFR). Data storing takes
place with the same procedure resulting from a trip of any protective elements
Fault recording
IL1->IL1r
Logic INx t O N INx t O F F IL2 ->IL2r
Fault trigger Protection
.....
element
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 DTheta->DTheta-r
n.o. T 0 0 T Inputs
Outputs
Binary input INx
Fault cause info
Binary input allocation for fault recorder trigger Trigger-faults.ai
Note 1 To enable the profile switching the “Input-selected” parameter must be set inside the “Profile selection” submenu.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 53
Block2 IPh/IE
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[1] common for the following phase and ground
protective elements:
• I>, I>> and I>>> (50/51),
• DthAL1, DthAL2 and Dth (49),
• IPD >, IPD >>, IPD >>> and IPD >>>> (67),
and ground fault:
• IE >, IE >> and IE >>> (50N/51N),
• IED >, IED >>, IED >>> and IE >>>> (67N),
The application of the IN1 and IN2 binary inputs for the acquisition of Block2 (selective block) com-
ing from external protection relays is shown in the following figure (one phase overcurrent and one
phase and residual overcurrent protection).
towards reset timer

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)
Block2 IN
& xxxxx Trip Block2
t B-Iph
FROM OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS t B-Iph
≥1 IPh Block2 input
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS T 0
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF IPh/IE Block2

Block2IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block2 IN diagnostic
n.o. T 0 0 T
t B-IE
Binary input INx
t B-IE
≥1 IE Block2 input
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS T 0
Block2 input
Binary input allocation for logic selectivity (Block2) BlockIph-Ie.ai
Block2 IPh
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[2] for the following phase protective elements:
• I>, I>> and I>>> (50/51), DthAL1, DthAL2 and Dth> (49), IPD >, IPD >>, IPD >>> and IPD >>>> (67)
Block2 IE
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[1] for the following earth protective elements:
• IE >, IE >> and IE >>> (50N/51N), IED >, IED >>, IED >>> and IED >>>> (67N).
Block1
A change in status of a binary input effects a block for a length of time equal to the activation of the
input[3]; the element pickup that wish be blocked must be enabled (the Block1 parameter must be
set to ON in the concerning menu).[4]
The application of the IN1 binary input for the acquisition of the Block1 (logic block) coming from
external signal is shown in the following figure; in the example the block signal is ORed with Block2
(selective block) to block the generic (xxx) element.
from Block2 (ON≡Block)

≥1 Blocking
Enable (ON≡Enable)
Block1
& xxxx Block1
Block1 Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)

Block1
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for logic block (Block1) Block1.ai
Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the Block 2 function is described in the “Logic selectivity” paragraph.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the Block 2 function is described in the “Logic selectivity” paragraph.
The application of the inputs for the acquisition of Block2 (selective block) for Phase (Block2 Iph) and earth protective functions (Block2 IE) is
similar to that illustrated in the scheme concerning the Block2 IphIIE
Note 3 Unlike the Block2 (selective block), that houses a safety logic founded on programmable timers, the Block1 (logic block) keeps block of the
protection for the whole time when the input is active.
Note 4 The activation of one binary input produces indiscriminately a block of all protective elements programmed for being blocked from Block1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 54
TCS1 and TCS2
Trip Circuit Supervision.
Supervision with one or two binary input can be performed.
The exhaustive treatment of the TCS function is described in the concerning paragraph.
+UAUX
Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F
TCS1
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF
n.o. 74TCS logic
T 0 0
TRIP Binary input INx
TCS2
Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F
52
52a 52b 74TCS logic
n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx
-UAUX
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS with two binary inputs TCS2.ai
Trip ProtExt
The binary input detects a trip coming from an external protective relay: the information is available
for the breaker failure function (BF).
Trip ProtExt Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F

IN+
+UAUX n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. Breaker failure (BF)
-UAUX T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
ExtProt.ai
Binary input allocation for trip acquisition from external protection device
Reset counters
A change in status of a binary input effects a reset of all start/trip partial counters.[1]
Reset CB Monitor
A change in status of a binary input effects a reset of all counters concerning the circuit breaker
diagnostic:
• Breaking Sum phase IL1
• Breaking SumI2t phase IL1
• CB Open counter
52a and 52b
The CB position can be acquired by means of binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts: the
information is used in the following functions:
• CB position (open-closed)
• CB diagnostic (N. of operations, trip time)
• Breaker Failure (BF)
• VT monitoring (74TV)
UAUX
52a Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

INx
n.o. T 0 0 T
52 Binary input INx CB position
52a 52b
CB diagnostic
Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
Breaker failure (BF)
52b 74VT
INx
UAUX n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for CB state acquisition CB-pos.ai
Note 1 The reset of the total counters is practicable by means ThyVisor command with Session Level 1 (available with password)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 55
Open CB
Close CB
The external acquisition of remote commands allows to drive CB remotely.
UAUX OPEN +UAUX

Command Open CB Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

INx
n.o. T 0 0 T
TRIPPING M ATRIX
52 52a 52b O -UAUX
(LED+REL AYS)
Binary input INx
CLOSE
Command Close CB Logic INx t O N INx t O F F -UAUX I
INx n.c. IN2 t ON IN2 t OFF

n.o. T 0 0 T
UAUX Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for CB remote command CB-com.ai
Preset DTheta
The input activation presets the thermal image (49).
The preset value can be adjusted by means the DqIN setting. The thermal image is initialized at the
DqIN value when the device is powered or when the binary input become active.
UAUX
PresetDTheta Logic
PresetDTheta INx t ON INx t OFF

INx DθP = DθIN t = T+·ln{[(Ith/IB)2-DθP/DθB]/[(Ith/IB)2-1.2]
n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx
UAUX
Binary input allocation for thernal image preset (49) inhit-theta.ai
Remote trip
The input activation drives an expressly programmed output relay.
UAUX
Remote trip
Remote trip Logic INx t O N INx t O F F TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
INx n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
UAUX
Binary input allocation for remote trip Remote-trip.ai
MCB VT open
The external acquisition of MCB auxiliary contact allows to detect a failure on the secondary circuit
of the voltage transformer (VTs); the information is available for the VT monitoring function (74VT).
LINE
VT
UAUX
MCB
MCB VT OPEN Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

INx
n.o.
VT Monitoring (74VT)
TO NA60 VOLTAGE INPUTS T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
UAUX
Binary input allocation for state acquisition of the MCB auxiliary contact MCB-open.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 56

Reset demand measures
The input activation make a reset of all demand measures.
Reset energy
The input activation make a reset of all energy measures.
74TV ext
The external acquisition of 74TV allows to block or to change the operating mode of protective el-
ements where the residual voltage is employed; the information is available for residual voltage
protective elements (59N and 67N protections) that may operate inadvertently when an event cause
a loss of one or more voltages.
Output relays
Six output relays are available (K1...K6):[1]
• K1 and K2 have two changeover contacts (SPDT, type C).
• K3, K4 and K5 have one make contact (SPST-NO, type A).[2]
• K6 has one break contact (SPST-NC, type B).[3]
Each output relay may be programmed with following operating mode:
• Operation MODE (No latched, Pulse, Latched).
• Logic (Energized/De-energized).
To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (Minimum pulse width parameter).
All parameters are available inside the Set\Relays menu.
Input
No-latched operation
t TR Minimum pulse width
Latched operation
Pulse operation
t
t TR Minimum pulse width
Output relay operation Relay-operation-timers.ai
Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for
each relay.
Notes:
• When de-energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in rest condition if no trip command
is in progress.
• When energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in operating condition if no trip command
is in progress and the auxiliary supply is powered on.
• When no-latched operating mode is set (Operation MODE No latched), the output relay reset
at the end of the trip condition. To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (minimum
pulse width operation).
• When latched operating mode is set (Operation MODE Latched), the output relay doesn’t reset
at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a reset command is issued (RESET key, ThyVisor or
communication command).
• When pulse operating mode is set (Operation MODE Pulse), the output relay reset after a tTR
programmable delay regardless of the trip condition.
• It is advisable to make sure that the output contact technical data are suitable for load (Nominal
current, breaking capacity, make current, switching voltage,...).
Matching every output relay to any protective element is freely programmable inside the Setpoints
submenus according a tripping matrix structure.[4][5]
Note 1 Schematic diagram are shown inside APPENDIX B1.

Note 2 K3 and K4 have a common terminal (A10)
Note 3 K5 and K6 have a common terminal (A13)
Note 4 Matching of the output relay to the protective and control functions can be defined so that any collision from other function is avoided.
All output relay are unassigned in the default setting.
Note 5 Self test relay: it is advisable to plan the following settings:
- Energized operating mode,
- No-latched ,
in order that it stays ON for normal conditions and the other way round it goes OFF if any fault is detected and/or the auxiliary supply turns OFF.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 57
RELAYS
FUNCTIONS
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
Self-test relay      
ThALx Alarm relays (ThAL1-K...ThAL8-K)      

ThALx Trip relays (Th>1-K...Th>8-K)      
U< Start relays (U< ST-K)      

U< Trip relays (U< TR-K)      
U<< Start relays (U<< ST-K)      
U<< Trip relays (U<< TR-K)      
DthAL1 Alarm relays (DthAL1-K)      

DthAL2 Alarm relays (DthAL2-K)      
Dth> Trip relays (Dth>-K)      
I> Start relays (I>ST-K)      

I> Trip relays (I>TR-K)      
I>> Start relays (I>>ST-K)      
I>> Trip relays (I>>TR-K)      
I>>> Start relays (I>>>ST-K)      
I>>> Trip relays (I>>>TR-K)      
IE> Start relays (IE>ST-K)      

IE> Trip relays (IE>TR-K)      
IE>> Start relays (IE>>ST-K)      
IE>> Trip relays (IE>>TR-K)      
IE>>> Start relays (IE>>>ST-K)      
IE>>> Trip relays (IE>>>TR-K)      
U> Start relays (U> ST-K)      

U> Trip relays (U> TR-K)      
U>> Start relays (U>> ST-K)      
U>> Trip relays (U>>TR-K)      
UE> Start relays (UE> ST-K)      

UE> Trip relays (UE> TR-K)      
UE>> Start relays (UE>> ST-K)      
UE>> Trip relays (UE>>TR-K)      
IPD> Start relays (IPD>ST-K)      

IPD> Trip relays (IPD>TR-K)      
IPD>> Start relays (IPD>>ST-K)      
IPD>> Trip relays (IPD>>TR-K)      
IPD>>> Start relays (IPD>>>ST-K)      
IPD>>> Trip relays (IPD>>>TR-K)      
IPD>>>> Start relays (IPD>>>>ST-K)      
IPD>>>> Trip relays (IPD>>>>TR-K)      
IED> Start relays (IED>ST-K)      

IED> Trip relays (IED>TR-K)      
IED>> Start relays (IED>>ST-K)      
IED>> Trip relays (IED>>TR-K)      
IED>>> Start relays (IED>>>ST-K)      
IED>>> Trip relays (IED>>>TR-K)      
IED>>>> Start relays (IED>>>>ST-K)      
IED>>>> Trip relays (IED>>>>TR-K)      
I2ndh> Start relays (I2ndh>ST-K)      

I2ndh> Trip relays (I2ndh>TR-K)      
74VT Output block relays (74VT-BK-K)      

74VT Alarm relays (74VT-AL-K)      
S< Trip relays (S<TR-K)      
74TCS Start relays (74TCS-ST-K)      

74TCS Trip relays (74TCS-TR-K)      
tB-IPh/IE Elapsed signalling relays (tB-K)      

Phase protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-Iph-K)      
Ground protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-IE-K)      
Phase and ground protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K)      
BF Start relays (BF-ST-K)      

BF Trip relays (BF-TR-K)      
PLC (PLC-K)      
Number of CB trips diagnostic relays (N.Open-K)      

Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic relays (SumI-K)      
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic relays (SumI^2t-K)      
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic relays (tbreak-K)      
Open CB command relays (CBopen-K)      

Close CB command relays (CBclose-K)      
Remote tripping relays (RemTrip-K)      
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling relays (PulseBLIN-K)      
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 58

LED indicators
Eight LEDs are available.
• One green LED “ON”: if turned on it means that the device is properly working, if flashing the inter-
nal self-test function has detected an anomaly.
• One yellow LED “START” tagged for START of one or more protective elements.[1]
• One red LED “TRIP” tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements.[1]
• Five red LEDs “1...5” for highlight the activation of one or more user defined function.
Each LED may be programmed with following operating mode:
• No-latched: the LED reset at the end of the trip condition.
• Latched: the LED doesn’t reset at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a manual reset
command is issued (RESET key, ThyVisor or communication command).
Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for
each LED.
Led
CB Open
CB Close
Free allocation of each LED may be set according to the matrix structure shown in the following
page.[2]
Note 1 The START and the TRIP LED are user assignable to any function; other than starting and tripping information can be assigned to them too, just
the same for L1...L5
Note 2 All LEDs are unassigned in the default setting.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 59
LEDs
FUNCTIONS
START TRIP 1 2 3 4 5
ThALx Alarm LEDs (ThAL1-L...ThAL8-L)       
ThALx Trip LEDs (Th>1-L...Th>8-L)       
U< Start LEDs (U< ST-L)       

U< Trip LEDs (U< TR-L)       
U<< Start LEDs (U<< ST-L)       
U<< Trip LEDs (U<< TR-L)       
DthAL1 Alarm LEDs (DthAL1-L)       

DthAL2 Alarm LEDs (DthAL2-L)       
Dth> Trip LEDs (Dth>-L)       
I> Start LEDs (I>ST-L)       

I> Trip LEDs (I>TR-L)       
I>> Start LEDs (I>>ST-L)       
I>> Trip LEDs (I>>TR-L)       
I>>> Start LEDs (I>>>ST-L)       
I>>> Trip LEDs (I>>>TR-L)       
IE> Start LEDs (IE>ST-L)       

IE> Trip LEDs (IE>TR-L)       
IE>> Start LEDs (IE>>ST-L)       
IE>> Trip LEDs (IE>>TR-L)       
IE>>> Start LEDs (IE>>>ST-L)       
IE>>> Trip LEDs (IE>>>TR-L)       
U> Start LEDs (U> ST-L)       

U> Trip LEDs (U> TR-L)       
U>> Start LEDs (U>> ST-L)       
U>> Trip LEDs (U>>TR-L)       
UE> Start LEDs (UE> ST-L)       

UE> Trip LEDs (UE> TR-L)       
UE>> Start LEDs (UE>> ST-L)       
UE>> Trip LEDs (UE>>TR-L)       
IPD> Start LEDs (IPD>ST-L)       

IPD> Trip LEDs (IPD>TR-L)       
IPD>> Start LEDs (IPD>>ST-L)       
IPD>> Trip LEDs (IPD>>TR-L)       
IPD>>> Start LEDs (IPD>>>ST-L)       
IPD>>> Trip LEDs (IPD>>>TR-L)       
IPD>>>> Start LEDs (IPD>>>>ST-L)       
IPD>>>> Trip LEDs (IPD>>>>TR-L)       
IED> Start LEDs (IED>ST-L)       

IED> Trip LEDs (IED>TR-L)       
IED>> Start LEDs (IED>>ST-L)       
IED>> Trip LEDs (IED>>TR-L)       
IED>>> Start LEDs (IED>>>ST-L)       
IED>>> Trip LEDs (IED>>>TR-L)       
IED>>>> Start LEDs (IED>>>>ST-L)       
IED>>>> Trip LEDs (IED>>>>TR-L)       
I2ndh> Start LEDs (I2ndh>ST-L)       

I2ndh> Trip LEDs (I2ndh>TR-L)       
74VT Output blocL LEDs (74VT-BL-L)       

74VT Alarm LEDs (74VT-AL-L)       
S< Trip LEDs (S<TR-L)       
74TCS Start LEDs (74TCS-ST-L)       

74TCS Trip LEDs (74TCS-TR-L)       
tB-IPh/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs (tB-L)       

Phase protection output selective block LEDs (BLL2OUT-Iph-L)       
Ground protection output selective block LEDs (BLL2OUT-IE-L)       
Phase and ground protection output selective block LEDs (BLL2OUT-Iph/IE-L)       
BF Start LEDs (BF-ST-L)       

BF Trip LEDs (BF-TR-L)       
PLC (PLC-L)
Number of CB trips diagnostic LEDs (N.Open-L)       
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic LEDs (SumI-L)       
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic LEDs (SumI^2t-L)       
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic LEDs (tbreaL-L)       
Open CB command LEDs (CBopen-L)       

Close CB command LEDs (CBclose-L)       
Remote tripping LEDs (RemTrip-L)       
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling LEDs (PulseBLIN-L)       
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 60

Communication interfaces
Several communication ports are provided:
• USB port on the front side for local communication (ThyVisor).
• RS485 port on the rear side for bus communication.
• Ethernet port on the rear side for bus communication.
USB
To connect the local port you need to use a cable USB Type B - Type A; the Thytronic cable code
L10042 can be supplied.
The serial port is the simplest access for setting by means the ThyVisor software.
RS485
Several protocol are implemented[1]:
• ModBus RTU. Modbus is a serial communications protocol. It is a de facto standard communica-
tions protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial
electronic devices also inside electric utilities and substation.
• IEC 60870-5. The IEC 60870-5 suite of protocol is used for communications from master station to
substation, as well within the substation; the IEC 60870-5-103 (Protection equipment) is available
together the Modbus protocol on some version of Pro-n devices (code NAxx#xxxxC x).
Ethernet
It is provided (optionally) a communication board useful for Ethernet communication with ModBus
TCP/IP protocol.[2]
Modbus/TCP basically embeds a Modbus frame into a TCP frame in a simple manner. This is a con-
nection-oriented transaction which means every query expects a response.
This query/response technique fits well with the master/slave nature of ModBus, adding to the de-
terministic advantage that Switched Ethernet offers industrial users.
In the same way as the RS485 base Modbus, every device is identified by a personal address and the
communication goes in “client-server” mode with answering request from the recipient.
The protective relay can be directly connect to the Ethernet network (no gateway, protocol converter
are needed).
Two port can be implemented:
• 100BASE-TX with RJ45 connector (copper).
• 100BASE-FX with FX connector (optical fiber)[2]
For both modules no hw preset are required.
RJ45 Ethernet+RS485 ports 8

7
FX Ethernet (no RS485 port)
6 RX-
5
4
3 RX+
2 TX- RX
1 TX+
TX
F1
F2
F3
RS485
B- F4
A+ F5
ethernet-sch.ai
Two LEDs are on board (RJ45):

• LINK - (green): The LED lights up if the connection is active.
• TX - (yellow): The LED lights up when data transmission is active.
Note 1 The RS485 port is not implemented on the Pro-N devices endowed with Ethernet FX port
Note 2 Information about the ModBus map may be find inside the “Remote programming manual”
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 61
4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Rated values
Inside the Base menu the following parameters can be set:
• Relay reference name.
• Relay nominal currents (phase and residual), to which the regulation are related.
• Primary nominal values, employed for measures relative to primary values.
• Measurements reading mode.
• CLP delay setting (reset delay).[1]
Information for settings:
• Relay reference name.
Alphanumeric mnemonic string (max 16 characters) useful for identification of protected plant.
• Relay nominal frequency fn
This nominal value must be set same as the frequency of the grid.
Example: grid frequency fn = 50 Hz
Relay nominal frequency fn = 50 Hz
Traditional CT - VT inputs
• Relay phase nominal current In
This nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary CTs
nominal current.
Dip-switches are located on board of the CPU module; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is
described in the “6.5 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.
• Relay residual nominal current IEn

This nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary CT nomi-
nal current.
Dip-switch is located on board of the CPU module; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is de-
scribed in the “6.5 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.
• Relay phase-to-phase voltage Un

Two reference voltage are available: UR =100 V and UR =400V
For the first instance the Un relay nominal voltage must be set to the phase-to-phase voltage of the
secondary VTs voltages at grid nominal voltage.
The Un value must calculated as:
Grid nominal voltage Ung where the VTs are included [V]
Un =
Voltage transformer ratio KVT
If VTs with primary nominal voltage is equal to the grid voltage divided by √3, the following stream-
lined calculus may be used:
Un = VTs secondary nominal voltage [V] x √3
Example 1
Ung = 6.9 kV
10000 / 3 V NA60
52 KVT = = 100
100 / 3 V
Un
Grid nominal voltage Ung= 6.9 kV

10000 / 3 V
VTs ratio KVT = = 100
100 / 3 V Es1-Un.ai
The relay nominal voltage may be set to:

Un = Ung /KVT = 6900 / 100 = 69 V
Example 2
Ung = 6 kV
NA60
6000 / 3 V
52 KVT = = 60
100 / 3 V
Un
Grid nominal voltage Ung = 6 kV

6000 / 3 V
VTs ratio KVT = Ung /Uns = = 60
100 / 3 V Es2-Un.ai
Note 1 Parameter available at level 1 only

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 62
The relay nominal voltage Un may be defined as: Un = Ung /KVT = 6000 / 60 = 100 V
or with the formula:
Un = √3 · Uns = √3 ·100 / √3 = 100 V
For the UR = 400 V versions, the relay nominal voltage must be set to the grid nominal voltage (direct
measure of the line voltage without VTs).
Example 3
Ung = 400 V
NA60
52
Un = 400 V
Es3-Un.ai
The nominal voltage Un must be set as: Un = Ung = 400 V
• Relay residual nominal voltage UEn

Three instances are expected:
A) residual voltage acquired with open delta VT.
B) residual voltage measure by means VT connected from star-point and earth.
C) residual voltage measure by vector calculus.
Case A
The residual nominal voltage UEn may be estimated by means of the following general formula (ef-
fective for insulated neutral or impedance-ground connected grids):
Grid nominal voltage Ung where the VTs [V] x √3 are connected
UEn =
VT ratio KVT /
If open delta VT with primary nominal voltage balances to the grid voltage divided by √3, the follow-
ing streamlined calculus may be used:
UEn = 3 · VT open delta secondary nominal voltage [V] for insulated or impedance-ground neutral
grids.
Example A1
Ung = 6.9 kV Insulated or impedance-ground neutral
NA60
10000 / 3 V
52 KVT = = 100 · 3
100 / 3 V
UEn
Grid nominal voltage Ung = 6.9 kV

/ VT ratio: 10000 / 3 V
KVT = = 100 · 3
100 / 3 V Es1-UEn.ai
The relay residual nominal voltage UEn must be estimated by means of the following general for-
mula:
UEn = √3 · Ung /KVT = √3 · 6900 / (√3 · 100) = 69 V
Example A2
Unp = 6 kV Insulated or impedance-ground neutral
6000 / 3 V NA60
52 KVT = = 60 · 3
100 / 3 V
UEn

/ VT ratio: 6000 / 3 V
KVT = = 60 · 3
The relay residual nominal voltage UEn must be indifferently estimated by means of the following
general formula:
UEn = √3 · Ung /KVT = √3 · 6000 / (√3 · 60) = 100 V
or by means the following streamlined formula:
UEn = 3 · Uns = 3 · 100 / 3 = 100 V
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 63

Case B
The relay residual nominal voltage UEn must be estimated by means of the following general for-
mula:
Grid nominal voltage Ung where the VTs [V] / √3 are connected
UEn =
VT ratio KVT
If a VT with primary nominal voltage equal to the grid voltage divided by √3 is connected from star
neutral to ground, the following streamlined calculus may be used:
UEn = VT secondary nominal voltage [V]
Example B1
Ung = 10 kV EsB1-UEn.ai
NA60
11000 / 3 V
KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V UEn

11000 / 3 V
Ratio of VT connected from star neutral to ground: KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V
The relay residual nominal voltage UEn may be estimated by means of the following general for-
mula:
UEn = (Ung /√3) /KVT = (10000 /√3) / (110/ √3) = 91 V
Example B2
Ung = 6 kV EsB2-UEn.ai
NA60
6000 / 3 V
KVT = = 60 / 3
100 V UEn
Grid nominal voltage Ung = 6kV

6000 / 3 V
Ratio of VT connected from star neutral to ground: KVT = = 60 / 3
100 V
The relay residual nominal voltage UEn may be estimated by means of the following general for-
mula: UEn = (Ung /√3) /KVT = (6000 /√3) / (60/ √3) = 100 V
Case C
The relay residual calculated nominal voltage UECn is estimated automatically by means of the for-
mula: UECn = √3∙ Un
Example C1
Ung = 6 kV
6000 / 3 V NA60
52 KVT = = 60
100 / 3 V
Un, UECn

6000 / 3 V
Ratio of line VTs KVT = Unp /Uns = = 60
According with the example 2 where UEn = 100 V the relay residual calculated nominal voltage UECn
is calculated inside the relay as: UECn = Un ∙ √3 = 100 ∙ √3 = 173 V
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 64

• Phase CT primary current Inp
This parameter affects the measure of the phase currents when the primary measurement read-
ing mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the phase CT primary nominal
current.
Example
52
NA60
KCT = 500A/5A=100
In
Es-In.ai
The phase CT primary current Inp must be set as: Inp = 500 A
• Residual CT primary current IEnp[1]

This parameter affects the measure of the residual current when the primary measurement reading
mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the residual CT(s) primary nominal
current.
Example 1
52
NA60
KCT = 100 A /1 A IEn= 1 A

1x
Es1-IEn.ai
The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 A
Example 2
52
NA60
KCT = 100A / 5A
3x IEn= 5 A
Es2-IEn.ai
The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 A
• VTs Phase primary voltage Unp (phase-to-phase for traditional VT inputs)

This parameter affects the measure of the phase voltages when the primary measurement reading
mode is selected for phase-to-phase, calculated residual voltages, power and energy.
If the formerly indications concerning the relay nominal voltage Un are complied, then the Unp set-
ting must be adjusted to:
Unp = grid nominal voltage [V].
Example 1
Ung = 6.9 kV
10000 / 3 V NA60
52 KTV = = 100
100 / 3 V
Un = 69 V

10000 / 3 V
VTs ratio: KTV = = 100
Relay nominal voltage Un = 69 V 100 / 3 V Es1-Ung.ai
The Unp setting must be adjusted to: Unp = Ung = 6.9 kV

Note 1 The residual current is acquired by means of a traditional CT also on the versions with the phase current inputs from sensors
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 65
Example 2
Ung = 6 kV
6000 / 3 V NA60
52
KVT = = 60
100 / 3 V
Un = 100 V

6000 / 3 V
VTs ratio: KTV = = 60
Relay nominal voltage Un = 100 V 100 / 3 V
Es2-Ung.ai
The Unp setting must be adjusted to: Unp = Ung = 6 kV

Example 3
Ung = 400 V
NA60
52
Un = 400 V
Es3-Un.ai
The Unp setting must be adjusted to: Unp = Ung = 400 V
• Residual primary voltage UEnp for traditional VT inputs

This parameter affects the measure of the direct residual voltage when the primary measurement
reading mode is selected.
If the formerly indications concerning the relay nominal residual voltage UEn are complied, then the
UEnp setting must be adjusted to (effective for insulated neutral or impedance-ground connected
grids):
UEnp = √3 ∙ grid nominal voltage [V].
Example 1
Ung = 6.9 kV Insulated or impedance-ground neutral
10000 / 3 V NA60
52 KVT = = 100 · 3
100 / 3 V
UEn = 69 V

10000 / 3 V
/ VT ratio: KVT = = 100 · 3
Relay residual nominal voltage UEn = 69 V 100 / 3 V Es-UEnp.ai
The UEnp setting must be adjusted to: UEnp = √3 · Ung = √3 · 6900 V = 11900 V
Example 2
Ung = 10 kV Es3-UEn.ai
NA60
11000 / 3 V
KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V UEn = 91 V

11000 / 3 V
Ratio of voltage transformer connected from star neutral to ground: KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V
The UEnp setting must be adjusted to: UEnp = √3 · Ung = √3 · 10000 V = 17300 V
• Measurement reading mode

Measures may be displayed according the following operating modes:
- With RELATIVE setting all measures are related to the nominal value,
- With PRIMARY setting all measures are related to the primary value.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 66
ThySensor inputs
• Relay nominal phase voltage Un (phase-to-phase for ThySensor inputs)
The voltage sensor is considered equivalent to a voltage transformer with (20000 /√3) / (100 /√3)
ratio.
Ung = 10 kV
NA60
KTV = 200
Un = 50 V
52
Grid nominal voltage: Ung = 10 kV

ThySensor ratio: KTV = (20000 / √3) / (100 / √3) = 200
Relay nominal voltage Un = 50 V
The relay nominal voltage Un [1] may be computed with following formula:
Un = Ung /KTV = 10 000 / 200 = 50 V.
If the sensor primary nominal voltage (20000 / √3), is equal to the grid voltage divided by √3, the fol-
lowing streamlined calculus may be used:
Un = ThySensor secondary nominal voltage [V] x √3
Ung = 20 kV
NA60
KTV = 200
Un = 100 V
52

ThySensor ratio: KTV = Unp /Uns = (20000 / √3) / (100 / √3) = 200
• Relay nominal residual voltage UEn (for ThySensor inputs)

The relay residual calculated nominal voltage UECn is estimated automatically by means of the for-
mula: UECn = √3∙ Un
Example
Ung = 20 kV NA60
KTV = 200
Un = 100 V
52 UECn = 173 V

ThySensor ratio: KTV = Unp /Uns = (20000 / √3) / (100 / √3) = 200
According to the example shown above where Un = 100 V the relay residual calculated nominal
voltage UECn is calculated inside the relay as: UECn = Un ∙ √3 = 100 ∙ √3 = 173 V
• Phase CT primary current Inp (for ThySensor inputs)
This parameter affects the measure of the phase currents when the primary measurement read-
ing mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the phase CT primary nominal
current.
Example
NA60
Inp = 630 A
Inp = 630 A  In
52
Es-In-thysensor.ai
The ThySensor primary current Inp must be set as: Inp = 630 A.
Note 1 Un is the reference value to which all settings are expressed.
With Un = 100 V setting corresponds a primary voltage sensor 20 kV, then the minimum value of the rated voltage of the electricity network will
be 10 kV (as in the example shown).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 67
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26
Preface
The measure of temperature is acquired by means of Pt100 (RTD Resistive Temperature sensing
Devices) probed, connected to the MPT module.[1]
A direct thermal protection element with eight PT100 thermometric probes (RTD Resistive Thermal
Device) provides protection against premature ageing or breakdown of the insulating materials
through overheating.
Thermal protection using thermometric probes offers greater reliability than Thermal overload-based
indirect protection, since it is not influenced by inaccuracies in the time constant for the thermal
model of the machinery and by variations in the surrounding temperature.
TRIP
t ThALx
t Th> x
Th > x T (°C)
t-int-F26.ai
General operation time characteristic for thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26)
For each thermometric probe an alarm (ThALx , where x=1...8 points one of the eight probes) and one
trip adjustable threshold is provided (Th>x ), with adjustable operating time (t ThALx and t Th>x >);if the
measured temperature overcomes the threshold, the relative alarm and/or trip is issued when the
timer expires.
The adjustments are operable in °C.
ThAL x enable Th ALx t ThALx Th> x enable Th> x t Th> x

P t 10 0
Alarm Element Trip Element
T hy bus AL ARM T R IP
MP T
Th>xBF
Th>xBF
&
Trip Th>x
General logic diagram of the thermal elements - (26) all-F26.ai
The probes should be placed in strategic points around the machinery susceptible to the greatest
overheating, such as for example:
- near the generator stator windings, near the step-up transformer windings and/or in the oil, with the
aim of detecting overheating produced by the overload currents,
- near the generator bearings, with the aim of detecting localised overheating due to worn or non-
lubricated bearings.
The Pt100 probes detect the temperature in the range -50 °C...+250 °C (at 0 °C its resistance is 100
ohm); an alarm indicates any interruption or short-circuiting of the probe or related connections to
the MPT module; the information is available inside the Read \ PT100 menu:
• Ptx probe ON to point a measure inside the range

• Ptx probe LOW to point a measure lower the range (short circuit of probe and/or wires)
• Ptx probe HIGH ao point a measure higher the range (breaking of probe and/or wires).
Self reset is performed when faults are cleared.
The measure of each probe is updated at 2 s time intervals.
2.0s
Pt1 Pt2 Pt3 Pt4 Pt5 Pt6 Pt7 Pt8 Pt1
0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s t
Pt1...8 update t-refresh-F26.ai
Note 1 The 26 menu is available when the MPT module is enabled

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 68
Pt10 0 -xAlarm
Th ALx t ThALx
t ThALx ThALx-K
T 0
TRIPPING M ATRIX
T° > Th ALx ThALx-L
(LED+REL AYS)
Th> x t Th> x
Pt100 OK t Th> x Th>x-K

T° ≤ +2 4 5 . 0 ° C &
T° > Pt x > T 0 Th>x-L
Pt1 Pt x Pt10 0 -x Trip
Pt2 Pt100 FAULT
Pt3 & Pt x > Diagnostic TOWARDS DIAGNOSTIC
Pt4
Pt5 T° ≥ - 4 9 . 0 ° C
Pt6
Pt7 TRIP
Pt8 BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & Th>x BF_OUT TOWARDS BF LOGIC
Th>xBF
Logic diagram for thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26) Fun-F26.ai
All alarm and/or trip elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the ThALx Enable
e Th>x Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal protection with RTD thermo-
metric probes - 26 \ PTx Probe \ ThALx Alarm (ThALx Trip) where x = 1...8.
Each trip threshold (Th>x) may be associated with the breaker failure (BF) function by setting ON
the Th>xBF parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal protection with RTD thermometric
probes - 26 \ PTx Probe \ ThALx Trip where x = 1...8.[1]
Pro_N MPT
THYBUS INPUT THYBUS OUTPUT
E1
THYBUS
6 PT1 PT8
49
7 MPT1 T1 T8 MPT8 48
8 47
PT2 PT7
11 44
MPT2 T2 T7 MPT7
12 43
Pt100 probes (Pt1...Pt8) 13 42
PT3 PT6
15 40
MPT3 T3 T6 MPT6
16 39
17 38
PT4 PT5
20 35
MPT4 T4 T5 MPT5
21 34
22 33
A B 6
PT1
7 MPT1
Example 1 Pt100 T1
8
A B 11 PT2
12 MPT2
Example 2 Pt100 T2
13
T3...T7
49 PT8
48 MPT8
Example 3 Pt100 T8
47
Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 69
Undervoltage - 27
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (U<, U<<) with adjustable delay (t U <, t U <<).
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time, while the second threshold operates
with definite time characteristic.
Each threshold may be separately enabled or disabled.

The first threshold trip (U<) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U<<).
Operation and settings

The fundamental frequency of a selectable voltages, phase to ground (UL1, UL2 , UL3) or phase-to-
phase voltages (U12 , U23 , U31) are utilized:
U12 =|UL1-UL2|
U23 =|UL2 -UL3|
U31=|UL2 -UL1|
Each of three voltages compared with the setting values (U<, U<<). The start and trip logic may be
selected OR or AND.
With OR selection, a start is issued when at least one of the three voltages goes down the adjust-
able threshold (START); with AND selection, a start is issued when all the three voltages go down
the adjustable threshold.
After expiry of the associated operate time (t U <, t U <<) a trip command is issued; if instead the volt-
ages exceed the threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold (U<) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curve:
t=0.75 t U<inv / [1-(U/U<inv)]
Where:
t: operate time
U<inv: threshold setting
t U<inv: operate time setting
For the inverse time characteristic, following data applies:

• The operate time setting is referred to an input voltage equal to 1/4 of the pickup value.
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 0.9 U<
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid: 0 ≤ U/U<inv ≤ 0.9
The first undervoltage element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the U<Curve parameter (DEFINITE, INVERSE) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Undervoltage-27 \ U< Element \ Setpoints menu.
Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the U< Enable parameter inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ U< Element \ Setpoints menu and/or the State parameter
inside the Set\Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ U<< Element \ Definite time.
TRIP
tU<
t U <<
0.9U<
U<< U< U
General operation time characteristic curve for the undervoltage elements - 27 t-int-F27.ai
The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) and the operating logic (AND
or OR), is adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ Common configuration menu
by means the Utype27 parameter; the allowed setting are Uph-ph (phase-to-phase) or Uph-n
(phase-to-neutral).
The corresponding unit are p.u. Un for Uph-ph setting and p.u. En for Uph-n setting.
The first threshold trip (U<) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U<<) by setting ON
the U< Disabling by U<< start (U<disbyU<<) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Undervoltage-27 \ U<< Element \ Setpoints menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 70

Utype27 Logic27
U12 ,U23,U31 AND

U
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 OR
Common configuration
State U<<def tU<< def U< Enable U< Curve U<def tU< def U< inv tU< inv
U<< Element U< Element

U Start U<< U Start U<
Trip U<< Trip U<
74VT & 74VT & U<BF
U< disbyU<< U<BF
Trip U< &
& U< inhibition
Start U<<
U<<BLK1 Start U<< U<BLK1 Start U<
BLK1U<< BLK1U<
& &
Block1 & Block1 &
General logic diagram of the undervoltage elements - 27 all-F27.ai
All undervoltage elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the U< BF and U<< BF pa-
rameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage
- 27 \ U< Element (U<< Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]
ON≡Enable U< undervoltage element

U< Enable
U< def State
&
Utype27 U ≤ U<def
UL1 ≥1
Start U<
U12 U< inv State
& U<ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
U<ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
U ≤ U< inv
U< Curve
UL2 Logic27 t U<def t U<inv
U23 ≥1
& t U<
T 0 U<TR-K
& T 0
UL3 U<TR-L
RESET
U31
(ON≡Inhibit) Trip U<
U< Inhibition
VT fault (74VT) ≥1
Block 74VT
(=0 without fault) Start U<
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
U<BLK1 Trip U< & BLK1U<
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U< BF towards BF logic
U<BF
Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (U<) of the undervoltage element - 27 Fun-F27_S1.ai
Both the protection elements are blocked off whenever the VT supervision function is active, so
that no unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the VTs secondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc)
are detect;[2]the Block functions enable from 74VT parameter 74VT-BK-EN is available inside the
Set \ VT supervision -74VT.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the VT supervision function may be found in the “VT supervision - 74VT” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONI-
TORING section.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 71
For every of the two elements the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)

If the U<BLK1 and/or U<<BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage - 27 \
U< Element (U<< Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the
selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
(ON≡Inhibit)
U<disbyU<<
& U< Inhibition
U<< def State
Utype27 Start U<<
UL1 &
U12 U ≤ U<def U<<ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
U<<ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
UL2 Logic27
U23 ≥1 t U<<def
& t U<<
UL3 & U<<TR-K
T 0
U31 U<<TR-L
RESET
Trip U<<
VT fault (74VT)
Block 74VT
(=0 without fault)
Start U<<
U<<BLK1 Trip U<< & BLK1U<
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U<<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U<< BF towards BF logic
U<<BF
Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (U<<) of the undervoltage element - 27 Fun-F27_S2.ai
Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 72
t [s]
10000
t =t U<inv · 0.75
[1 - (U/U< inv)]
1000
t U <inv = 100 s
100
t U <inv = 10 s
10
t U <inv = 1 s
t U <inv = 0.1 s
0.1
0.01 U /U<inv
0.01 0.1 0.25 1
0.9
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when U/U<inv = 0.25
Inverse time operating characteristic concerning the first threshold (U<) of the undervoltage element - 27 F_27-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 73

Setting notes (27)
Examples for TV inputs

Exampie 1
NA60
27 Un = 100 V
6000 / 3 V
KTV = = 60
fn = 50Hz 100 / 3 V
Ung = 6 kV
Appl-27.ai
Undervoltage protection with phase voltage measured by means of VTs and two operating thresh-
olds:
• First threshold trip with inverse time characteristic when at least one phase voltage becomes
lower than 90% of the grid nominal phase voltage and with 10 s operate time for the 70% of the grid
nominal phase voltage.
• Second threshold with definite time when at least one phase voltage becomes lower than 60% of
the grid nominal phase voltage and with 1 s operate time.
The relay nominal frequency must be set to 50 Hz: fn = 50 Hz.

The nominal voltage (Un) of the line inputs (phase to phase voltage) must be set to the grid nominal
voltage value divided by the VT ratio:
Un =(Grid nominal voltage in volt) / VTs ratio (KTV )

Un = Ung / KTV = 10000/[(10000/√3)/(100/√3)] = 10000/100 =100 V
On the strength of the line input nominal voltage (phase to phase voltage) the concerning phase to
neutral voltage (En) is calculated by the relay (the 27 thresholds are in relation to En when the phase
voltage are measured):
En = Un / √3 = 57.7 V
The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-neutral) and the operating logic (OR), is adjustable inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ Common configuration menu by means the Utype27 and
the Logic27 parameters; the Uph-n (phase-to-neutral) and OR are the proper settings.
The corresponding unit are p.u. En.
With inverse time characteristic, the maximum operating threshold is equal to 90% of setting; the
first threshold must be defined according the following general formula (good for phase to neutral
voltage measure):
U< = required phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(0.9 ∙ En ∙ KVT )
so:
U< = (0.9 ∙ Ung /√3) / (0.9 ∙ En ∙ KVT ) = (10000 /√3) / (100 /√3 ∙ 100 = 1 p.u. En
The first threshold setting is: U< = 1.00 En
Since the required operate time for the first threshold is 3 s when the phase voltage is equal to 70%
of the grid phase nominal voltage, the operating time setting t U <inv (conventionally related to the
phase voltage equal to 25% of the setting threshold) must be defined according the formula (char-
acteristic curve):
t = 0.75 / (1-U/U<) ∙ t U <
The t U <inv setting may be defined:
• t = 10 s
• U = (0.7 ∙ Ung / √3) / (En ∙ KTV ) = 0.7 p.u. En
from which:
t U <inv = t ∙ (1-U/U<) / 0.75 = 10 ∙ (1-0,7 /1) / 0.75 = 4 s
The first threshold operating time to be set is: t U <inv = 4 s
The second threshold setting (definite time characteristic), must be defined according the general
formula:
U<< = required phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(En ∙ KVT )
so:
U<< = (0.6 ∙ Ung /√3) / (En ∙ KTV ) = (0.6 ∙ 10000 / √3) / 100/√3 ∙ 100 = 0.6 p.u. En
The setting are:
• U<<def = 0.6 En
• t U <<def = 1 s
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 74

Example 2
For the same system of the example 1 the purpose is a two thresholds undervoltage phase-to-phase
protection, so:
• The first element with inverse time characteristic with OR logic and threshold equal to 70% of the
grid nominal voltage and operating time 10 s when the voltage is equal to 70% of the generator
nominal voltage.
• The second element with definite time characteristic with OR logic and threshold equal to 60% of
the grid nominal voltage and operating time 1 s.
Nominal settings:
Un =(Grid nominal voltage in volt) / VTs ratio (KVT )
Un = Ung / KVT = 10000/100 = 100 V
U< = Wanted operating threshold (primary phase-to-phase volt)/(0.9 ∙ Un ∙ KVT ) so:
U< = (0.9 ∙ Ung) / (0.9 ∙ Un ∙ KVT ) = (0.9 ∙ 10000) / (0.9 ∙ 100 ∙ 100) = 1 p.u. Un
t U <inv = [(1-U/U<)/0.75] ∙ t = [(1-0.7/1)/0.75] ∙ 10 = 4 s
The first threshold operating time to be set is t U < = 4 s
U<< = Wanted operating threshold (primary phase-to-phase volt)/(Un ∙ KVT ) so:
U<< = (0.6 ∙ Ung /√3) / (Un ∙ KVT ) = (0.6 ∙ 10000) / 100 ∙ 100 = 0.6 p.u. Un
The setting are:
• U<<def = 0.6 Un
• t U <<def = 1 s.
t [s]
100
10
U<= 1UEn (Un)

t U <= 4 s
U<<= 0.6UEn (Un)

t U <<= 1 s
0.1 U /U <
0.01 0.1 0.2 0.25 1
0.9
Operating characteristics of the undervoltage elements - 27 F_27-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 75

Examples for ThySensor inputs
Example 1
NA60
27 Un = 100 V
fn = 50 Hz 20000 / 3 V
KTV = = 200
Ung = 10 kV 100 / 3 V
Appl-27-thysensor.ai
Undervoltage protection with phase voltage measure by means of ThySensors and two operating
thresholds:
• First threshold trip with inverse time characteristic when at least one phase voltage becomes
lower than 90% of the grid nominal phase voltage and with 10 s operate time for the 70% of the grid
the grid nominal phase voltage and with 1 s operate time.
For the setting purposes the NA60 - ThySensor pair is equivalent to a NA60 with Un = 100 V with
traditional VT with ratio KTV = (20000 / √3) / (100 / √3) = 200.
voltage value divided by the ThySensor ratio:
Un =(Grid nominal voltage in volt) / ThySensors ratio (KTV )

Un = Ung / KTV = 10000/[(20000/√3)/(100/√3)] = 10000/200 = 50 V
En = Un / √3 = 28.9 V
The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-neutral) and the operating logic (OR), is adjustable inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ Common configuration menu by means the Utype27 and
the Logic27 parameters; the Uph-n (phase-to-neutral) and OR are the proper settings.
With inverse time characteristic, the maximum operating threshold is equal to 90% of setting; the
voltage measure):
U< = required phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(0.9 ∙ En ∙ KVT )
so:
U< = (0.9 ∙ Ung /√3) / (0.9 ∙ En ∙ KVT ) = (10000 /√3) / (100 /√3 ∙ 100 = 1 p.u. En
The first threshold setting is: U< = 1.00 En
Since the required operate time for the first threshold is 3 s when the phase voltage is equal to 70%
of the grid phase nominal voltage, the operating time setting t U <inv (conventionally related to the
phase voltage equal to 25% of the setting threshold) must be defined according the formula (char-
acteristic curve):
t = 0.75 / (1-U/U<) ∙ t U <
The t U <inv setting may be defined:
• t = 10 s
• U = (0.7 ∙ Ung / √3) / (En ∙ KTV ) = 0.7 p.u. En
from which:
t U <inv = t ∙ (1-U/U<) / 0.75 = 10 ∙ (1-0,7 /1) / 0.75 = 4 s
The first threshold operating time to be set is: t U <inv = 4 s
formula:
U<< = required phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(En ∙ KVT )
so:
U<< = (0.6 ∙ Ung /√3) / (En ∙ KTV ) = (0.6 ∙ 10000 / √3) / 100/√3 ∙ 100 = 0.6 p.u. En
The setting are:
• U<<def = 0.6 En
• t U <<def = 1 s
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 76

Example 2
For the same system of the example 1 the purpose is a two thresholds undervoltage phase-to-phase
protection, so:
grid nominal voltage and operating time 10 s when the voltage is equal to 70% of the grid nominal
voltage.
the grid nominal voltage and operating time 1 s.
Nominal settings:
Un =(Grid nominal voltage in volt) / ThySensor ratio (KVT )
Un = Ung / KVT = 10000/200 = 50 V
U< = Desired operating threshold (primary phase-to-phase volt)/(0.9 ∙ Un ∙ KVT ) so:
U< = (0.9 ∙ Ung) / (0.9 ∙ Un ∙ KVT ) = (0.9 ∙ 10000) / (0.9 ∙ 100 ∙ 100) = 1 p.u. Un
t U <inv = [(1-U/U<)/0.75] ∙ t = [(1-0.7/1)/0.75] ∙ 10 = 4 s
The first threshold operating time to be set is t U < = 4 s
U<< = Desired operating threshold (primary phase-to-phase volt)/(Un ∙ KVT ) so:
U<< = (0.6 ∙ Ung /√3) / (Un ∙ KVT ) = (0.6 ∙ 10000) / 100 ∙ 100 = 0.6 p.u. Un
The setting are:
• U<<def = 0.6 Un
• t U <<def = 1 s.
t [s]
100
10
U<= 1UEn (Un)

t U <= 4 s
U<<= 0.6UEn (Un)

t U <<= 1 s
0.1 U /U <
0.01 0.1 0.2 0.25 1
0.9
Operating characteristics of the undervoltage elements - 27 F_27-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 77

Thermal image - 49
Preface
It is a overload protection with memory capability and three setpoints, used to protect lines and
transformers against thermal overload.
The phase currents are used into an algorithm reproducing a thermal replica according the IEC
60255-8 standard taking into account the Joule losses and the cooling effect due to the load reduc-
tion; in this way the previous history and the overload are taken into account.
The thermal protection can be adapted to the different features of motors by setting the thermal
heating t+ and cooling t- constants ( the t+ constant refers to motor running condition, while the
t- constant, always higher than t+, refers to stop condition).
The trip element has an adjustable threshold; with 1.2 DθB setting (ie 1.2 times the overtemperature
corresponding to the nominal operation condition) the corresponding tripping current IB is 1.1 since
the temperature rise is proportional to the square of the current.
The 49 element is provided with two further thresholds DθAL1 and DθAL2, lower than the previous one.
These thresholds, both adjustable, provide an alarm signal to draw attention in the event of anoma-
lous heating, without disconnect the protected device. One of the above thresholds can be used to
prevent refeeding of the system when heating approaches the trip conditions since the additional
heating brought on by the inrush currents would cause the protection to operate.
The thermal current used for thermal image calculation is:
Ith = max (IL1, IL2 , IL3)
If the second harmonic restraint is enabled, the thermal current used for thermal image calculation
becomes:
Ith = ILMAX /KINR = max (IL1, IL2 , IL3) / KINR
where KINR is an adjustable parameter (1.0...3.0), useful to reduce the thermal current during the
transformer energization (inrush).
According to a single-body thermal model, the thermal image is based on the differential equation:
dDθ/dt+Dθ/T=(Ith /IB)2/T
where Dθ is the system thermal state as a percentage of base thermal capacity DθB corresponding
to the base current IB[1] and T is the thermal time constant (the same for heating and cooling).
When the thermal image Dq overcomes the threshold a trip is issued.
TRIP
p= 0
p=1
t-int-F49.ai
D th > I th /I B
General operation time characteristic for the thermal image elements - 49
The operating characteristic (IEC 60255-8) is:

t=T*ln{[(Ith /IB) 2-Dθp /DθB)]/[(Ith /IB) 2-1.2]}=T*ln{[(Ith /IB) 2-(Ip /IB) 2]/[(Ith /IB) 2-1.2]=
T*ln{[(Ith /IB) 2-p2]/[(Ith /IB) 2-1.2]} [1]
where:
• t: operating time,
• ln: natural logarithm,
• Dθp and Ip are the thermal image and the corresponding equivalent thermal current before the
overload occurs.
• p=Ip /IB =√(Dθp /DθB: prior load.
Following data applies:
• Range where the equation is valid: 1.1IB ≤ Ith ≤ 10IB
• If 10IB ≤ Ith ≤ 20IB, the operating time is fixed to a value corresponding to the 10IB
• The upper limit is 20IB.
Note 1 Assuming that the secondary rated current of the line CT’s equals the rated current of the NA20 relay, as usually happens, the IB value is the
ratio between the rated current of the protected component (line, transformer,...) and the primary rated current of the CT’s.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 78
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for blocking 49, the thermal image is blocked for an
adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.[1]
The operating mode parameter may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the DThCLP Mode
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49 \ Common configuration menu.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the equivalent thermal cur-
rent may be decreased by means a KINR factor for an adjustable time interval, starting from the
circuit breaker closure.[2] The operating mode parameter may be select by setting ON-Change
setting the DThCLP Mode parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49 \
Common configuration menu.
For the Dth> threshold, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting
ON the DTh>2ndh-REST parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49 \
All elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the DThetaAL1 Enable, DTheta-
AL2 Enable and/or DTheta> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-
49 \ DthAL1 Element (DthAL2 Element, Dth> Element) menus.
KINR T DthCLP Mode tDthCLP DthIN Dth2ndh REST
DTh> Enable DTh> DThAL1 Enable DThAL1 DThAL2 Enable DThAL2
Dth> Element DthAL1 Element DthAL2 Element

Ith Ith Ith
Trip DTh> DThAL1 DThAL2
Dth>disby50-51
&
50-51 inhibition DthAL1BLK1
Dth>BF & BLK1DthAL1

Block1 Dth>AL1 &
Dth>BF DthAL2BLK1
Trip DTh> &
Dth>BLK1 & BLK1DthAL2
Block1 Dth>AL2 &
& BLK1Dth>
Block1 Trip Dth> & DthAL1BLK2IN
& BLK2INDthAL1 DthAL2BLK2IN

Dth>BLK2IN Block2 &
DthAL1 & BLK2INDthAL2
& BLK2INDth> Block2 &
Block2 Trip Dth> & DthAL2
DthAL1BLK2OUT DthAL2BLK2OUT
Dth>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT DThAL1 & Dth>AL2 &
Trip Dth> &
Dth>BLK4 DthAL1BLK4 DthAL2BLK4

BLK4OUT BLK4OUT BLK4OUT
Start I> & Trip Dth> & Dth>AL2 &
General logic diagram of the thermal image elements - 49 all-F49.ai
The trip element (Dth>) may be inhibited when a start of at least one of the overcurrent element
(50/51) is active, if the Dth>disby50-51 parameter is set ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \Ther-
mal image-49 \ Dth> Element menu.
The DθIN parameter sets a minimum level of previous thermal image Dθp when the protection relay
is powered or when a remote (binary input) or local (keyboard or ThyVisor) command is issued.
The DthIN parameter may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49\
To active the DθIN preset value remotely, a binary input must be programmed as Init DTheta func-
tion inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1, Binary input INx menu.
The trip element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the Dth> BF parameters is set to ON. The
parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49 \ Dth> Element menu.[3]
The IB setting is adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Base current IB menu.
Note 1 The CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) with blocking of the 49 element has priority compared with the second harmonic restraint function, so, if
the equivalent thermal current is enabled, the latter is not reduced when a second harmonic restraint is active.
Note 2 The CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) with threshold change of the 49 element has priority compared with the second harmonic restraint func-
tion, so, if the equivalent thermal current is enabled, the latter is not reduced when a second harmonic restraint is active.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 79
For every threshold the following block criteria are available:
If the DthAL1BLK1, DthAL2BLK1 and/or Dth>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a bi-
nary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the
given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)\Ther-
mal image-49 \ DthAL1 Element (DthAL2 Element, Dth> Element) menus, while the Block1 function
must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus.
Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.
Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.
Use of binary inputs:

• If the DthAL1BLK2IN, DthAL2BLK2IN and/or Dth>BLK2IN parameter are are set to ON and
a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase ele-
ments (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block
criteria.[2] The enable DthAL1BLK2IN, DthAL2BLK2IN and/or Dth>BLK2IN parameters are
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49 \ DthAL1 Element, DthAL2 Element,
Dth> Element menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the
selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or IN2 matching).
Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.
Use of output relay (K1...K6):

• If the DthAL1BLK2OUT, DthAL2BLK2OUT and/o Dth>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set
to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block
output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), when-
ever the given element (DthAL1, DthAL2 e/o Dth>) becomes active. The enable DthAL1BLK2OUT,
DthAL2BLK2OUT and/or Dth>BLK2OUT parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Thermal image-49 \ DthAL1 Element (DthAL2 Element, Dth> Element) menus, while the BLK-
2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays must be set inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.
Internal selective block (Block4)

As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.[3]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the thermal image function may
be enabled/disabled by means the DthAL1BLK4, DthAL2BLK4, and/or Dth>BLK4 parameters
(virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following operating modes are
available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.
The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2).
ING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section
Nota 3 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 80
ON≡Enable element
DthAL1 Enable
Init DTheta Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Common configuration DthAL1

Pickup - CLP setting change
T DthIN DthAL1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
(Pickup outside CLP) DthAL1-K
I th dDθ/dt + Dθ/T = (Ith/IB)2/T &
DthAL1-L
Dθ ≥ DthAL1
K INR
I th ∙ K INR
(Pickup within CLP)
t D t hC L P A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t DthCLP Output t DthCLP B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C
≥1
CLP Dth
≥1
DthCLPMode
2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

Dth2ndh-REST &
Start I2ndh>
DThhAL1 thermal image (49) block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN
tDthCLP 0.1 s
Output tDthCLP
t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the first alarm threshold Fun_49_AL1.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 81

DthAL1
DthAL1BLK1 & BLK1DthAL1
&
& BLK4INDthAL1
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN DthAL1
Block1

DThAL1BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input
I> Block2 OUT

ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
I>> Block2 OUT
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>> Block2 OUT

DthAL1 t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
DthAL1 Block2 OUT

Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IE
DthAL1BLK2OUT DthAL2 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(ON≡Enable) Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
IPD>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
IPD>>Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IPD>>>Block2 OUT
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IPD>>>>Block2 OUT A = OFF
IE > Block2 OUT
IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>> Block2 OUT T 0 Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
IED>>>> Block2 OUT ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output
A = IN I> Block4 I/O A = IN

DthAL1BLK4 B = OFF I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF DthAL1BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
A I>>> Block4 I/O Block4
“0” t FI-Iph DthAL1 Block4 OUT A
B DthAL1 Block4 I/O
“0”
C T 0 “0” B
DthAL1 DthAL2 Block4 I/O
≥1 IE > Block4 I/O “0” C
Block4 enable
Dth Block4 I/O IE >> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
≥1 Block4 OUT
IPD>Block4 I/O IE >>> Block4 I/O
IPD>>Block4 I/O IED> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
≥1
IPD>>>Block4 I/O T 0
49AL1_BL-diagram.ai
IED>> Block4 I/O

IPD>>>>Block4 I/O IED>>> Block4 I/O ST-IE BLK4
IED>>>> Block4 I/O Block4
Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first alarm element
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 82
ON≡Enable element
DthAL2 Enable

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Common configuration DthAL2

T DthIN DthAL2
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
(Pickup outside CLP) DthAL2-K
DthAL2-L
Dθ ≥ DthAL2
K INR
I th ∙ K INR
(Pickup within CLP)
A B = OFF
CB-State
T 0 C
≥1
CLP Dth
≥1
DthCLPMode

Dth2ndh-REST &
Start I2ndh>
DThhAL2 thermal image (49) block diagram

tDthCLP 0.1 s
Output tDthCLP
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the second alarm threshold Fun_49_AL2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 83

DthAL2
DthAL2BLK1 & BLK1DthAL2
&
& BLK4INDthAL2

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN DthAL2
Block1

DThAL2BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
I> Block2 OUT

I>> Block2 OUT
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>> Block2 OUT

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
DthAL1 Block2 OUT

DthAL2 BLK2OUT-IE
DthAL2 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
Block2 output & Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
DthAL2BLK2OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
(ON≡Enable) IPD>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
IPD>>>Block2 OUT
≥1
IE > Block2 OUT
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

B = OFF I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF DthAL2BLK4
DthAL2BLK4 I>>> Block4 I/O Block4
t FI-Iph DthAL2 Block4 OUT A
DthAL1 Block4 I/O
“0” A
T 0 “0” B
“0” B DthAL2 Block4 I/O
C Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
DthAL2 IE >> Block4 I/O ≥1 Block4 OUT
IPD>Block4 I/O IE >>> Block4 I/O
Block4 enable
≥1
IPD>>>Block4 I/O T 0
49AL2_BL-diagram.ai
IED>> Block4 I/O

Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second alarm element
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 84
ON≡Enable element
Dth> Enable

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Common configuration Dth>

T DthIN Dth>
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
(Pickup outside CLP) Dth>-K
Dth>-L
Dθ ≥ Dth>
K INR
I th ∙ K INR
(Pickup within CLP)
A B = OFF
CB-State
T 0 C
CLP Dth ≥1
≥1
DthCLPMode

Dth2ndh-REST &
Start I2ndh>
50/51block enable (ON≡Enable)

Dth>disby50-51
from 50/51 element (ON≡Inhibit) &
50/51 inhibition
DTh> thermal image (49) block diagram

Trip Dth>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & Dth> BF towards BF logic
Dth>BF
tDthCLP 0.1 s
Output tDthCLP
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the trip threshold Fun_49_Dth.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 85

Dth>
Dth>BLK1 & BLK1Dth>
&
& BLK4INDth>

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN Dth>
Block1

DTh>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
I> Block2 OUT

I>> Block2 OUT
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>> Block2 OUT

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
DthAL1 Block2 OUT

BLK2OUT-IE
Dth>
Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
Block2 output & IPD>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Dth>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) IPD>>Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IPD>>>Block2 OUT
≥1
IE > Block2 OUT
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

B = OFF I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF Dth>BLK4
I>>> Block4 I/O Block4
t FI-Iph Dth> Block4 OUT A
Dth>BLK4 DthAL1 Block4 I/O
T 0 “0” B
“0” A DthAL2 Block4 I/O
“0” B Dth Block4 I/O IE >> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
C ≥1 Block4 OUT
Dth> IPD>Block4 I/O IE >>> Block4 I/O
Block4 enable ≥1
IPD>>>Block4 I/O IED>> Block4 I/O T 0
49_BL-diagram.ai

Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the trip element
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 86
t [s]
10000
1000
100
10
1 p=
0 .0
0 .6
0 .8
1 .0
0.1
0.01 Ith /IB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Operating characteristic concerning the thermal image element (49) - T=1 min F_49-1min-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 87

t [s]
100000
10000
1000
p=
0 .0
100 0 .6
0 .8
1 .0
10
0.1 Ith /IB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Operating characteristic concerning the thermal image element (49) - T = 200 min F_49-200min-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 88

Setting notes (49)
Example with CT inputs
NA60
3x KTA = 500A/5A=100
In = 5 A
49
Appl-49m-thysensor.ai
Target: thermal image for cable overload protection with following settings:
• Alarm threshold with 90% of equivalent thermal current for the current rating of power cable (Iz).
• Trip threshold with 110% of equivalent thermal current for the current rating of power cable (Iz).
• Heating time constant Kheat : 100 min so the cool operating characteristic of the relay that be lower
compared with the thermal limit curve of the power cable, data supplied from manufacturer
• Initial thermal image: 45% of an equivalent thermal current of the current rating of power cable.

The relay nominal current (In) must be set to the CTs secondary nominal current (dip-switch and sw
setting): In =5 A, the primary nominal current (Inp) must be set to the CTs primary nominal current:
In =500 A.
The base current setting is computed IB according the formula:
IB = current rating of power cable (primary Amperes) /(In·KCT) (1)

IB = Iz /(In∙KCT )=400/(5∙500/5) = 0.80 p.u. In
The alarm threshold[1] must be adjusted in p.u. with respect to the base temperature DqB:
DqAL1 = [(desired equivalent thermal current in primary ampere/IB in primary ampere)2]
so:
DqAL1 = [(90%Iz)/IB] 2 = [0.9∙Iz /IB] 2 =0.8 p.u. DqB
Dq> = [(1.1·Iz)/IB] 2 = 1.2 p.u. DqB
The setting of the heating time constant T+ must be adjusted in minutes

T+ = 100 min
The initial thermal image must be adjusted with respect to the base overtemperature DqB : 45%
DqIN = [(desired initial thermal current in primary ampere/IB in primary ampere)2]:
DqIN = [(45%Iz)/IB] 2 = [0.45∙IIz /IB] 2 = 0.2 p.u. DqB
Example with ThySensor inputs
NA60
KTA = 630A/5A
3x 49 Inp = 630 A  In
Appl-49m-thysensor.ai
Target: thermal image for cable overload protection with following settings:
• Alarm threshold with 90% of equivalent thermal current for the current rating of power cable (Iz).
• Trip threshold with 110% of equivalent thermal current for the current rating of power cable (Iz).
• Heating time constant Kheat : 100 min so the cool operating characteristic of the relay that be lower
compared with the thermal limit curve of the power cable, data supplied from manufacturer
• Initial thermal image: 45% of an equivalent thermal current of the current rating of power cable.
Note 1 The alarm and trip thresholds must be enabled (DthAL1 Enable = ON and Dth> Enable = ON) inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image -49
\ Alarm DthAL1 (Trip Dth>) menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 89
For the setting purposes the NA60 - ThySensor pair is equivalent to a NA60 with In = 5A with tradi-
tional CT with ratio KCT = 630 / 5; the relay nominal current is automatically set.

The primary nominal current Inp must be adjusted to the primary rated current of the ThySensors, so
Inp = 630 A.
The base current setting is computed IB according the formula:
IB = current rating of power cable (primary Amperes) /(In·KCT) (1)

IB = Iz /(In∙KTA )=400/(5∙630/5) = 0.63 p.u. In
The alarm threshold[1] must be adjusted in p.u. with respect to the base temperature DqB:
DqAL1 = [(desired equivalent thermal current in primary ampere/IB in primary ampere)2]
so:
DqAL1 = [(90%Iz)/IB] 2 = [0.9∙Iz /IB] 2 =0.8 p.u. DqB
Dq> = [(1.1·Iz)/IB] 2 = 1.2 p.u. DqB
The setting of the heating time constant T+ must be adjusted in minutes

T+ = 100 min
The initial thermal image must be adjusted with respect to the base overtemperature DqB : 45%
DqIN = [(desired initial thermal current in primary ampere/IB in primary ampere)2]:
DqIN = [(45%Iz)/IB] 2 = [0.45∙IIz /IB] 2 = 0.2 p.u. DqB
Note 1 The alarm and trip thresholds must be enabled (DthAL1 Enable = ON and Dth> Enable = ON) inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image -49
\ Alarm DthAL1 (Trip Dth>) menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 90
Phase overcurrent - 50/51
Preface
Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable (I>, I>>, I>>>) with adjustable delay
(t >, t >>, t >>>).
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with rectifier, I2t or EM curve.
The second threshold may be programmable with independent or dependent time according to the
I2t curve and the third threshold with independent time.
For each threshold a reset time can be set (t>RES, t>>RES, t>>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing time
for intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second and/or third threshold (I>>, I>>>).
Similarly the second threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the third threshold (I>>>).
Each phase fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Currents above the
associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate
time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element is re-
stored.
The first threshold (I>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t >inv · {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t >inv · {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t >inv · {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Rectifier (RI): t = 2351 · t >inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6 - 1]
• I-squared-t (I 2 t = K): t = 16 · t >inv / (I/I>inv)2
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (I/I>inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
I>inv : threshold setting
t >inv : operate time setting
The second threshold (I>>) may be programmable with definite or inverse time according to the I2t
curve: t = 16 · t >inv / (I/I>inv)2
The third threshold (I>>>) with definite time.
t>
TRIP
t >>
t >>>
I> I>> I>>> I

General operation time characteristic for the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51 t-int-F50-51.ai
For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
• If I>inv pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In
For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 In.
All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the I> Enable, I>>
Enable and/or I>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51
\ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the I>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI,
ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, RECTIFIER, I2t, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 91
The second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the I> Time characteristic (I>>Curve) parameter (DEFINITE, I2t) available inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
The trip of I> element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third element (I>>, I>>>) by set-
ting ON the Disable I> by start I>>, Disable I>> by start I>>> (I>disbyI>>, I>disbyI>>>) parameters
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I>> Element (I>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
Similarly the trip of the I>> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (I>>>) by setting
ON the Disable I>> by start I>>> (I>>disbyI>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B (Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus).
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t>RES, t>>RES, t>>>RES).
INPUT
t>RES t>RES t>RES
I> Start
t> t>
I> Trip
RESET
t
I> element phase overcurrent timers - 50/51 Timers-F50-51.ai
Each overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the I> BF, I>> BF and/or
I>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]
For all overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting
ON the I>2ndh-REST, I>>2ndh-REST, I>>>2ndh-REST parameters inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the ICLP> Mode, ICLP>>
Mode and/or ICLP>>> Mode parameters.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Change setting the ICLP> Mode, ICLP>>
Mode and/or ICLP>>> Mode parameters, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP
may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element,(I>> Element,
I>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.
For both operating modes the CLP Activation time parameters (tCLP>, tCLP>>, tCLP>>>) may
be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element,
I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 92
I> Enable I>Curve ICLP>Mode tCLP> t>RES I> def ICLP> def t> def I> inv ICLP> inv t> inv
IL1 I> Element

IL2 Start I>
IL3 Trip I>
≥ I> inhibition I>2ndh-REST CLPI>

I>BF
& I>BF
Start I2ndh>
Trip I> &
I>BLK1 Start I>
BLK1I>
&
&
Block1
I>BLK2IN Start I>

BLK2INI>
&
&
Block2
I>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
I>BLK4 Start I> &
BLK4OUT
Start I> &
I>> Enable I>>Curve ICLP>>Mode tCLP>> t>>RES I>> def ICLP>> def t>> def I>> inv ICLP>> inv t>> inv
IL1 I>> Element Start I>>

IL2 Trip I>>
IL3
I>>2ndh-REST I> disbyI>> CLPI>>
I>> inhibition
& I>>BF &
Start I2ndh> Start I>>
I>> Trip I>>BF
&
I>>BLK1 Start I>>
BLK1I>>
&
&
Block1
I>>BLK2IN Start I>>

BLK2INI>>
&
Block2 &
I>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
I>>BLK4 Start I>> &
BLK4OUT
Start I>> &
I>>> Enable ICLP>>>Mode tCLP>>> t>>>RES I>>> def ICLP>>> def t>>> def
IL1 I>>> Element Start I>>>

IL2 I>>>2ndh-REST Trip I>>>
IL3 I> disbyI>>>
& CLPI>>>
Start I2ndh> I>> disbyI>>>
Start I>>> &
Start I>>> &

I>>>BLK1 Start I>>>
BLK1I>>>
&
&
Block1
I>>>BF
I>>>BF
Trip I>>> &
I>>>BLK2IN Start I>>>
BLK2INI>>>
&
&
Block2
I>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
I>>>BLK4 Start I>>> &
BLK4OUT
Start I>>> &
General logic diagram of the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51 all-F50-51.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 93

For every of the three thresholds the following block criteria are available:

If the I>BLK1, I>>BLK1 and/or I>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary in-
put is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given
input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase over-
current-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function
must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus.



• If the I>BLK2IN, I>>BLK2IN and/or I>>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a binary
input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements
(Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[2]
The enable I>BLK2IN, I>>BLK2IN and/or I>>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the selected
binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).

parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

• If the I>BLK2OUT, I>>BLK2OUT and/or I>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON
and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output
by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever
the given element (Start I>, Start I>> e/o Start I>>>) becomes active. The enable I>BLK2OUT,
I>>BLK2OUT and/or I>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element, I>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays
and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

elements.[3]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the phase overcurrent function may
be enabled/disabled by means the I>BLK4, I>>BLK4, and/or I>>>BLK4 parameters (virtual
input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following operating modes are available:
setting is avoided.
relays (Block2).
ING section
MONITORING section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 94
ON≡Enable I> overcurrent element
I> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I>> and/or I>>> overcurrent element)
I> inhibition
I> def State
&
I L1 ≥ I> def Start I>
(Pickup outside CLP)
≥1
I> inv State
I>ST-K
I L1 &
I>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I L1 ≥ I> inv
(LED+REL AYS)
t >inv
I C L P >def I C L P >inv I> Curve t >RES

t >def
(Pickup within CLP) t >RES
& t>
I L1 ≥ I > ≥1 T 0 0 T I>TR-K
T 0 I>TR-L
RESET
I L2
Trip I>
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” ≥1 CLP I>
t CLP>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t CLP> Output t CLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C
≥1
ICLP>Mode

I>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>
I> overcurrent element (50/51) block diagram

Trip I>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I> BF towards BF logic
I>BF
tCLP> 0.1 s
Output tCLP>
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - First element logic diagram (I>) Fun_50-51S1.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 95

Start I>
&
I>BLK1 Trip I> & BLK1I>
&
& BLK4IN I>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I>
Block1

I>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
Start I>
I> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output &
I>> Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(ON≡Enable) I>>> Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

(LED+REL AYS)
DthAL1 Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE

Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 T 0 t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
≥1
IPD>>>Block2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IE > Block2 OUT IPD>>>>Block2 OUT A = OFF
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output
I> Block4 I/O A = IN

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF I>BLK4
I>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph I> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start I> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IE >> Block4 I/O ≥1
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT
Block4 enable IE >>> Block4 I/O
≥1
50-51S1_BL-diagram.ai

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (I>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 96
ON≡Enable I>> overcurrent element
I>> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I>>> overcurrent element)
I>> inhibition
(ON≡Inhibit)
I>> def State I> disbyl>>
& I> inhibition
& Start I>>
I L1 ≥ I>> def
≥1 Start I>>
I>> inv State
I>>ST-K
I L1 &
I>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I L1 ≥ I>> inv
(LED+REL AYS)
t >>inv
I>> Curve t >>RES
I C L P >>def I C L P >>inv t >>def
(Pickup within CLP) t >>RES
& t >>
I L1 ≥ I > > ≥1 T 0 0 T I>>TR-K
T 0 I>>TR-L
RESET
I L2
Trip I>>
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
≥1 CLP I>>
t C L P >> A = ON - Change setting

B = OFF
A C = ON - Element blocking
t CLP>> Output t CLP>> B
CB-State
T 0 C
≥1
ICLP>>Mode

I>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>
I>> overcurrent element (50/51) Block diagram

Trip I>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I>> BF towards BF logic
I>>BF
tCLP>> 0.1 s
Output tCLP>>
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Second element logic diagram (I>>) Fun_50-51S2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 97

Start I>>
&
I>>BLK1 Trip I>> & BLK1I>>
&
& BLK4IN I>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I>>
Block1

I>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
Start I>> I> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

Block2 output &
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>BLK2OUT I>>> Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

(LED+REL AYS)
(ON≡Enable) DthAL1 Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE

≥1
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF I>>BLK4
I>>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph I>> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start I>> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT

≥1
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (I>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 98
(ON≡Inhibit)
I> disbyl>>>
& I> inhibition
Start I>>>
ON≡Enable 3rd overcurrent element
I>>> Enable
(ON≡Inhibit)
I>> disbyl>>>
& I>> inhibition
Start I>>>
I>>> def State

Start I>>>
&
Start I>>> I>>>ST-K
I L1 ≥ I>>> def
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1
I C L P >>def I C L P >>inv t >>>RES
t >>>def
(Pickup within CLP) t >>>RES
& t >>>def
I L1 ≥ I > > > ≥1 0 T I>>>TR-K
T 0 I>>>TR-L
RESET
I L2
Trip I>>>
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP I>>>
t C L P >>>
A B = OFF
t CLP>>> Output t CLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C
≥1
ICLP>>>Mode

I>>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>
I>>> overcurrent element (50/51) Block diagram

Trip I>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I>>> BF towards BF logic
I>>>BF
tCLP>>> 0.1 s
Output tCLP>>>
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Third element logic diagram (I>>>) Fun_50-51S3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 99

Start I>>>
&
I>>>BLK1 Trip I>>> & BLK1I>>>
&
& BLK4IN I>>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I>>>
Block1

I>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

Start I>>
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I>>> Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

&
(LED+REL AYS)
Block2 output DthAL1 Block2 OUT

I>>>BLK2OUT BLK2OUT-IE
(ON≡Enable) DthAL2 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
≥1
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF I>>>BLK4
I>>>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph I>>> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start I>>> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT

≥1
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (I>>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 100
Setting notes (50/51)
NA60
KCT = 300A/5A In = 5 A
3x 50/51
Appl-50-51.ai
With reference to the above figure, suppose you want to adjust the three thresholds overcurrent
protection, with phase currents measurement by CTs, as shown below (red curve).
t [s]
10
t =t> inv · 13.5

[(I/I> inv) -1]
t> inv = 0.11 s
0.43
0.1
0.05
0.01
10 64 100 250 600 1000 5000
58.2 Primary current [A]

setting): In =5 A.
The settings of any of the three elements must be related to the nominal current value of the of the
relay, with definite time characteristic, they are calculated using the following general formula:
I> def, I>>def, I>>>def = desired trip current (primary ampere ) /(In∙KCT )
Because a time-dependent curve for the first threshold is required you must first select what type
of standard curve is the better approximation; by a comparison with the characteristics given in the
appendix that it is a curve IEC very inverse time type B with adjustable tripping time 0.11 s.
The characteristic curve must be set as definite time by setting DEFINITE the I> curve parameter
inside the Set \ Profile A (or B) /Phase overcurrent - 50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu.
No time delay is required at the rest.

With 300/5 CTs ratio, the correct settings are:
• Trip threshold (second element) I>> def : 250/300 = 0.83 In
• Trip threshold (third element) I>>> def : 600/300 = 2.00 In
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 101

In = 300 A.[1]
To adjust the first threshold[2], with inverse time characteristic, the maximum trip value is equal to
110% of setting; the setting is then calculated using the following general formula:
I>inv = desired trip current (primary ampere) /(1.1∙In∙KTA ), so:
I>inv = 64 A / (1.1 · 5 · 300/5) = 58.2 /300 = 0.194 In.
The settings are:
• I>inv = 0.194 In
• t >inv = 0,11 s
• t>RES = 0.00 s
• I>> def = 0.83 In
• t >> def = 0.43 s
• t>>RES = 0.00 s
• I>>> def = 2.00 In
• t >>> def = 0.05 s
• t>>>RES = 0.00 s
To avoid that the trip time on the inverse time first threshold, if a fault current exceeding 250 A oc-
curs, become shorter than the trip time of the second threshold (0.43 s)[3], the inhibition of the first
threshold I> to start the second threshold I>> may be select through the Disabling I> from the Start
I>> (I> disbyI>>) parameter, available inside the Set \ Phase overcurrent - 50/51 \ I>> Element \ Set-
points menu.

With reference to data relating to CTs example suppose you want to adjust the overcurrent protec-
tion relay with phase current measurement by ThySensor.
NA60
KCT = 630A/5A
3x 50/51 Inp = 630 A  In

Inp = 630 A.[1]
• I>> def : 250/630 = 0.397 In
• I>>> def : 600/630 = 0.952 In
The settings are:

• I>inv: 58.2 / 630 = 0.092 In
• t >inv : 0,11 s
• t>RES : 0.00 s
• I>> def : 0.397 In
• t >> def : 0.43 s
• t>>RES : 0.00 s
• I>>> def : 0.952 In
• t >>> def : 0.05 s
• t>>>RES : 0.00 s
To avoid that the trip time on the inverse time first threshold, the same considerations of the previous
example may applied.
Note 1 The programmed value for this parameter affects only the reading of the phase currents, power and energy when the PRIMARY measuring
Note 2 The element must be enabled (I> Enable = ON) inside menu:
Set \ Profile A (or B) /Phase overcurrent - 50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints, end the parameter State = ON concerning the I>inv inside:
Set \ Profile A (or B) /Phase overcurrent - 50/51 \ I> Element \ Inverse time
Similarly for the parameters enabling the second and third threshold (I>> Enable = ON,... Stato = ON,... etc)
Note 3 With a fault current I = 500 A, without enabling the blocking over the first threshold when the start of the second threshold become active, there
would be a trip of the first threshold in 0.195 s (green curve in the example)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 102
Preface
Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable (IE >, IE >>, IE >>>) with adjustable delay (t E >,
t E >>, t E >>>).
The first one (IE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with EM curve.
The second and third thresholds (IE >>, IE >>>) with independent time.
For each threshold a reset time can be set (t E>RES, t E>>RES, t E>>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing
time for intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second and/or third threshold (IE >>, IE >>>).
Similarly the second threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the third threshold (IE >>>).
The residual fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Current above the
associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time
a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold (IE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E >inv · {0.01 / [(IE /IE >inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E >inv · {3.922 / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E >inv · {5.64 / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t E >inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IE /IE >inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
IE >: pickup value
t E >inv : operate time setting
tEx>
TRIP
x = 1 or 2
t E x >>
t E x >>>
IEx> I E x >> I E x >>> IE t-int-F50N-51N.ai
General operation time characteristic for the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IE >
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IE /IE >inv ≤ 20
• If IE >inv pickup ≥ 2.5 IEn, the upper limit is 10 IEn
For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IEn.
All residual overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the IE> En-
able, IE>> Enable and/or IE>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual
overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the IE>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI,
ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-
50N/51N \ IE> Element \ Setpoints menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 103
The trip of IE > element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third el-
ement (IE >>, IE >>>) by setting ON the Disable IE> by start IE>>, Disable IE> by
start IE>>> (IE>disbyIE>>, IE>disbyIE>>>) parameters available inside the
Set \Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE>> Element (IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
Similarly the trip of the IE >> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (IE >>>) by setting
ON the Disable IE>> by start IE>>> (IE>>disbyIE>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus).
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold t E>RES, t E>>RES, t E>>>RES).
INPUT
t E>RES t E>RES t E>RES
IE> Start
t E> t E>
IE> Trip
RESET
t
IE> element residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Timers Timers-F50N-51N.ai
Each residual overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IE> BF, IE>> BF
and/or IE>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.[1]
For all overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting ON
the IE>2ndh-REST, IE>>2ndh-REST, IE>>>2ndh-REST parameters inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IECLP> Mode, IECLP>>
Mode, IECLP>>> Mode parameters.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IECLP> Mode, IECLP>> Mode, IECLP>>>
Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tECLP>, tECLP>>, tECLP>>>) may be
adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element,
IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IECLP>def,
IECLP>inv,....) may be adjusted inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \
IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.
For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
If the IE>BLK1, IE>>BLK1 and/or IE>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a bi-
nary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever
the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while
the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary
input IN1(x) menus.

ING section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 104
IE> Enable IE>Curve IECLP>Mode tECLP> tE>RES IE> def IECLP> def tE> def IE> inv IECLP> inv tE> inv
IE> Element
IE Start IE>
Trip IE>
≥ IE> inhibition IE>2ndh-REST CLPIE>

IE>BF
& IE>BF
Start I2ndh>
Trip I> &
IE>BLK1 Start I>
BLK1IE>
&
&
Block1
IE>BLK2IN Start I>

BLK2INIE>
&
&
Block2
IE>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IE>BLK4 Start IE> &
BLK4OUT
Start IE> &
IE>> Enable IECLP>>Mode tECLP>> tE>>RES IE>> def IECLP>> def tE>> def
IE>> Element Start IE>>

IE
Trip IE>>
IE>>2ndh-REST IE> disbyIE>> CLPIE>>

IE>> inhibition
& IE>>BF &
Start I2ndh> Start IE>>
IE>> Trip IE>>BF
&
IE>>BLK1 Start IE>>
BLK1IE>>
&
&
Block1
IE>>BLK2IN Start IE>>

BLK2INIE>>
&
Block2 &
IE>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IE>>BLK4 Start IE>> &
BLK4OUT
Start IE>> &
IE>>> Enable IECLP>>>Mode tECLP>>> tE>>>RES IE>>> def IECLP>>> def tE>>> def
IE>>> Element Start IE>>>

IE
IE>>>2ndh-REST Trip IE>>>
IE> disbyIE>>>
& CLPIE>>>
Start I2ndh> IE>> disbyIE>>> Start IE>>> &
Start IE>>> &
IE>>>BLK1 Start IE>>>
BLK1IE>>>
&
&
Block1
IE>>>BF
IE>>>BF
Trip IE>>> &
IE>>>BLK2IN Start IE>>>
BLK2INIE>>>
&
&
Block2
IE>>>BLK2OUT
IE>>>BLK4 BLK2OUT
Start IE>>> &
BLK4OUT
Start IE>>> &
General logic diagram of the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N all-F50N-51N.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 105


• If the IE>BLK2IN, IE>>BLK2IN and/or IE>>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a
binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase ele-
ments (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block
criteria.[1] The enable IE>BLK2IN, IE>>BLK2IN and/or IE>>>BLK2IN parameters are avail-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element,
IE>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be
assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or
INx matching).


• If the IE>BLK2OUT, IE>>BLK2OUT and/or IE>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to
ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output
by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the
given element (Start IE>, Start IE>>and/or Start IE>>>) becomes active. The enable IE>BLK2OUT,
IE>>BLK2OUT, and/or IE>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element, IE>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output
relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

elements.[2]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the residual overcurrent function
may be enabled/disabled by means the IE>BLK4, IE>>BLK4 and/or IE>>>BLK4 parameters
(virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following operating modes are
available:
setting is avoided.
relays (Block2).
MONITORING section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 106
ON≡Enable IE> residual overcurrent element
IE> Enable
ON≡Inhibit
IE> inhibition
(from IE>> and/or IE>>> residual overcurrent element)
Start IE>
I E> def State
&
I E ≥ I E> def IE>ST-K
(Pickup outside CLP) IE>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
≥1
(LED+REL AYS)
I E> inv State t E>inv
I E> Curve t E>RES
IE & t E>def
I E ≥ I E> inv t >RES
& t E>
T 0 0 T IE>TR-K
I EC L P >def I EC L P >inv T 0 IE>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
I E ≥ I ECL P >
Trip IE>
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
≥1 CLP I E>
t EC L P >
A B = OFF
t ECLP> Output t ECLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C
≥1
IECLP>Mode

IE>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>
IE> residual overcurrent element (50N/51N) Block diagram

Trip IE>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE> BF towards BF logic
IE>BF
tECLP> 0.1 s
Output tECLP>
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - First element logic diagram (IE>) Fun_50N-51NS1.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 107

Start IE >
&
IE>BLK1 Trip IE > & BLK1IE>
&
& BLK4IN IE>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IE>
Block1

IE>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I> Block4 I/O t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

(LED+REL AYS)
I>> Block4 I/O BLK2OUT-IE

Phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
≥1 t F-IPh/IE
T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
IPD>>>>Block4 I/O BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
Start IE >
IE > Block2 OUT A = OFF
Block2 output & B = ON IPh
IE>BLK2OUT IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE ModeBLOUT1
(ON≡Enable) C = ON IPh/IE
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output
I> Block4 I/O
A = IN
I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IE>BLK4
A = IN Phase elements ST-Iph BLK4
≥1 C = OUT Block4
IE>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph A
C = OUT
“0” A IPD>>>>Block4 I/O T 0 “0” B
“0” B IE > Block4 I/O “0” C
C IE >> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
Start IE > ≥1 Block4 OUT
50N-51NS1_BL-diagram.ai
IE >>> Block4 I/O

Block4 enable t FI-IE IE > Block4 OUT
IED> Block4 I/O
≥1
IED>> Block4 I/O T 0
IED>>> Block4 I/O
ST-IE BLK4
Measured residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 108
ON≡Enable IE>> residual overcurrent element (ON≡Inhibit)
IE>> Enable IE> disbylE>>
& IE> inhibition
Start IE>>
ON≡Inhibit
IE>> inhibition
(from IE>>> residual overcurrent element)
Start IE>>
Start IE>>
IE>>ST-K
IE>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I E>>def State
& t E >>RES
t E >>def
I E ≥ I E>> def
t E >>RES
& t E >>def
IE 0 T IE>>TR-K
I EC L P >>def T 0 IE>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IE>>
I E ≥ I E C L P >>def
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
≥1 CLP IE>>
t E C L P >>
A B = OFF
t ECLP>> Output t ECLP>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C
≥1
IECLP>>Mode

IE>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>
IE>> residual overcurrent element (50N/51N) Block diagram

Trip IE>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE>> BF towards BF logic
IE>>BF
tECLP>> 0.1 s
Output tECLP>>
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Second element logic diagram (IE>>) Fun_50N-51NS2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 109

Start IE >>
&
IE>>BLK1 Trip IE >> & BLK1IE>>
&
& BLK4IN IE>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IE>>
Block1

IE>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

≥1 t F-IPh/IE
T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
≥1
Start IE >>
Block2 output & IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE B = ON IPh
IE>>BLK2OUT ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
(ON≡Enable) IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output
I> Block4 I/O
A = IN
I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IE>>BLK4
Phase elements ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
A = IN
≥1 Block4
t FI-Iph A
IE>>BLK4 B = OFF IPD>>>>Block4 I/O “0” B
T 0
A
C = OUT IE > Block4 I/O “0” C
“0” t FI-IE
B IE >> Block4 I/O ≥1
“0” Block4 OUT
Start IE >> C IE >>> Block4 I/O

IED> Block4 I/O t FI-IE IE >> Block4 OUT
Block4 enable ≥1
IED>>> Block4 I/O
ST-IE BLK4
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IE>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 110
(ON≡Inhibit)
IE>disbylE>>>
& IE> inhibition
ON≡Enable IE>>> residual overcurrent element Start IE>>>
IE>>> Enable
(ON≡Inhibit)
IE>>disbylE>>>
& IE>> inhibition
Start IE>>>
Start IE>>>
Start IE>>> IE>>>ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I E>>>def State IE>>>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
& t E>>>RES
t E>>>def
I E ≥ I E>>> def
t E>>>RES
& t E>>>def
IE 0 T IE>>>TR-K
I EC L P >>>def T 0 IE>>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IE>>>
I E ≥ I ECLP > > > d e f
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”
≥1 CLP IE>>>
t EC L P >>>
A B = OFF
t ECLP>>> Output t ECLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C
≥1
IECLP>>>Mode

IE>>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>
IE>>> residual overcurrent element (50N/51N) Block diagram

Trip IE>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE>>> BF towards BF logic
IE>>>BF
tECLP>>> 0.1 s
Output tECLP>>>
t
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Third element logic diagram (IE>>>) Fun_50N-51NS3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 111

Start IE >>>
&
IE>>>BLK1 Trip IE >>> & BLK1IE>>>
&
& BLK4IN IE>>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IE>>>
Block1

IE>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

≥1 t F-IPh/IE
T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
≥1
Start IE >>>
Block2 output & IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE B = ON IPh
IE>>>BLK2OUT ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
(ON≡Enable) IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output
I> Block4 I/O
A = IN
I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IE>>>BLK4
Phase elements ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
≥1 Block4
t FI-Iph A
A = IN IPD>>>>Block4 I/O T 0 “0” B
IE>>>BLK4 B = OFF IE > Block4 I/O “0” C
C = OUT IE >> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
A ≥1 Block4 OUT
“0”
“0” B IE >>> Block4 I/O
Start IE >>> C IED> Block4 I/O t FI-IE IE >>> Block4 OUT
≥1
Block4 enable
IED>>> Block4 I/O
ST-IE BLK4
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IE>>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 112
Setting notes (50N-51N)
NA60
KTAO = 100A / 1A = 100 IEn = 1 A

50N/51N
Appl-50G-51G.ai
Example N. 1
With reference to the figure above, suppose you want to adjust the protection against ground fault,
with definite time characteristic, threshold of 2 A primary, operate time of 0.38 s for the first element
and 70 A primary, operate time of 0.10 and no reset time delay for both the elements.
The relay residual nominal current (IEn) must be set to the balance core CT secondary nominal cur-
rent (dip-switch and sw setting): IEn =1 A.
The threshold setting must be adjusted in p.u. of the relay nominal current IEn, according the general
formula:
IE >, IE >>, IE >>> = wanted trip residual current (primary ampere) /(IEn·KTAO)
The characteristic curve must be set as definite time by setting DEFINITE the IE> curve param-
eter inside the Set \ Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N \ IE> Element \ Setpoints menu.[1]
The threshold setting are:
• IE > = 2 /(1·100/1) = 0.020 p.u. IEn
• IE >> = 70 /(1·100/1) = 0.700 p.u. IEn
To adjust the operate time and the reset time delay the settings are:
t E > def = 0.38 s
t E > RES = 0.00 s
t E >> def = 0.10 s
t E >> RES = 0.00 s
Example N. 2
NA60
KCT = 500A/5A =100 IEn = 5 A

3x 50N/51N
Appl1-50G-51G.ai
With reference to the figure above, suppose you want to adjust the protection against ground fault,
with definite time characteristic, threshold of 150 A primary, operate time of 0.10 s and no reset time
delay.
The relay residual nominal current (IEn) must be set to the phase CT (Holmgreen connection) second-
ary nominal current (dip-switch and sw setting): IEn = 5 A.
The threshold setting must be adjusted in p.u. of the relay nominal current IEn, according the general
formula:
IE >, IE >>, IE >>> = wanted trip residual current (primary ampere) /(IEn·KCT )
For the example the second threshold of the residual overcurrent protection is considered, so apply-
ing the above formula is:
IE>>def = 150 / (IEn·KCT ) =150 / (5·500/5) = 0.3 p.u. IEn
To adjust the operate time and the reset time delay the settings are:
t E>>def = 0.10 s
t E >> RES = 0.00 s
Note 1 The element must be enabled: IE> Enable = ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N \ IE> Element \ Set-
points and State = ON parameter concerning the IE>def variable inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N \ IE> Element \ Definite time menu
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 113
Overvoltage - 59
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (U>, U>>) with adjustable delay (t U >, t U >>).
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time, while the second threshold operates
with definite time characteristic.

The first threshold trip (U>) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U>>).

The fundamental frequency of a selectable voltages, phase to ground (UL1, UL2 , UL3) or phase-to-
phase voltages (U12 , U23 , U31) are utilized:
U12 =|UL1-UL2|
U23 =|UL2 -UL3|
U31=|UL2 -UL1|
Each of three voltages is compared with the setting values (U>, U>>). The start and trip logic may
be selected OR or AND.
With OR selection, a start is issued when at least one of the three voltages overcomes the adjust-
able threshold (START); after expiry of the associated operate time (t U >, t U >>) a trip command is
issued; if instead the voltages drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
With AND selection, a start is issued when all the three voltages overcome the adjustable threshold;
after expiry of the associated operate time (t U >, t U >>) a trip command is issued; if instead the voltage
drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold (U>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
t=0.5 t U >inv / [(U/U>inv) - 1]
Where:
t: operate time
U>inv: threshold setting
t U>inv: operate time setting

• The operate time setting is referred to an input voltage equal to 1.5 of the pickup value.
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 U>inv
• Range where the equation is valid: 1.1 ≤ U/U>inv ≤ 4
• If U>inv pickup ≥ 0.5 Un, the upper limit is 2 Un.
The first overvoltage element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the U>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, INVERSE) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Overvoltage-59 \ U> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the U> Enable parameter inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ U> Element \ Setpoints menu and/or the State parameter
inside the Set\Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ U>> Element \ Definite time.
t U>
TRIP
t U >>
U> U>> U t-int-F59.ai
General operation time characteristic for the overvoltage elements - 59

The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) and the operating logic (AND
or OR), is adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ Common configuration menu
by means the Utype59 parameter; the allowed setting are Uph-ph (phase-to-phase) or Uph-n
(phase-to-neutral).
The corresponding unit are p.u. Un for Uph-ph setting and p.u. En for Uph-n setting.
The first threshold trip (U>) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U>>) by setting ON
the U> Disabling by U>> start (U>disbyU>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Overvoltage-59 \ U>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 114
Utype59 Logic59
U12 ,U23,U31 AND

U
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 OR
State U>>def tU>> def U> Enable U> Curve U>def tU> def U> inv tU> inv
U>> Element U> Element

Start U>> Start U>
U U
Trip U>> Trip U>
U>BF
U> disbyU>> U>BF
Trip U> &
& U> inhibition
Start U>>
U>>BLK1 Start U>> U>BLK1 Start U>
BLK1U>> BLK1U>
& &
Block1 & Block1 &
General logic diagram of the overvoltage elements - 59 all-F59.ai
Both overvoltage elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the U> BF and U>>BF pa-
rameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \Profile A(or B)\Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element (U>> Ele-
ment) \ Setpoints menus.[1]
Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element (U>> Element) \ Setpoints menus).
ON≡Enable U> overvoltage element

U> Enable
U> def State
&
Utype59 U ≥ U> def
UL1 ≥1
Start U>
U12 U> inv State
& U>ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
U>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
U ≥ U> inv
U> Curve
UL2 Logic59 t U>def t U>inv
U23 ≥1
& t U>
T 0 U>TR-K
& T 0
UL3 U>TR-L
RESET
U31
(ON≡Inhibit) Trip U>
U> Inhibition
Start U>
U>BLK1 Trip U> & BLK1U>
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U> BF towards BF logic
U>BF
Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (U>) of the overvoltage element - 59 Fun-F59_S1.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 115
(ON≡Inhibit)
U>disbyU>>
& U> Inhibition
Start U>>
U>> def State
Utype59
UL1 & U>>ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
U12 U>>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
U ≥ U>> def
UL2 Logic59 t U>>def

U23 ≥1
t U>>
U>>TR-K
& T 0
UL3 U>>TR-L
RESET
U31
Trip U>>
Start U>>
U>>BLK1 Trip U>> & BLK1U>
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U>> BF towards BF logic
U>>BF
Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (U>>) of the overvoltage element - 59 Fun-F59_S2.ai
For every of the two thresholds the following block criteria are available:
If the U>BLK1 and/or U>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block
goes down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set\Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage - 59
\ U> Element (U>> Element) \Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the
selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
ING section.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 116
t [s]
10000
t =t U>inv · 0.5
[(U/U> inv) - 1]
1000
100
t U > inv = 100 s
10
t U > inv = 10 s
t U > inv = 1 s
0.1 t U > inv = 0.1 s
0.01 U /U >inv
1.1 1.5 2 3 4
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when U/U>inv = 1.5
Inverse time operating characteristic concerning the first threshold (U>) of the overvoltage element - 59 F_59-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 117

Setting notes (59)

NA60
59 Un = 100 V
10000 / 3 V
fn = 50 Hz KTV = = 100
100 / 3 V
Ung = 10 kV
Appl-59.ai
Examples with VT inputs

Example 1
Overvoltage protection with phase voltage measure and two operating thresholds:
• First threshold trip with inverse time characteristic when at least one phase voltage becomes high-
er than 110% of the Grid nominal phase voltage and with 10 s operate time for the 130% of the Grid
the Grid nominal phase voltage and with 1 s operate time.
Un =(Grid nominal voltage in volt) / VTs ratio (KVT )
Un = Ung / KTV = 6000/60 = 100 V
En = Un / √3 = 57.7 V
The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-neutral Utype59) and the operating logic (OR), is adjust-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ Common configuration menu by means the
Utype59 and the Logic59 parameters; the Uph-n (phase-to-neutral) and OR are the proper set-
tings.
With inverse time characteristic[1], the maximum operating threshold is equal to 150% of setting; the
voltage measure):
U>inv = required phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(1.5 ∙ En ∙ KVT )
so:
U> inv = (1.1 ∙ Ung /√3) / (1.5 ∙ En ∙ KVT ) = 1.1 ∙ (10000 /√3) / 1.5 ∙ (100 /√3 ∙ 100) = 0.733 p.u. En
The first threshold setting is: U> inv = 0.73 p.u. En
Since the requested operate time for the first threshold is 3 s when the phase voltage is equal to
130% of the Grid phase nominal voltage, the operating time setting t U >inv (conventionally related
to the phase voltage equal to 150% of the setting threshold) must be defined according the formula
(characteristic curve):
t = 0.5 / (U/U>inv -1) ∙ t U >inv
The t U >inv setting may be defined:
• t = 10 s
• U = (1.3 ∙ Ung / √3) / (En ∙ KVT ) = 1.3 p.u. En
from which: t U >inv = t ∙ (U/U>-1) / 0.5 = 10 ∙ (1.3/0.733-1) / 0.5 = 15.45 s
The first threshold operating time to be set is:t U >inv = 15.5 s
formula:
U>> def = wanted phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(En ∙ KVT ) so:
U>> def = (1.4 ∙ Ung /√3) / (En ∙ KVT ) = (1.4 ∙ 10000 / √3) / 100/√3 ∙ 100 = 1.4 p.u. En
The setting are:
• U>> def = 1.4 En
• t U >> def = 1 s
Note 1 The element must be enabled: U> Enable = ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element \ Setpoints and State = ON
parameter concerning the State = ON for U>def parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element \ Inverse time menu
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 118
Example 2
For the same system of the example 1 the purpose is a two thresholds overvoltage phase-to-phase
protection, so:
Grid nominal voltage and operating time 10 s when the voltage is equal to 130% of the Grid nominal
voltage.
the Grid nominal voltage and operating time 1 s.
Nominal settings:
voltage value divided by the VT ratio: Un = Unm / KTV = 6000/60 = 100 V
The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-phase) and the operating logic (OR), is adjustable inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ Common configuration menu by means the Utype59 and
the Logic59 parameters; the Uph-ph (phase-to-phase) and OR are the proper settings.
U>inv = Wanted operating threshold (primary phase-to-phase volt)/(1.5 ∙ Un ∙ KVT ) so:
U>inv = (1.1 ∙ Ung) / (1.5 ∙ Un ∙ KVT ) = 1.1 ∙ 10000 / 1.5 ∙ (100 ∙ 100) = 0.733 p.u. Un
The setting is: U>inv = 0.73 Un
(characteristic curve): t = 0.5 / (U/U>inv -1) ∙ t U >inv
• t = 10 s
• U = 1.3 ∙ Ung / √3) / (Un ∙ KVT ) = 1.3 p.u. Un
from which:
t U >inv = t ∙ (U/U>inv-1) / 0.5 = 10 ∙ (1.3/0.733-1) / 0.5 = 15.45 s
The second threshold setting (definite time characteristic), must be defined according the formula:
U>> def = wanted phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(Un ∙ KVT ) so:
U>> def = 1.4 ∙ Unm / (Un ∙ KTV ) = 1.4 ∙ 6000 / 100 ∙ 60 = 1.4 p.u. Un
The setting are:
• U>> def = 1.40 Un
• t U >> def = 1.00 s
t [s] 1000
100
U> inv = 0.73UEn (Un)

t U > inv = 15.5 s
10
U>> def = 1.4UEn (Un)

t U >> def = 1 s
U /U >
0.1
1.1
1 1.5 2 3 4 En (Example 1)
0.733 1.10 1.30 1.40 2.20 2.93

Un (Example 2)
Operating characteristic concerning the overvoltage element examples - 59 Es-reg-F59.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 119

NA60
59 Un = 100 V
20000 / 3 V
fn = 50 Hz KTV = = 200
100 / 3 V
Ung = 10 kV
Appl-59-thysensor.ai
Overvoltage protection with phase voltage measure and two operating thresholds:
• First threshold trip with inverse time characteristic when at least one phase voltage becomes high-
er than 110% of the Grid nominal phase voltage and with 10 s operate time for the 130% of the Grid
the Grid nominal phase voltage and with 1 s operate time.
Un = Ung / KTV = 10000/200 = 50 V

En = Un / √3 = 28.9 V
The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-neutral Utype59) and the operating logic (OR), is adjust-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ Common configuration menu by means the
Utype59 and the Logic59 parameters; the Uph-n (phase-to-neutral) and OR are the proper set-
tings.
With inverse time characteristic[1], the maximum operating threshold is equal to 150% of setting; the
voltage measure):
U>inv = required phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(1.5 ∙ En ∙ KVT )
so:
U> inv = (1.1 ∙ Ung /√3) / (1.5 ∙ En ∙ KTV ) = 1.1 ∙ (20000 /√3) / 1.5 ∙ (50 /√3 ∙ 100) = 0.733 p.u. En
(characteristic curve):
t = 0.5 / (U/U>inv -1) ∙ t U >inv
• t = 10 s
• U = (1.3 ∙ Ung / √3) / (En ∙ KVT ) = 1.3 p.u. En
from which: t U >inv = t ∙ (U/U>-1) / 0.5 = 10 ∙ (1.3/0.733-1) / 0.5 = 15.45 s
formula:
U>> def = wanted phase operating threshold (primary volt)/(En ∙ KVT ) so:
U>> def = (1.4 ∙ Ung /√3) / (En ∙ KVT ) = (1.4 ∙ 10000 / √3) / 100/√3 ∙ 100 = 1.4 p.u. En
The setting are:
• U>> def = 1.4 En
• t U >> def = 1 s
Note 1 The element must be enabled: U> Enable = ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element \ Setpoints and State = ON
parameter concerning the State = ON for U>def parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element \ Inverse time menu
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 120
Residual overvoltage - 59N
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (UE >, UE >>) with adjustable delay (t UE >, t UE >>).
The first one (UE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time, while the second threshold
operates with definite time characteristic.
The first threshold trip (UE >) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (UE >>).
Two measuring criteria of the residual voltage are provided:
• Direct
• Calculated.
For direct measure the fundamental component of the residual voltage input is used (UE ), whereas,
for calculated measure (UEC) the residual voltage comes from a vector sum of three phase voltage
phasors.
UEC =|UL1+UL2 +UL3|
The residual voltage (UE or UEC) is compared with the setting values (UE >, UE >>); a start is issued
when the residual voltage overcomes the adjustable threshold (START); after expiry of the associ-
ated operate time (t UE >, t UE >>) a trip command is issued; if instead the voltage drops below the
threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold (UE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
t=0.5 t UE > / [(UE /UE >inv) - 1] or
t=0.5 t UE > / [(UEC /UE >inv) - 1]
Where:
UE : measured residual voltage
UEC : calculated residual voltage
t: operate time
UE >inv: threshold setting
t UE>inv: operate time setting

• The operate time setting is referred to an input voltage equal to 1.5 of the pickup value.
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 UE >inv
• Range where the equation is valid: 1.1 ≤ UE /UE >inv ≤ 4
• If UE >inv pickup ≥ 0.5 UEn, the upper limit is 2 UEn.
The first residual overvoltage element can be programmed with definite or inverse time character-
istic by setting the UE> Curve parameter (DEFINITE, INVERSE) available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the UE> Enable parameter inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE> Element \ Setpoints menu and/or the State
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE>> Element \ Definite time.
t UE >
TRIP
t UE >>
UE> U E >> UE
General operation time characteristic for the residual overvoltage elements - 59N t-int-F59N.ai
Selection of the measuring criteria of the residual voltage (direct measure or calculated measure) is
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ Common configuration menu;
The 3Votype59N parameter may be select as UE (direct measure) or UEC (calculated measure).
For both measuring criteria, a block of the UE > and UE >> threshold may be select when the 74VT
function is active (internal and/or external). The blocking enabling parameters 74VTint59N and-
74VText59N are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ Common
configuration menu.[1]
Note 1 The operating time must be adjusted to a greater value than the 74VT activation time (internal or binary input)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 121
The first threshold trip (UE >) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (UE >>) by setting ON
the UE> Disabling by UE>> start (UE>disbyUE>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
3Votype59 N
UE (direct measure)
UE
UEC (calculated measure)
74VTint59 N
74VText59 N
& 74VTint-Block
74VTint
& 74VText-Block
74VText
State tUE>>RES UE>>def tUE>> def UE> Enable UE> Curve tUE>RES UE>def tUE> def UE> inv tUE> inv
UE>> Element UE> Element

UE Start UE>> UE Start UE>
Trip UE>> Trip UE>
74VT & 74VT & UE>BF
UE> disbyUE>> UE>BF
Trip UE> &
& U> inhibition
Start U>>
UE>>BLK1 Start UE>> UE>BLK1 Start UE>
BLK1UE>> BLK1UE>
& &
Block1 & Block1 &
Logic diagram concerning the residual overvoltage element - 59N all-F59N.ai
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold t UE>RES, t UE>>RES, t UE>>>RES).
INPUT
t UE>RES t UE>RES t UE>RES
UE> Start
t UE> t UE>
UE> Trip
RESET
t
Timers concerning the first element of residual overvoltage protection- 59N Timers-F59N.ai
Both residual overvoltage elements (UE >, UE >>) can produce the Breaker Failure output if the
UE>BF and UE>>BF parameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage - 59N \ UE> Element
(UE>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 122
ON≡Enable UE> residual overvoltage element Start U E >
UE> Enable
U E >ST-K
U E>def
TRIPPING M ATRIX
State U E >ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
& U E > Curve t UE>RES
t UE>def t UE>inv
UE ≥ U E>def
t UE>RES
UE ≥1 & t UE>
U E>inv T 0 0 T U E >TR-K
State T 0
U E >TR-L
RESET
&
UE ≥ U E>inv
Trip U E >
(ON≡Inhibit)
U E > Inhibition
74VTint59N
(ON≡Inhibit) & ≥1
Block 74VT
74VText. Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

74VT ext.
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Start U E >
Block1 Trip U E > & Block1 U E >
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U E >
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U E > BF towards BF logic
UE>BF
Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (UE>) of the residual overvoltage element - 59N Fun-F59N_S1.ai
(ON≡Inhibit)
UE>disbyUE>>
& UE> Inhibition
Start U E >>
U E>>def State
U E >>ST-K
UE &
TRIPPING M ATRIX
U E >>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
UE ≥ U E>>def
t UE>>RES
t UE>>def
74VTint59N t UE>>RES
(ON≡Inhibit) & & t UE>>
Block 74VT ≥1 0 T U E >>TR-K
T 0
U E >>TR-L
RESET
Logic Trip U E >>

74VText. INx t ON INx t OFF
74VT ext.
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Start U E >>
Block1 Trip U E >> & Block1 U E >>
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U E >>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U E >> BF towards BF logic
UE>>BF
Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (UE>>) of the residual overvoltage element - 59N Fun-F59N_S2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 123

For every of the two thresholds the following block criteria are available:
If the UE>BLK1 and/or UE>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is de-
signed for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
goes down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual over-
voltage - 59N \ UE> Element (UE>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx
matching).
ING section.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 124
t [s]
10000
t = t UE>inv · 0.5
[(UE /UE>inv) - 1]
t = t UE>inv · 0.5
[(UEC /UE>inv) - 1]
1000
100
t UE >= 100 s
10
t UE >= 10 s
t UE >= 1 s
0.1 t UE >= 0.1 s
0.01 UE /UE>inv
1.1 1.5 2 3 4 UEC /UE>inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when UE /UE>inv = 1.5 or UEC /UE>inv = 1.5
Inverse time operating characteristic concerning the first threshold (UE>) of the residual overvoltage element - 59N F_59N-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 125

Setting notes (59N)
Examples with VT inputs

Example 1
Isolated neutral
fn = 50Hz
Ung = 6 kV KTV = (6000/ 3 )/100/3 = 60 ∙ 3
NA60
59N UEn = 100 V
Appl1-59N.ai
Ground fault protection by means an open delta VT with following settings:

• First threshold trip with inverse time characteristic when the residual voltage becomes higher than
10% of the residual voltage on a single-phase ground fault.
• 3 s operate time with 200% of setting voltage.
• No delay time at the rest.
The nominal voltage (UEn) of the residual voltage input must be set to the grid phase nominal voltage
value , multiplied for √3 and divided by the VT ratio:
UEn =(Grid nominal voltage in volt) ∙ √3 / VTs ratio (KVT )
Un = Ung / KTV = (6000·√3)/[(6000/√3)/100/3] = (6000·√3)/(60·√3) = 100 V
The residual voltage following a ground fault is:

UEg = Ung · √3 = 6000·√3 = 10392 V
The setting of any threshold[1] must be adjusted in p.u. of the relay nominal residual input voltage UEn;
with inverse time characteristic, the maximum operating threshold is equal to 110% of setting.
The first threshold must be defined according the following general formula:
UE > = Required minimum residual voltage (primary volt) /(1.1·UEn·KVT ), so:

UE >inv =10%·UEg /(1.1·UEn·KVT ) = 0.1·6000·√3/(1.1·100·60·√3) = 0.09 p.u. UEn
The characteristic curve must be set as inverse time by setting INVERSE the UE> curve param-
eter inside the Set \ Residual overvoltage - 59N \ UE> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Since the required operating time is 3 s with an input residual voltage equal to 200% of the setting,
the operating time tUE >inv (conventionally related to the phase voltage equal to 150% of the setting
threshold) must be calculated from the formula:
t = 0.5·t UE >inv /[(UE /UE >inv) - 1]
with t = 3 s and UE = 2UE >>:

t UE >inv =t·[(UE /UE >inv)-1]/0.5 = 3·(2-1)/0.5 = 6 s
The setting are:

• UE >inv = 0.09 p.u. UEn
• t UE >inv = 6.00 s
Note 1 The element must be enabled: UE> Enable = ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Residual overvoltage - 59N \ UE> Element \ Setpoints and
State = ON parameter concerning the State = ON for UE>def parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(B) \ Residual overvoltage - 59N \ UE> Element \ Definite time menu
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 126
Example N. 2
fn = 50Hz
Ung = 6 kV Isolated neutral
KTV = (6000/ 3 )/(100/ 3) = 60
NA60
Un = 100 V
59N UECn = Un · √3 =173 V
Appl2-59N.ai
With reference to the figure above, you would like a residual voltage protection with star-star VTs
and residual voltage calculated as follows:
The nominal voltage (UEn) of the residual voltage input must be set to the Grid nominal voltage value
divided by the VT ratio:
Un = Unm / KTV = 6000 / (6000/√3)/[(100/√3) = 6000 / 60 = 100 V
The calculated rated voltage of the relay UECn must be set to the value of the rated voltage of the
relay multiplied by √ 3, then:
UECn = Relay nominal voltage in volt · √3 = 100 · √3 = 173 V
The residual voltage on a phase-ground fault is given by:
UEg = Unm · √3 = 6000·√3 = 10392 V
The adjustment of any protection threshold[1] must be programmed to the nominal value of the re-
sidual voltage relay UECn; with inverse time characteristic, the maximum operating threshold is equal
to 110% of setting.
The adjustment of the first threshold is then calculated with the following general formula:
UE > = Minimum desired residual voltage desiderata in primary volt /(1.1·UECn·KTV )
so:
UE >inv =10%·UEg /(1.1·UECn·KTV ) = 0.1·6000·√3/(1.1·100·√3·60) = 0.09 p.u. UECn
t = 0.5·t UE >inv /[(UE /UE >inv) - 1]
It then calculates the t UE >inv setting entering into the equation above:
t=3s
UE = 2 · UE >
showing:
t UE >inv =t·[(UE /UE >inv)-1]/0.5 = 3·(2-1)/0.5 = 6 s
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 127
fn = 50Hz
20000 / 3 V
KTV = = 200
100 / 3 V
NA60
Un = 100 V
59N UECn = Un · √3 =173 V
Appl2-59N-thysensor.ai
Residual overvoltage protection with phase voltage measure by means of ThySensor (star-star) and
computed residual voltage:
The nominal voltage (UEn) of the residual voltage input must be set to the Grid nominal voltage value
divided by the VT ratio:
Un = Ung / KTV = 20000 / (20000/√3)/(100/√3) = 20000 / 200 = 100 V
The calculated rated voltage of the relay UECn must be set to the value of the rated voltage of the
relay multiplied by √ 3, then:
UECn = Relay nominal voltage in volt · √3 = 100 · √3 = 173 V
The residual voltage on a phase-ground fault is given by:
UEg = Ung · √3 = 20000·√3 = 34641 V
The adjustment of any protection threshold[1] must be programmed to the nominal value of the re-
sidual voltage relay UECn; with inverse time characteristic, the maximum operating threshold is equal
to 110% of setting.
The adjustment of the first threshold is then calculated with the following general formula:
UE > = Minimum desired residual voltage desiderata in primary volt /(1.1·UECn·KTV )
so:
UE >inv =10%·UEg /(1.1·UECn·KTV ) = 0.1·20000·√3 / (1.1·100·√3·200) = 0.09 p.u. UECn
t = 0.5·t UE >inv /[(UE /UE >inv) - 1]
Si calcola quindi la regolazione t UE >inv inserendo nella equazione sopra riportata:
t=3s
UE = 2 · UE >
da cui risulta:
t UE >inv =t · [(UE /UE >inv) -1]/0.5 = 3 · (2-1)/0.5 = 6 s
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 128
Phase directional overcurrent - 67
Preface
Four operation thresholds, independently adjustable (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>> ,IPD>>>>) with adjustable delay
(tPD>, tPD>>, tPD>>>, tPD>>>>).
Each overcurrent element can be enabled or disabled.
The first two may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with rectifier, I2t or EM curve.
The third and fourth thresholds with independent time.
Several operating mode are provided:
• Module or projection operating mode.
• One phase or two phase operating logic.
• 74VT internal and/or external logic.
Moreover several predefined blocking criteria are implemented (threshold trip may be inhibited by
start of the other thresholds, logic selectivity with internal and/or external elements, etc.).
To increase reliability for three phase short circuits close the VTs, a voltage memory is provided; this
memory voltage is used for reference to detect fault direction when all phase-to-phase voltages are
lower than 2% Un and remains valid for 1 s after voltage collapse.
The first and second threshold (IPD >, IPD >>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time ac-
cording the following characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t PD >inv / [(IPD/IPD >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t PD >inv / [(IPD/IPD >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t PD >inv / [(IPD/IPD >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tPD>inv · {0.01 / [(IPD/IPD>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = tPD>inv · {3.922 / [(IPD/IPD>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tPD>inv · {5.64 / [(IPD/IPD>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Rectifier (RI): t = 2351 · t PD >inv / [(IPD/IPD >inv)5.6 - 1]
• I-squared-t (I 2 t = K): t = 16 · t PD >inv / (IPD/IPD >inv)2
• Electromechanical (EM): t = tPD>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IPD/IPD>inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
IPD >inv : first and second threshold setting (IPD>inv, IPD>>inv)
t PD >inv : first and second threshold operate time setting (tPD>inv, tPD>>inv)
Third and fourth threshold (IPD>>>def, IPD>>>>def ) with definite time.
t t-int-F67.ai
t PD >
TRIP
t PD >>
t PD >>>
t PD >>>>
I PD > I PD >> I PD >>> I PD >>>> I PD

General operation time characteristic for the phase directional overcurrent elements - 67

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IPD> or IPD>>
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IPD/IPD >inv (or IPD>> inv) ≤ 20
• If IPD>inv (or IPD>>inv) pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In
• For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 In.
Two different criteria may be selected:

• Phase current threshold overcoming (module)
• Projection current threshold overcoming (projection) For both operating mode the phase-to-phase
voltage in quadrature with the current the polarizing voltage, is used as phase reference for phase
reference for the operating current (phase-to-phase voltage 90° lagging compared with current
for cosφ = 1).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 129
Therefore, for both operating mode, the following criteria applies:
• L1 phase: α1 phase displacement of the IL1 current phasor compared with the U23 , phasor, negative
for lagging current compared with voltage (α1 = ∠ U23 - ∠ IL1).
• L2 phase: α2 phase displacement of the IL2 current phasor compared with the U31, phasor, negative
for lagging current compared with voltage (α2 = ∠ U31 - ∠ IL2 ).
• L3 phase: α3 phase displacement of the IL3 current phasor compared with the U12 , phasor, negative
for lagging current compared with voltage (α3 = ∠ U12 - ∠ IL3).
The operating mode may be selected by setting the Mode67 parameter, located inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ Common configuration menu.
The settable operating mode is I (module) or I*cos (projection).
For each of the four thresholds (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>), the characteristic angle (θ>, θ>>, θ>>>,
θ>>>>) may be adjusted (setting range 0…359° common for the three phases).
The characteristic angle setting (positive when counterclockwise compared the polarizing voltage)
specifies the angular displacement of the characteristic axis standing for the trip bisector of the
tripping zone (half plane 180° wide).
With a characteristic angle setting inside the 0°...90° or 270°...359° range the faults in the “LINE zone”
are detected, while with a characteristic angle setting inside the 91°...269 range the faults in the
“BUS zone” are detected.
All the named parameters can be set separately for the four thresholds and for definite or inverse
time settings menus.
Characteristic axis
U L1
L1 phase Characteristic angle:
(ThetaP>, ThetaP>>,
ThetaP>>>, ThetaP>>>>)
Threshold: I L1
(I PD >, I PD >>, I PD >>>, I PD >>>>)
α1
BUSBAR NA60 U2 3
Trip sector
Toward line
C1-C3-C5 terminals UL 3 UL2
IL1 U2 3
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS No trip sector
IL3 Toward busbar
B1-B3-B5 terminals
U L1
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS
UL2
UL3 U 31
No trip sector
Toward busbar Threshold:
(I PD >, I PD >>, I PD >>>, I PD >>>>)
LINE L2 phase
α2
UL 3 UL2
IL 2 Trip sector
Toward line
I PD threshold
Mode67
I I L1, I L2, I L3 Characteristic angle: Characteristic axis
I∙cos I ≥ I PD threshold (ThetaP>, ThetaP>>,
U 31
U 12
Characteristic angle:
U L1 No trip sector
(ThetaP>, ThetaP>>,
Toward busbar
IL 3 U 12
Characteristic axis α3
L3 phase
UL 3
UL2
Threshold:
Trip sector (I PD >, I PD >>, I PD >>>, I PD >>>>)
Toward line
Operating characteristics of the phase directional overcurrent elements - 67 with module operating mode char-F67-modulo.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 130

L1 phase
Trip sector Characteristic axis

Toward line
U L1
No trip sector Characteristic angle:
Toward busbar (ThetaP>, ThetaP>>,
I L1 ThetaP>>>, ThetaP>>>>)
Threshold:
(I PD >, I PD >>, I PD >>>, I PD >>>>)
α1
BUSBAR NA60 U2 3
C1-C3-C5 terminals UL 3 UL2
IL1 U2 3
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS
IL3
B1-B3-B5 terminals U L1
No trip sector
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS Toward busbar
UL2 U 31
UL3 Threshold:
L2 phase (I PD >, I PD >>, I PD >>>, I PD >>>>)
LINE
α2 UL2
UL 3
IL 2
Trip sector
Toward line
I PD threshold
Characteristic angle:
Mode67 (ThetaP>, ThetaP>>,
I I L1, I L2, I L3 I Lx∙ COS ( ThetaP> - α) ≥ I PD> U 31 ThetaP>>>, ThetaP>>>>)
Characteristic axis
I∙c os I Lx∙ COS ( ThetaP>> - α) ≥ I PD>>
I Lx∙ COS ( ThetaP>>> - α) ≥ I PD>>>
I Lx∙ COS ( ThetaP>>>> - α) ≥ I PD>>>> U 12
Characteristic angle: No trip sector

U L1
(ThetaP>, ThetaP>>, Toward busbar
IL 3 U 12
Characteristic axis
α3
L3 phase
UL 3
UL2
Threshold:
Trip sector (I PD >, I PD >>, I PD >>>, I PD >>>>)
Toward line
char-F67-proiezione.ai
Operating characteristics of the phase directional overcurrent elements - 67 with projection operating mode (I∙cos)
Two operating logic may be selected:

• One of three - 1/3; trip when the phase overcurrent function is active for at least one phase.
• Two of three - 2/3, trip when the phase overcurrent function is active for at least two phases.
The operating logic may be selected by setting the Logic67 parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ Common configuration menu.
The settable logic mode is 1/3 (at least one current) or 2/3 (at least two currents).
For all the four thresholds (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>), the operating mode when the 74VT function
is active may be defined:
• OFF: no action are issued by 74VT.
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT function is active.
• Not directional: all the four thresholds are switched from directional to not directional criteria
when the 74VT function is active.
The 74VT information may issued from internal 74VT function or from an external signal acquired by
means a binary input.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 131
If a binary input is designed for 74VText, for all the four thresholds the operating mode, when the 74VT
function is active may be defined:
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT external signal is active.
when the 74VT external signal is active.
The 74VTint67 and 74VText67 parameters may be set as OFF, Block, Not directional inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ Common configuration menu, while the
74VText function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary
input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
Malfunctioning of the directional overcurrent elements can be avoided when VTs secondary fault
will arise (fuse or MCB tripping) by switching the overcurrent directional to non directional overcur-
rent protection.
67 Operating mode (Mode67)

Mode67 = I (module mode) Mode67 = I* cos (projection mode)
1/3 2/3
67 Operating logic(Logic67)
Logic67= 1/3 (at least one phase) Logic67= 2/3 (at least two phases)
Not directional OFF
74VTint(ext)67
Block
Not directional 74VTint(ext)67 Block
OFF NO YES
at least two phases > threshold
YES NO
at least one phase > threshold
Start =ON Start =OFF Start =ON
Operating mode and logic concerning the phase directional overcurrent protection - 67 criteri-F67.ai
Module
If the module principle and the one of three - 1/3 operation logic are selected, the start of any 67
threshold becomes active when the following condition are contemporaneously active:
A) For at least one phase the current (IL1, IL2 , IL3) fundamental component overcomes the threshold
(IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>).
B) The current phasor concerning the phase whereof the A) condition is located inside the angular sec-
tor defined by own characteristic angle (ThetaP>, ThetaP>>, ThetaP>>>, ThetaP>>>>) parameter,
that is the -90° ≤ (ThetaP-αx) ≤ +90° (x=1, 2, 3) condition is fulfilled.
If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the B) condition is not
supervised (the A condition is comfortable).
After expiry of the associated operate time (t PD>, t PD>>, t PD>>>, t PD>>>>) a trip command is issued; if
instead the A) and B) conditions current don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
If the module principle and the two of three - 2/3 operation logic are selected, the start of any 67
C) For at least two phases the current (IL1 and IL2 , IL2 and IL3 , IL3 and IL1) fundamental component
overcomes the threshold (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>).
D) The current phasors concerning the phase pair whereof the C) condition is located inside the angular
sector defined by own characteristic angle (ThetaP>, ThetaP>>, ThetaP>>>, ThetaP>>>>) parameter,
that is the -90° ≤ (ThetaP-αx) ≤ +90° (x=1, 2, 3) condition is fulfilled.
If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the D) condition is not
supervised and the operation logic is automatically forced to one of three - 1/3 (the A condition is
comfortable).
When the operate time (t PD>, t PD>>, t PD>>>, t PD>>>>) is expired a trip command is issued; if instead the
C) and D) conditions current don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
Projection
If the projection principle and the one of three - 1/3 operation logic are selected, the start of any 67
• If the operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), when the pro-
jection of the current phasor on the characteristic axis ILxcos(ThetaP>-αx), ILxcos(ThetaP>>-αx),
ILxcos(ThetaP>>>-αx), ILxcos(ThetaP>>>>-αx) where x=1, 2, 3 of at least one phase is positive and
overcomes the setting threshold (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>), a start signal is issued.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 132
• If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), when at least one
phase current (IL1, IL2 , IL3) overcomes the setting threshold (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>), a start
signal is issued. (no displacement or projection condition are required for tripping).
instead the above conditions don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
If the projection principle and the two of three - 2/3 operation logic are selected, the start of any 67
• If the operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), when the pro-
jection of the current phasor on the characteristic axis ILxcos(ThetaP>-αx), ILxcos(ThetaP>>-αx),
ILxcos(ThetaP>>>-αx), ILxcos(ThetaP>>-αx where x=1 e 2, 2 e 3, 3 e 1) of at least two phases is
positive and overcomes the setting threshold (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>), a start signal is issued
• If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), when at least a pair
of phase currents (IL1 e IL2 , IL2 e IL3 , IL3 e IL1) overcomes the setting threshold (IPD>, IPD>>, IPD>>>,
IPD>>>>), a start signal is issued. (no displacement or projection condition are required for tripping).
instead the above conditions don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
All directional overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the IPD>
Enable, IPD>> Enable, , IPD>>> Enable e/o IPD>>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element,
IPD>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first and second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time charac-
teristic by setting theIPD>Curve and/or IPD>>Curve (INDIPENDENTE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B,
IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI, ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, RECTIFIER, I2t, EM) available inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>> Element) \ Set-
points menus.
The trip of IPD> element may be inhibited by the start of the second, third and/or fourth element
(IPD>>, IPD>>>, IPD>>>>) by setting ON the Disable IPD> by start IPD>>, Disable IPD> by start IPD>>>,
Disable IPD> by start IPD>>>> (IPD>disbyIPD>>, IPD>disbyIPD>>>, IPD>disbyI>>>>)
parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-
67\ IPD>> Element (IPD>>> Element, IPD>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
Similarly the trip of the:
• IPD>> element may be inhibited by start of the third and/or fourth element (IPD>>> and/or IPD>>>>)
by setting ON the Disable IPD>> by start IPD>>>, start IPD>>>> (IPD>>disbyIPD>>>,
IPD>>disbyIPD>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase
overcurrent-67 \ IPD>>> Element (IPD>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
• IPD>>> element may be inhibited by start of the fourth element (IPD>>>>) by setting ON the Dis-
able IPD>>> by start IPD>>>> (IPD>>>disbyIPD>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD>>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (tPD>RES, tPD>>RES, tPD>>>RES, tPD>>>RES).
Timers-F67.ai
INPUT
t PD>RES t PD>RES t PD>RES
IPD> Start
t PD> t PD>
IPD> Trip
RESET
t
IPD> element timers - 67
Each directional overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IPD> BF,
IPD>> BF, IPD>>> BF and/or IPD>>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>>
Element, IPD>>> Element, IPD>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]
For all directional overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by
setting ON the IPD>2ndh-REST, IPD>>2ndh-REST, IPD>>>2ndh-REST, IPD>>>2ndh-
REST parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element
(IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element, IPD>>> Element) \ Setpoints.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 133
IPD> Enable IPD>Curve IPDCLP>Mode tPDCLP> tPD>RES IPD> def IPDCLP> def tPD> def IPD> inv IPDCLP> inv tPD> inv
Common configurations
IL1, IL2, IL3 IPD> Element Start IPD>
Mode67 74VText67 U12, U23, U31 IPD>BF Trip IPD>
IPD>2ndh-REST
I IPD>BLK1 IPD>BF
ON Start I2ndh> & Trip IPD> &
I∙cos OFF Block1 & BLK1IPD>
Start IPD> &
CLPIPD>
Logic76 74VTint67 IPD>BLK2IN Start IPD>
BLK2INIPD>
&
1/3 ON Block2 &
2/3 OFF IPD>BLK2OUT
IPD>BLK4 BLK2OUT
Start IPD> &
BLK4OUT
≥ IPD> inhibition Start IPD> &
IPD>> Enable IPD>>Curve IPDCLP>>Mode tPDCLP>> tPD>>RES IPD>>def IPDCLP>>def tPD>> def IPD>>inv IPDCLP>>inv tPD>> inv
IL1, IL2, IL3 IPD>> Element Start IPD>>

U12, U23, U31 Trip IPD>>
IPD>>2ndh-REST IPD> disbyIPD>>
CLPIPD>>
& &
Start I2ndh> IPD>>BLK1 Start IPD>> Start IPD>>
BLK1IPD>>
&
&
Block1
IPD>>BF
IPD>>BF
IPD>>BLK2IN Start IPD>> Trip IPD>> &
BLK2INIPD>>
&
Block2 &
IPD>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IPD>>BLK4 Start IPD>> &
≥ IPD>> inhibition BLK4OUT
Start IPD>> &
IPD>>> Enable IPDCLP>>>Mode tPDCLP>>> tPD>>>RES IPD>>>def IPDCLP>>>def tPD>>> def
IL1, IL2, IL3 IPD>>> Element Start IPD>>>

U12, U23, U31 IPD>>>2ndh-REST Trip IPD>>>
IPD> disbyIPD>>>
CLPIPD>>>
Start I2ndh> & IPD>> disbyIPD>>> &
Start IPD>>>
&
Start IPD>>>
IPD>>>BLK1 Start IPD>>>
BLK1IPD>>>
&
&
Block1
IPD>>>BF
IPD>>>BF
IPD>>>BLK2IN Start IPD>>> Trip IPD>>> &
BLK2INIPD>>>
&
Block2 &
IPD>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IPD>>>BLK4 Start IPD>>> &
IPD>>> inhibition BLK4OUT
Start IPD>>> &
IPD>>>> Enable IPDCLP>>>>Mode tPDCLP>>>> tPD>>>>RES IPD>>>>def IPDCLP>>>>def tPD>>>>def
IL1, IL2, IL3 IPD>>>> Element Start IPD>>>>

U12, U23, U31 IPD>>>>2ndh-REST IPD> disIPD>>>> Trip IPD>>>>
IPD>> disIPD>>>>
& &
Start I2ndh> IPD>>> disIPD>>>> Start IPD>>>
Block1 &
Start IPD>>>>
Block2 &
Start IPD>>>> CLPIPD>>>>, BLK1IPD>>>>,
IPD>>>>BF, BLK2INIPD>>>>,
General logic diagram of the phase directional overcurrent elements - 67 BLK2OUT, BLK4OUT all-F67.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 134

This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IPDCLP> Mode, IPD-
CLP>> Mode, IPDCLP>>> Mode, IPDCLP>>>> Mode parameters.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IPDCLP> Mode, IPDCLP>> Mode, IPDCLP>>>
Mode, IPDCLP>>>> Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tPDCLP>, tPD-
CLP>>, tPDCLP>>>, tPDCLP>>>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Direction-
al phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element, IPD>>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IPDCLP>def, IPDCLP>inv,....)
may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element
(IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element, IPD>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.
If the IPD>BLK1, IPD>>BLK1, IPD>>>BLK1 and/or IPD>>>>BLK1 enabling parameters
are set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is
blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element,
IPD>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected
binary input inside the Set \ Inputs Binary input IN1(x) menus.



• If the IPD>BLK2IN, IPD>>BLK2IN, IPD>>>BLK2IN and/or IPD>>>>BLK2IN param-
eters are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is
blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according
the selectivity block criteria.[2] The enable IPD>BLK2IN, IPD>>BLK2IN, IPD>>>BLK2IN
and/or IPD>>>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional
phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element, IPD>>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the se-
lected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).


• If the IPD>BLK2OUT, IPD>>BLK2OUT, IPD>>>BLK2OUT and/or IPD>>>>BLK2OUT
enable parameters are set to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the
protection issues a block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element
(BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start IPD>, Start IPD>>, Start IPD>>> and/or Start
IPD>>>>) becomes active. The enable IPD>BLK2OUT, IPD>>BLK2OUT, IPD>>>BLK2OUT
and/or IPD>>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Directional phase overcurrent-67 \ IPD> Element (IPD>> Element, IPD>>> Element,
IPD>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/
or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK-
2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective
block OUT menu.
ING section
MONITORING section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 135
elements.[1]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the directional phase overcurrent
function may be enabled/disabled by means the IPD>BLK4, IPD>>BLK4, IPD>>>BLK4 and/or
IPD>>>>BLK4 parameters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the fol-
lowing operating modes are available:
setting is avoided.
relays (Block2).
Voltage memory
To increase reliability for three phase short circuits close the VTs, a voltage memory is provided; this
memory voltage is used for reference to detect fault direction when all phase-to-phase voltages are
lower than 2% Un and remains valid for 1 s after voltage collapse.
During the interval a virtual voltage with the same phase and frequency of the previous period to
fault is employed as reference voltage.
Memory timer
U12
U12
1s Memory U12 I n p u t U 12
0 T
≤ 1%U n
U23
U23
0 T
≤ 1%U n
U 31
U 31
0 T
U<
&
≤ 1%U n
Example U23, IL1
U23
0.01 UN
0.02 s 1 s (memoria tensione)

Voltage reference
(memory voltage)
IL1
Start time
IL1 * cos Chiusura su cortocircuito
IPD>
1s
Start
Memory voltage - 67 protection element Memory-F67.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 136
ON≡Enable IPD> directional overcurrent element
IPD> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from IP>>, IPD>>> and/or IPD>>>> element)
IPD> inhibition
I PD>def State
& I PD> Curve t PD>RES

≥ I PD>def
≥1 t PD>RES
& &
Mode67 I PD>inv State T 0 0 T
ThetaP>
I L1 &
& ≥1
I L 1∙cos ≥ I> inv
Logic67
Se t t o r e
IPDCLP>def IPDCLP>inv & C C
D D
C =“2/3” D =“1/3”
≥ IPDCLP>
Input U 2 3 ≥1
I L2
I L 2∙cos
Se t t o r e
Input U 3 1
I L3
A A
I L 3∙cos
Se t t o r e B B
Input U 1 2
A = Directional B = Non-directional
I PD>def State
&
≥ I PD>def
≥1
I PD>inv State
&
I L1
≥ I> inv
≥1
IPDCLP>def IPDCLP>inv
Non-directional
≥ IPDCLP> (from 74VT)
I L2
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t P DC L P > Start IPD>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IPD>
A IPD>ST-K
t P DC L P > B
B = OFF - CLP disabled
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP IPD>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
T 0 C
(LED+REL AYS)
t PD>inv
IPDCLP>Mode
t PD>def
I>2ndh-REST
& t PD>
IPD>TR-K
Start I2ndh> T 0 IPD>TR-L
≥1 RESET
IPD> overcurrent directional element (67) block diagram Trip IPD>
74VTint/ext67
Non-directional Block by 74VT (ON≡Block)
Internal or external
74VT
OFF Trip IPD>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I PD> BF towards BF logic
I PD> BF
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - First element logic diagram (IPD>) Fun_67S1.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 137

Start IPD>
&
IPD>BLK1 Trip IPD> & BLK1IPD>
&
& BLK4IN IPD>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IPD>
Block1

IPD>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

Start IPD> BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
IPD>Block2 OUT
Block2 output & IPD>>Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IPD>BLK2OUT ≥1
(ON≡Enable) IPD>>>Block2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>BLK4
IPD>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph IPD> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start IPD> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT
67S1_BL-diagram.ai
≥1
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IPD>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 138
ON≡Enable IPD>> directional overcurrent element
IPD> Enable
IPD>disby IPD>>
ON≡Inhibit (fromIPD>>> and/or IPD>>>> element) &
IPD> inhibition IPD> inhibition
Start IPD>>
I PD>>def State
& I PD>> Curve t PD>>RES

≥ I PD>>def
t PD>RES
≥1 & &
Mode67 I PD>>inv State T 0 0 T
I L1 & ThetaP>
& ≥1
I L 1∙cos ≥ I>> inv
Logic67
Se t t o r e
IPDCLP>>def IPDCLP>>inv & C C
D D
≥ I PDCL P > > C =“2/3” D =“1/3”
Input U 2 3 ≥1
I L2
I L 2∙cos
Input U 3 1 Se t t o r e
I L3
I L 3∙cos A A
Se t t o r e
Input U 1 2 B B
I PD>>def State
&
≥ I PD>>def
≥1
I PD>>inv State
&
I L1
≥ I>> inv
≥1
IPDCLP>>def IPDCLP>>inv
Non-directional
≥ IPDCLP>
(from 74VT)
I L2
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t P DC L P >> Start IPD>>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IPD>>
A IPD>>ST-K
t P DC L P >> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP IPD>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
T 0 C
(LED+REL AYS)
t PD>>inv
IPDCLP>>Mode
t PD>>def
I>2ndh-REST
& t PD>>
IPD>>TR-K
Start I2ndh> T 0 IPD>>TR-L
≥1 RESET
IPD>> overcurrent directional element (67) block diagram Trip IPD>>
74VTint/ext67
74VT
OFF Trip IPD>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I PD>> BF towards BF logic
I PD>> BF
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Second element logic diagram (IPD>>) Fun_67S2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 139

Start IPD>>
&
IPD>>BLK1 Trip IPD>> & BLK1IPD>>
&
& BLK4IN IPD>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IPD>>
Block1

IPD>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

Start IPD>> Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
T 0
Block2 output & IPD>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
IPD>>BLK2OUT IPD>>Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(ON≡Enable) ≥1
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>>BLK4
IPD>>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph IPD>>> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start IPD>> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT
67S2_BL-diagram.ai
≥1
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IPD>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 140
IPD>disby IPD>>>
& IPD> inhibition
Start IPD>>>
ON≡Enable IPD>>> directional overcurrent element
IPD>>> Enable
IPD>>disby IPD>>>
ON≡Inhibit (fromIPD>>>> element) & IPD>> inhibition
IPD>>> inhibition Start IPD>>>
I PD>>>def State t PD>>>RES

&
Mode67 & t PD>>RES
ThetaP>>> &
I L1 ≥ I PD>>>def 0 T
& ≥1
I L 1∙cos
Logic67
IPDCLP>>def Se t t o r e
& C C
D D
≥ I PDCLP >>> C =“2/3” D =“1/3”
≥1
Input U 23
I L2
I L 2∙cos
Se t t o r e
Input U 31 A A
B B
I L3
I L 3∙cos A = Directional B = Non-directional
Se t t o r e
Input U 12
I PD>>>def State
&
I L1 ≥ I PD>>>def
≥1
IPDCLP>>>def
≥ I PDCLP >>>def Non-directional

(from 74VT)
I L2
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t P DC L P >>> Start IPD>>>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IPD>>>
A IPD>>>ST-K
t CLP> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP IPD>>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
T 0 C
(LED+REL AYS)
IPDCLP>>>Mode
t PD>>>def
I>2ndh-REST
& t PD>>>def
IPD>>>TR-K
Start I2ndh> T 0 IPD>>>TR-L
≥1 RESET
IPD>>> overcurrent directional element (67) block diagram Trip IPD>>>
74VTint/ext67
74VT
OFF Trip IPD>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I PD>>> BF towards BF logic
I PD>>> BF
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Third element logic diagram (IPD>>>) Fun_67S3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 141

Start IPD>>>
&
IPD>>>BLK1 Trip IPD>>> & BLK1IPD>>>
&
& BLK4IN IPD>>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IPD>>>
Block1

IPD>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)
Start IPD>>> DthAL1 Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE

IPD>>>BLK2OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
≥1
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>>>BLK4
IPD>>>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph IPD>>> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start IPD>>> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT
67S3_BL-diagram.ai
≥1
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IPD>>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 142
IPD>disby IPD>>>>
& IPD> inhibition
Start IPD>>>>
IPD>>disby IPD>>>>
& IPD>> inhibition
Start IPD>>>>
ON≡Enable IPD>>>> directional overcurrent element IPD>>>disby IPD>>>>

IPD>>>> Enable & IPD>>> inhibition
Start IPD>>>>
I PD>>>>def State I PD>>>> Curve t PD>>>>RES

&
Mode67 &
t PD>>>>RES
≥ I PD>>>>def ThetaP>>>> &
I L1 T 0
& ≥1 0 T
I L 1∙cos
IPDCLP>>>>def Se t t o r e
& Logic67
C C
≥ I PDCLP >>>> D D
≥1 C =“2/3” D =“1/3”
Input U 23
I L2
I L 2∙cos
Se t t o r e
Input U 31
I L3 A A
I L 3∙cos B B
Se t t o r e
Input U 12 A = Directional B = Non-directional
I PD>>>>def State
&
I L1 ≥ I PD>>>>def
IPDCLP>>>>def ≥1
≥ I PDCLP >>>>def Non-directional

(from 74VT)
I L2
I L3
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t P DC L P >>>> Start IPD>>>>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IPD>>>>
A IPD>>>>ST-K
t CLP>>>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP IPD>>>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
T 0 C
(LED+REL AYS)
IPDCLP>>>>Mode
t PD>>>>def
I>2ndh-REST
& t PD>>>>def
IPD>>>>TR-K
Start I2ndh> T 0 IPD>>>>TR-L
≥1 RESET
IPD>>>> overcurrent directional element (67) block diagram Trip IPD>>>>
74VTint/ext67
74VT
OFF Trip IPD>>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I PD>>>> BF towards BF logic
I PD>>>> BF
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Fourth element logic diagram (IPD>>>>) Fun_67S4.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 143

Start IPD>>>>
&
IPD>>>>BLK1 Trip IPD>>>> & BLK1IPD>>>>
&
& BLK4IN IPD>>>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IPD>>>>
Block1

IPD>>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)
Start IPD>>>> DthAL1 Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE

IPD>>>>BLK2OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
≥1
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

A = IN I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>>>>BLK4
IPD>>>>BLK4 B = OFF ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
C = OUT t FI-Iph IPD>>>> Block4 OUT A
B T 0 “0” B
“0”
C
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
Start IPD>>>> Dth Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IPD>Block4 I/O
Block4 OUT
67S4_BL-diagram.ai
≥1
Phase directional overcurrent (67) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the fourth element (IPD>>>)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 144
Setting notes (67)
Rete di alimentazione
NA60
In = 5 A
3x 67
With reference to the above figure, suppose you want to adjust the three thresholds overcurrent
protection, with phase currents measurement by CTs, as shown below (red curve).
t [s]
10
t =t> inv · 13.5

[(I/I> inv) -1]
t> inv = 0.11 s
0.43
0.1
0.05
0.01
10 64 100 250 600 1000 5000
58.2 Primary current [A]
The directional element is used to prevent unwanted trips against faults between phases outside
the user network.
Settings: characteristic angle 60° for the first element (overload protection), 30° for the second and
third element (short circuit protection) with displacement of current phasors di fase compared to the
phase-phase voltage phasors, (current lags the voltage) α1 = 30°
setting): In =5 A.
The settings of any of the three elements must be related to the nominal current value of the of the
relay, with definite time characteristic, they are calculated using the following general formula:
IPD > def, IPD >>def, IPD >>>def = = desired trip current (primary ampere ) /(In∙KCT )
The characteristic curve must be set as definite time by setting DEFINITE the IPD> curve param-
eter inside the Set \ Profile A (or B) /Directional phase overcurrent -67 \ IPD> Element \ Setpoints
menu.
No time delay is required at the rest.
With 300/5 CTs ratio, the correct settings are:
• Trip threshold (second element) I>> def : 250/300 = 0.83 In
• Trip threshold (third element) I>>> def : 600/300 = 2.00 In
• Trip threshold (fourth element) I>>> defIPD >>>>def : disabled
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 145
In = 300 A.[1]
I>inv = desired trip current (primary ampere) /(1.1∙In∙KTA ), so:
I>inv = 64 A / (1.1 · 5 · 300/5) = 58.2 /300 = 0.194 In.
The settings are:
• IPD >inv = 0.194 In

• t PD >inv = 0,11 s
• t PD > RES = 0.00 s
• ThetaP >inv = 60 ° (characteristic angle)
• IPD >> def = 0.83 In
• t PD >> def = 0.43 s
• t PD >> RES = 0.00 s
• ThetaP >> def = 30 ° (characteristic angle)
• IPD >>> def = 2.00 In

• t PD >>> def = 0.05 s
• t PD >>> RES = 0.00 s
• ThetaP >>> def = 30 ° (characteristic angle)
For all elements the operating mode and he operating logic are:
• Mode67 = I (module)
• Logic67 = 1/3 (is sufficient that at least one of the three currents exceeds the threshold set)
threshold I> to start the second threshold IPD>> may be select through the Disabling I> from the Start
IPD>> (IPD> disbyIPD>>) parameter, available inside the Set \ Directional phase overcurrent - 67 \
IPD>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
With reference to data relating to CTs example suppose you want to adjust the overcurrent protec-
tion relay with phase current measurement by ThySensor.
Power Grid
NA60
KTA = 630A/5A
3x 67 Inp = 630 A  In
Inp = 630 A.[1]
The settings are:
• IPD >> def : 250/630 = 0.397 In
• IPD >>> def : 600/630 = 0.952 In
• IPD >>>>def : disabled
The characteristic curve must be set as definite time by setting DEFINITE the IPD> curve param-
eter inside the Set \ Profile A (or B) /Directional phase overcurrent -67 \ IPD> Element \ Setpoints
menu.
Note 1 The programmed value for this parameter affects only the reading of the phase currents, power and energy when the PRIMARY measuring
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 146
I>inv = desired trip current (primary ampere) /(1.1∙In∙KCT ), so:
IPD >inv = 64 A / (1.1 · 5 · 630/5) = 58.2 / 630 = 0.092 In.
The settings are:

• IPD >inv : 0.092 In
• t PD >inv : 0,11 s
• t PD > RES : 0.00 s
• ThetaP >inv : 60 ° (characteristic angle)
• IPD >> def : 0.397 In
• t PD >> def : 0.43 s
• t PD >> RES : 0.00 s
• IPD >>> def = 0.952 In
• t PD >>> def = 0.05 s
• t PD >>> RES = 0.00 s
For all elements the operating mode and he operating logic are:
• Mode67 = I (module)
• Logic67 = 1/3 (is sufficient that at least one of the three currents exceeds the threshold set)
threshold I> to start the second threshold IPD>> may be select through the Disabling I> from the Start
IPD>> (IPD> disbyIPD>>) parameter, available inside the Set \ Directional phase overcurrent - 67 \
IPD>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 147
Ground directional overcurrent - 67N
Preface
Four operation thresholds, independently adjustable (IED>, IED>>, IED>>> ,IED>>>>) with adjustable delay
(tED>, tED>>, tED>>>, tED>>>>).
Each element can be enabled or disabled.
The first two may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with rectifier, EM curve.
The third and fourth thresholds with independent time.
Moreover several predefined blocking criteria are implemented (threshold trip may be inhibited by
start of the other thresholds, logic selectivity with internal and/or external elements, etc.).

The first and second threshold (IED >, IED >>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time ac-
cording the following characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED >inv / [(IED/IED >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED >inv / [(IPD/IED >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t PD >inv / [(IED/IED >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tED>inv · {0.01 / [(IED/IED>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = tED>inv · {3.922 / [(IED/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tED>inv · {5.64 / [(IED/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): t = tED>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IED/IED>inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
IED >inv : first and second threshold setting (IED>inv, IED>>inv)
t ED >inv : first and second threshold operate time setting (tPD>inv, tPD>>inv)
Third and fourth threshold (IED>>>def, IED>>>>def ) with definite time.
t-int-F67N.ai
t
t ED >
TRIP
t ED >>
t ED >>>
t ED >>>>
I ED > I ED >> I ED >>> I ED >>>> I ED
General operation time characteristic for the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IED> or IED>>
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IED/IED >inv (or IED>>inv) ≤ 20
• If IED>inv (or IED>>inv) pickup ≥ 0.5 IEn, the upper limit is 10 IEn
For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IEn.
Two different criteria may be selected:

• Residual current threshold overcoming (module)
• Projection residual current threshold overcoming (projection)
The operating mode may be selected by setting the Mode67N parameter, located inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 148
For both the operating modes, the polarizing reference used for displacement measure of the re-
sidual current may be selected:
• Direct residual voltage - the measured UE voltage is employed.

• Calculated residual voltage - the calculated UEC voltage is employed, where the fundamental com-
ponent and phase are derived from the instantaneous values of the three input phase-to-neutral
voltages.
Therefore, for both operating mode, the displacement of the residual current phasor IE and the re-
sidual voltage phasor (UE or UEC for direct/calculated residual voltage measurement type), positive
for lagging current compared with voltage (ΦE =(∠IE - ∠UE , ΦEC =(∠IE - ∠UEC).
The residual voltage measurement type may be selected by setting the 3Votype67N parameter,
located inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configura-
tion menu. The measurement type are IUE (direct measure of residual voltage) or UEC (calculated
residual voltage).
The corresponding unit are p.u. UEn for UE setting and p.u. UECn for UEC setting.
UE
U EC
Trip sector
Half operating sector (toward line)
Characteristic angle
(βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
(ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>)
Mode67N I ED threshold
I IE Characteristic axis
I∙cos I E ≥ I ED threshold Threshold (I ED threshold):
(I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>>) Half operating sector
(M∙I ED >, M∙I ED >>, M∙I ED >>>, M∙I ED >>>>) (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
ΦE o ΦEC
IE
No trip sector
(toward busbar)
Operating characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N

BUSBAR NA60 with module operating mode (I)
C7 terminal
RESIDUAL
IE
CURRENT INPUT UE
U EC
B7 terminal
RESIDUAL Trip sector
UE Half operating sector (toward line) Characteristic angle
VOLTAGE INPUT
(βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>)
Characteristic axis
Threshold (I ED threshold):
LINE (I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>>)
(M∙I ED >, M∙I ED >>, M∙I ED >>>, M∙I ED >>>>) Half operating sector
ΦE o ΦEC (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
IE
3Votype67N
No trip sector
UE ΦE o ΦEC I (toward busbar)
ED threshold
Mode67N U EC
I
Operating characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N
IE
I∙cos I E ∙ COS (ϑE-ΦE ) ≥ I ED threshold with projection operating mode ( I∙cos)
Operating characteristics of the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N char-F67N-mode.ai
For each of the four thresholds (IED >, IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>>) , the characteristic angle (ϑE>, ϑE>>,
ϑE>>>, ϑE>>>>) may be adjusted (setting range 0…359° common for the three phases).
The the characteristic angle setting (positive when clockwise compared the polarizing voltage)
specifies the angular displacement of the characteristic axis standing for the trip bisector of the
tripping zone.
For isolated neutral systems with a 90° characteristic angle setting, faults towards the LINE are
detected, while with a 270° characteristic angle setting, faults towards the BUS are detected.
time settings menu
For each of the four thresholds (IED >, IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>>), the half operating sector may be ad-
justed (setting range 0…180° simmetrically regarding the characteristic axis).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 149
time settings menu.
For all the four thresholds (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>), the operating mode when the 74VT function is
active may be defined:
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT function is active.
when the 74VT function is active.
The 74VT information may issued from internal 74VT function or from an external signal acquired by
means a binary input.
If a binary input is designed for 74VText, for all the four thresholds, the operating mode when the 74VT
function is active may be defined:
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT external signal is active.
when the 74VT external signal is active.
Malfunctioning of the directional overcurrent elements can be avoided when VTs secondary fault
will arise (fuse or MCB tripping) by switching the overcurrent directional to non directional overcur-
rent protection
The 74VTint67N and 74VText67N parameters may be set as OFF, Block, Not directional inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu,
while the 74VText function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \
Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
For all the four thresholds (common for all thresholds) an insensibility zone may be enabled in the
voltage-current plane.
If enabled, the insensibility zone is user adjustable by means the M multiplier (common for all thresh-
olds); the rectangle defined by the current and voltage thresholds and the same multiplied by M
becomes a No trip zone.
Such insensibility zone may be useful to avoid unwanted trip in the presence of some fixed residual
current and/or voltage (e.g. CT and or VT errors in the residual measurements).
The Insens-Zone (OFF, ON) and M parameters may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.
UE
U EC
TRIP
U ED >, U ED >>, U ED >>>, U ED >>>>
IE
I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>>
Voltage/current characteristic concerning the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N
with insensibility zone disabled
UE
U EC
TRIP
M∙U ED >, M∙U ED >>, M∙U ED >>>, M∙U ED >>>>
U ED >, U ED >>, U ED >>>, U ED >>>>
IE
I E D >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>> M∙I ED >, M∙I ED >>, M∙I ED >>>, M∙I ED >>>>
Voltage/current characteristic concerning the ground directional overcurrent - 67N

with insensibility zone enabled char-F67N-IeUe.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 150

Module
If the module principle and the operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT
function), the start of any 67N threshold becomes active when the following A) and B) conditions
are contemporaneously active:
A) in the “Insens-Zone=OFF” operating mode:
- The residual current (IE ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>,
IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>),
while in the “Insens-Zone=ON” operating mode:
IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual current (IE ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙UED>, M∙UED>>,
M∙UED>>>, M∙UED>>>>)
OR
- The residual current (IE ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙IED>, M∙IED>>, M∙IED>>>,
M∙IED>>>>)
AND
The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
B) The residual current phasor (IE ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own characteristic
angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>), that is the
-βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.
If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the start of any 67N
threshold becomes active when the following is complied:
IED>>>>)
The operating mode (Mode67N), the residual voltage measurement type (Type67N), the insensibil-
ity zone enabling (Insens-Zone), the threshold multiplier for the insensibility zone (M) and the op-
eration from 74VT (74VText67N) may be selected by setting the concerning parameters, located in-
side the Set\Profile A(or B)\Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.
Projection
If the projection principle and he operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT
function), the start of any 67N threshold becomes active when the following C) condition is active:
C) in the “Insens-Zone=OFF” operating mode:

- Residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) > 0
AND
- The residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the threshold
(IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>)
AND
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
AND
The residual current phasor (IE ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own characteristic
-βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.[1]
While in the “Insens-Zone=ON” operating mode:

- Residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) > 0
AND
- The residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the threshold
(IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙UED>, M∙UED>>,
M∙UED>>>, M∙UED>>>>)
OR
The residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the threshold
(M∙IED>, M∙IED>>, M∙IED>>>, M∙IED>>>>)
AND
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
AND
The residual current phasor (IE ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own characteristic
Note 1 For each threshold the projection of the residual current phasor on the characteristic axis is: IEcos(ΘE>-ΦE), IEcos(ΘE>>-ΦE), IEcos(ΘE>>>-ΦE),
IEcos(ΘE>>>>-ΦE) when “direct” residual voltage is selected (UE), or
IEcos(ΘE>-ΦEC), IEcos(ΘE>>-ΦEC), IEcos(ΘE>>>-ΦEC), IEcos(ΘE>>>>-ΦEC) when “calculated” residual voltage is selected (UEC).
The ΘE , βE and ΦEC symbols are not used inside the ThyVisor and MMI menus.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 151
-βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.[1]
If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the start of any 67N
threshold becomes active when the following is complied:
IED>>>>)
For both the operating mode (module or projection), when the start signal goes ON a concerning
counter starts; after expiry of the associated operate time (t ED>, t ED>>, t ED>>>, t ED>>>>) a trip command
is issued, if instead the above conditions don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
All the parameters are located inside the menus concerning the four elements, separately for defi-
nite and inverse time characteristics.
Example: the operate time concerning the first threshold with definite time characteristic (IED>def)
is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element
\ Definite time menu.
All directional earth fault overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF
the IED> Enable, IED>> Enable, , IED>>> Enable e/o IED>>>> Enable parameters in-
side the Set \ Profile A(or B)\Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element,
IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first and second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time charac-
teristic by setting theIED>Curve and/or IED>>Curve (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/
BS C, ANSI/IEE MI, ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The trip of IED> element may be inhibited by the start of the second, third and/or fourth element (IED>>,
IED>>>, IED>>>>) by setting ON the Disable IED> by start IED>>, Disable IED> by start IED>>>, Dis-
able IED> by start IED>>>> (IED>disbyIED>>, IED>disbyIED>>>, IED>disbyIED>>>>)
parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N
\ IED>> Element (IED>>> Element, IED>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
Similarly the trip of the:
• IED>> element may be inhibited by start of the third and/or fourth element (IED>>> and/or IED>>>>)
by setting ON the Disable IED>> by start IED>>>, start IED>>>> (IED>>disbyIED>>>,
IED>>disbyIED>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth
fault overcurrent-67N \ IED>>> Element (IED>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
• IED>>> element may be inhibited by start of the fourth element (IED>>>>) by setting ON the Dis-
able IED>>> by start IED>>>> (IED>>>disbyIED>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED>>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (tED>RES, tED>>RES, tED>>>RES, tED>>>RES).
Timers-F67N.ai
INPUT
t ED>RES t ED>RES t ED>RES
IED> Start
t ED> t ED>
IED> Trip
RESET
t
IED> element timers - 67N
Each directional earth fault element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IED> BF, IED>>
BF, IED>>> BF and/or IED>>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Ele-
ment, IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[2]
Note 1 For each threshold the projection of the residual current phasor on the characteristic axis is: IEcos(ΘE>-ΦE), IEcos(ΘE>>-ΦE), IEcos(ΘE>>>-ΦE),
IEcos(ΘE>>>>-ΦE) when “direct” residual voltage is selected (UE), or
IEcos(ΘE>-ΦEC), IEcos(ΘE>>-ΦEC), IEcos(ΘE>>>-ΦEC), IEcos(ΘE>>>>-ΦEC) when “calculated” residual voltage is selected (UEC).
The ΘE , βE and ΦEC symbols are not used inside the ThyVisor and MMI menus.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 152
IED> Enable IED>Curve IEDCLP>Mode tEDCLP> tED>RES IED> def IEDCLP> def tED> def IED> inv IEDCLP> inv tED> inv
IED> Element Start IED>

Mode67N 3Votype67N IE Trip IED>
IED>BF
I UE 3Vo IED>BLK1 IED>BF
I∙c os
IE
U EC
3Vo Trip IED> &
Block1 & BLK1IED>
Start IED> &
M CLPIED>
Insens-Zone IED>BLK2IN Start IED>
BLK2INIED>
&
OFF Block2 &
ON ≥ M∙threshold IED>BLK2OUT
IED>BLK4 BLK2OUT
Start IED> &
BLK4OUT
≥ IED> inhibition Start IED> &
IED>> Enable IED>>Curve IEDCLP>>Mode tEDCLP>> tED>>RES IED>>def IEDCLP>>def tED>> def IED>>inv IEDCLP>>inv tED>> inv
IE IED>> Element Start IED>>

3V o Trip IED>>
IED> disbyIED>>
CLPIED>>
&
IED>>BLK1 Start IED>>
Start IED>> BLK1IED>>
&
&
Block1
IED>>BF
IED>>BF
IED>>BLK2IN Trip IED>> &
Start IED>> BLK2INIED>>
&
Block2 &
IED>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IED>>BLK4 &
≥ IED>> inhibition Start IED>>
BLK4OUT
&
Start IED>>
IED>>> Enable IEDCLP>>>Mode tEDCLP>>> tED>>>RES IED>>>def IEDCLP>>>def tED>>> def
IED>>> Element Start IED>>>

IE
Trip IED>>>
3Vo IED> disbyIED>>>
CLPIED>>>
IED>> disbyIED>>> &
Start IED>>>
&
Start IED>>>
IED>>>BLK1
Start IED>>> BLK1IED>>>
&
&
Block1
IED>>>BF
IED>>>BF
IED>>>BLK2IN Trip IED>>> &
Start IED>>> BLK2INIED>>>
&
Block2 &
IED>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IED>>>BLK4 &
Start IED>>>
IED>>> inhibition BLK4OUT
&
Start IED>>>
IED>>>> Enable IEDCLP>>>>Mode tEDCLP>>>> tED>>>>RES IED>>>>def IEDCLP>>>>def tED>>>>def
IE IED>>>> Element Start IED>>>>

3V o IED> disIED>>>> Trip IED>>>>
IED>> disIED>>>>
Start I2ndh> &
IED>>> disIED>>>> Start IED>>>>
Block1 &
Start IED>>>>
Block2 &
Start IED>>>> CLPIED>>>>, BLK1IED>>>>,
IED>>>>BF, BLK2INIED>>>>,
General logic diagram of the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N BLK2OUT, BLK4OUT all-F67N.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 153

This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IEDCLP> Mode, IED-
CLP>> Mode, IEDCLP>>> Mode, IEDCLP>>>> Mode parameters.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IEDCLP> Mode, IEDCLP>> Mode, IED-
CLP>>> Mode, IEDCLP>>>> Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tED-
CLP>, tEDCLP>>, tEDCLP>>>, tEDCLP>>>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element,
IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IEDCLP>def,
IEDCLP>inv,....) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcur-
rent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse
time) menus.
If the IED>BLK1, IED>>BLK1, IED>>>BLK1 and/or IED>>>>BLK1 enabling parameters
are set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element
is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element,
IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned
to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus.



• If the IED>BLK2IN, IED>>BLK2IN, IED>>>BLK2IN and/or IED>>>>BLK2IN parameters
are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked
off by phase elements (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the se-
lectivity block criteria.[2] The enable IED>BLK2IN, IED>>BLK2IN, IED>>>BLK2IN and/or
IED>>>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth
fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element, IED>>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the se-
lected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x2) menus (IN1 or INx matching).


• If the IED>BLK2OUT, IED>>BLK2OUT, IED>>>BLK2OUT and/or IED>>>>BLK2OUT
enable parameters are set to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the
protection issues a block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element
(BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start IED>, Start IED>>, Start IED>>> and/or Start
IED>>>>) becomes active. The enable IED>BLK2OUT, IED>>BLK2OUT, IED>>>BLK2OUT
and/or IED>>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67 \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element,
IED>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/
or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK-
2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective
block OUT menu.
ING section
MONITORING section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 154
elements.[1]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the directional earth fault overcur-
rent function may be enabled/disabled by means the IED>BLK4, IED>>BLK4, IED>>>BLK4
and/or IED>>>>BLK4 parameters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds);
the following operating modes are available:
setting is avoided.
relays (Block2).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 155
I ED>def State
Mode67N 3Votype67N
&
I UE
IE 3Vo ≥ I ED>def
I∙cos U EC
≥1
M I ED>inv State
Insens-Zone CLP
A
&
OFF IE A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙threshold ≥ I ED>inv
ON A = ON - Change setting within CLP
IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
3V o Insens-Zone OFF
U ED>def State
≥ IEDCLP> TRIP
&
≥ U ED>def Insens-Zone
IE O FF
≥1 &
3V o ON M sheet 3
U ED>inv State
3 V o Insens-Zone ON
& Angle Semisector
≥ U ED>inv TRIP
3Vo
IE ΦE inside trip sector
IE
3V o
IE ΦE inside trip sector &
I ED>def State
&
≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>inv State
CLP
A
&
IE A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ I ED>inv
&
≥1
I ED>def State
≥ IEDCLP> &
≥ M∙I ED>def
≥1
U ED>def State
I ED>inv State
& &
≥ M∙U ED>def IE
≥ M∙I ED>inv
≥1
3V o
U ED>inv State CLP
IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv A
& A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ M∙U ED>inv ≥ M∙IEDCLP> &
U ED>def State
&
≥ U ED>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>inv
&
≥ U ED>inv
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - First element logic diagram (IED>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS1-module.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 156

UE
U EC Common configurations
Trip sector
(toward I ED>def State Mode67N 3Votype67N
Half
operating sector Characteristic angle I UE
& CLP IE 3V o
I∙cos U EC
Characteristic axis I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>def
≥1
Half A =“OFF” M
I ED>inv State Insens-Zone
I ED threshold operating sector
ΦE o ΦEC A O FF
IE &
IE A =“ON” ON ≥ M∙threshold
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>inv
No trip sector
(toward busbar) A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3Vo
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>
U ED>def State
TRIP
& IE
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0 IE Insens-Zone
≥ U ED>def Insens-Zone OFF
& O FF
≥1 P sheet 3
3V o ON
U ED>inv State
Angle Semisector 3 V o Insens-Zone ON
&
≥ U ED>inv 3Vo TRIP
IE
3Vo
IE &
I ED>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>inv State
CLP
A
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>inv
&
≥1
I ED>def State
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP> &

I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>def
≥1
U ED>def State I ED>inv State &
& &
IE A
≥ M∙U ED>def I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>inv A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥1 A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
U ED>inv State IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
&
≥ M∙U ED>inv I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>
U ED>def State
&
≥ U ED>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>inv
&
≥ U ED>inv
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - First element logic diagram (IED>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4) 67NS1-proiezione.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 157

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
IE 3Vo
I∙cos U EC
M
Insens-Zone
OFF
ON ≥ M∙threshold
ON≡Enable IED> directional earth fault

IED> Enable Start IED>
D =“modulo” IED>ST-K
M IED>ST-L
(sheet 1) Mode67N
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
D D
C C t ED>inv
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione” I ED> Curve t ED>RES
t ED>def
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2) t ED>RES
A & t ED>def/inv
T 0 0 T IED>TR-K
B T 0 IE>TR-L
RESET
A
Trip IED>
B
I ED>def State
&
≥ I ED>def
IE
IEDCLP>def
≥ I EDCLP >def Non-directional

(from 74VT)
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>
A
t CLP> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP
T 0 C
IEDCLP>Mode
IED> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

Block1, Block2, Block4 ≥1
74VTint/ext67N
74VT
OFF
Trip IED>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED> BF towards BF logic
I ED>BF
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - First element logic diagram (IED>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS1-3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 158

Start IED>
&
IED>BLK1 Trip IED> & BLK1IED>
&
& BLK4IN IED>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>
Block1

IED>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input
TRIPPING M ATRIX
ON IPh/IE
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
I> Block2 OUT

I>> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
I>>> Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
DthAL1 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

(LED+REL AYS)

Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
IPD>Block2 OUT T 0 t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
IPD>>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
IPD>>>Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
IPD>>>>Block2 OUT T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IED>BLK2OUT B = ON IPh
IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
Block2 output IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
(ON≡Enable) IED> Block2 OUT
≥1
& B BLOUT1
Start IED> IED>> Block2 OUT T 0 Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>BLK4
ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
t FI-Iph A
DthAL1 Block4 I/O
T 0 “0” B
DthAL2 Block4 I/O “0” C
≥1 IE > Block4 I/O
A = IN Dth Block4 I/O
IE >> Block4 I/O t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
IED>BLK4 B = OFF IPD>Block4 I/O
C = OUT IE >>> Block4 I/O
A IPD>>Block4 I/O t FI-IE
“0”
67NS1_BL-diagram.ai
IED> Block4 I/O IED> Block4 OUT

“0” B IPD>>>Block4 I/O ≥1
C IED>> Block4 I/O T 0
Start IED> IPD>>>>Block4 I/O
IED>>> Block4 I/O
Block4 enable IED>>>> Block4 I/O ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IED>) (sheet 4 of 4)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 159
I ED>>def State
Mode67N 3Votype67N
&
I UE
IE 3Vo ≥ I ED>>def
I∙cos U EC
≥1
M I ED>>inv State
Insens-Zone CLP
A
&
OFF IE A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙threshold ≥ I ED>>inv
ON A = ON - Change setting within CLP
IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv
U ED>>def State
≥ IEDCLP>> TRIP
&
≥ U ED>def Insens-Zone
IE O FF
≥1 &
3V o ON M sheet 3
U ED>>inv State
& Angle Semisector
≥ U ED>>inv TRIP
3Vo
IE
3V o
I ED>>def State
&
≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>>inv State
CLP
A
&
≥ I ED>>inv
&
≥1
I ED>>def State
≥ IEDCLP>> &
≥ M∙I ED>def
≥1
U ED>>def State
I ED>>inv State
& &
≥ M∙U ED>def IE
≥ M∙I ED>>inv
≥1
3V o
U ED>>inv State CLP
IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv A
& A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ M∙U ED>>inv ≥ M∙IEDCLP>> &
U ED>>def State
&
≥ U ED>>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>>inv
&
≥ U ED>>inv
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Second element logic diagram (IED>>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS2-module.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 160

UE
Trip sector
(toward I ED>>def State Mode67N 3Votype67N
Half
& CLP IE 3V o
I∙cos U EC
Characteristic axis I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>def
≥1
Half A =“OFF” M
I ED>>inv State Insens-Zone
ΦE o ΦEC A O FF
&
IE IE ≥ M∙threshold
A =“ON” ON
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>inv
No trip sector
(toward busbar) A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>> 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF
U ED>>def State
TRIP
& IE
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0 Insens-Zone
≥ U ED>>def
&
IE O FF
≥1 P sheet 3
3V o ON
U ED>>inv State
Angle Semisector
& 3 V o Insens-Zone ON
≥ U ED>>inv 3Vo
TRIP
3Vo IE
IE &
I ED>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>>inv State
CLP
A
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>inv
&
≥1
I ED>>def State
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>> &

I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>def
≥1
U ED>>def State I ED>>inv State &
& &
IE A
≥ M∙U ED>>def I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>inv A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥1 A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
U ED>>inv State IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv
&
≥ M∙U ED>>inv I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>
U ED>>def State
&
≥ U ED>>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>>inv
&
≥ U ED>>inv
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Second element logic diagram (IED>>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4) 67NS2-proiezione.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 161

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
IE 3Vo
I∙cos U EC
M
Insens-Zone
OFF
ON≡Enable IED>> directional earth fault

IED>> Enable Start IED>>
D =“modulo” IED>>ST-K
M IED>>ST-L
(sheet 1) Mode67N
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
D D
C C t ED>>inv
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione” I ED>> Curve t ED>>RES
t ED>>def
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2) t ED>>RES
A & t ED>>def/inv
T 0 0 T IED>>TR-K
B T 0 IE>>TR-L
RESET
A
Trip IED>>
B
I ED>>def State
&
≥ I ED>>def
IE
IEDCLP>>def
≥ I EDCLP >>def Non-directional

(from 74VT)
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>>
A
t CLP>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
T 0 C
IEDCLP>>Mode
IED>> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

74VTint/ext67N
74VT
OFF
Trip IED>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED>> BF towards BF logic
I ED>>BF
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Second element logic diagram (IED>>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS2-3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 162

Start IED>>
&
IED>>BLK1 Trip IED> > & BLK1IED>>
&
& BLK4IN IED>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>>
Block1

IED>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input
TRIPPING M ATRIX
ON IPh/IE
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
I> Block2 OUT

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

≥1
IED>>BLK2OUT B = ON IPh
t F-IE A D = ON IE
≥1
& B BLOUT1
Start IED>> IED>> Block2 OUT T 0 Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>>BLK4
ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
t FI-Iph A
DthAL1 Block4 I/O
T 0 “0” B
IED>>BLK4 B = OFF IPD>Block4 I/O
“0”
67NS2_BL-diagram.ai
IED> Block4 I/O IED>> Block4 OUT

Start IED>> IPD>>>>Block4 I/O
IED>>> Block4 I/O
Block4
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IED>>) (sheet 4 of 4)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 163
I ED>>>def State
Mode67N 3Votype67N
&
I UE
IE 3Vo ≥ I ED>>>def
I∙cos U EC
IE IEDCLP>>>def
M CLP
Insens-Zone A
OFF A =“OFF” A =“ON”
ON ≥ M∙threshold ≥ IEDCLP>>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP
TRIP
U ED>>>def State Insens-Zone

IE O FF
& &
3V o ON M sheet 3
≥ U ED>>>def
Angle Semisector
3Vo
IE ΦE inside trip sector TRIP
IE
3V o
I ED>>>def State
&
≥ I ED>>>def
IE IEDCLP>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ IEDCLP>>>def
&
≥1
U ED>>>def State
&
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>def U ED>>>def State
&
3Vo &
≥ M∙U ED>>>def
I ED>>>def State
&
≥ M∙I ED>>>def
IE IEDCLP>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙IEDCLP>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Third element logic diagram (IED>>>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS3-module.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 164

UE
U EC
Trip sector
(toward Mode67N 3Votype67N
Half
operating sector Characteristic angle
I UE
IE 3V o
Characteristic axis I∙cos U EC
Half M
I ED threshold operating sector Insens-Zone
ΦE o ΦEC
IE O FF
No trip sector
(toward busbar)
I ED>>>def State
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>>def
IE
IEDCLP>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>>def 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF
TRIP
IE Insens-Zone
U ED>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
IE O FF
& P sheet 3
3V o ON
≥ U ED>>>def
Angle Semisector 3 V o Insens-Zone ON
3Vo TRIP
IE
3Vo
IE &
I ED>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥I ED>>>def
IE IEDCLP>>>def CLP
A
I E ∙cosϕ ≥I EDCLP>>>def &
≥1
I ED>>>def State
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>>def
IE IEDCLP>>>def &
A
U ED>>>def State
I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I EDCLP>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
& A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>def
U ED>>>def State
&
3Vo
≥ U ED>>>def
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Third element logic diagram (IED>>>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4) 67NS3-proiezione.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 165

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
IE 3Vo
I∙cos U EC
M Start IED>>>
Insens-Zone
OFF IED>>>ST-K
ON ≥ M∙threshold IED>>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
t ED>>>RES
t ED>>>def
ON≡Enable IED>>> directional earth fault
IED>>> Enable t ED>>>RES
& t ED>>>def
0 T IED>>>TR-K
T 0 IE>>>TR-L
D =“modulo”
M RESET
(sheet 1)
Trip IED>>>
Mode67N
D D
A A
C C
B B
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione”
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2)
I ED>>>def State
&
≥ I ED>>>def
IE
Non-directional
IEDCLP>>>def (from 74VT)
≥ I EDCLP >>>def
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >>>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>>>
A
t CLP>>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
T 0 C
IEDCLP>>>Mode
IED>>> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

74VTint/ext67N
74VT
OFF
Trip IED>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED>>> BF towards BF logic
I ED>>>BF
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Third element logic diagram (IED>>>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS3-3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 166

Start IED>>>
&
IED>>>BLK1 Trip IED> >> & BLK1IED>>>
&
& BLK4IN IED>>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>>>
Block1

IED>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input
TRIPPING M ATRIX
ON IPh/IE
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx) Block2 input
I> Block2 OUT

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

≥1
IED>>>BLK2OUT B = ON IPh
t F-IE A D = ON IE
≥1
& B BLOUT1
Start IED>>> IED>> Block2 OUT T 0 Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>>>BLK4
ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
t FI-Iph A
DthAL1 Block4 I/O
T 0 “0” B
IED>>>BLK4 B = OFF IPD>Block4 I/O
“0”
67NS3_BL-diagram.ai
IED> Block4 I/O IED>>> Block4 OUT

Start IED>>> IPD>>>>Block4 I/O
IED>>> Block4 I/O
Block4
Ground directional overcurrent(67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IED>>>) (sheet 4 of 4)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 167
I ED>>>>def State
Mode67N 3Votype67N
&
I UE
IE 3Vo ≥ I ED>>>>def
I∙cos U EC
IE IEDCLP>>>>def
M CLP
Insens-Zone A
OFF A =“OFF” A =“ON”
ON ≥ M∙threshold ≥ IEDCLP>>>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP
TRIP
U ED>>>>def State Insens-Zone

IE O FF
& &
3V o ON M sheet 3
≥ U ED>>>>def
Angle Semisector
3Vo
IE ΦE inside trip sector TRIP
IE
3V o
I ED>>>>def State
&
≥ I ED>>>>def
IE IEDCLP>>>>def CLP
A
≥ IEDCLP>>>>def
&
≥1
U ED>>>>def State
&
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>>def U ED>>>>def State
&
3Vo &
≥ U ED>>>>def
I ED>>>>def State
&
≥ M∙I ED>>>>def
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙IEDCLP>>>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Fourth element logic diagram (IED>>>>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS4-module.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 168

UE
Trip sector
(toward line) Mode67N 3Votype67N
Half
IE 3V o
I∙cos U EC
Characteristic axis
Half M
Insens-Zone
ΦE o ΦEC
O FF
IE
No trip sector
(toward busbar)
I ED>>>>def State
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>>>def
IE
IEDCLP>>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>>>def 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF
TRIP
IE Insens-Zone
U ED>>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
IE O FF
& P sheet 3
3V o ON
≥ U ED>>>>def
Angle Semisector
3Vo TRIP
IE
3Vo
IE &
I ED>>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥I ED>>>>def
A
I E ∙cosϕ ≥I EDCLP>>>>def &
≥1
I ED>>>>def State
&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>>>def
IE IEDCLP>>>>def &
A
U ED>>>>def State
I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I EDCLP>>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
& A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>>def
U ED>>>>def State
&
3Vo
≥ U ED>>>>def
67NS4-proiezione.ai
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Fourth element logic diagram (IED>>>>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 169

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
IE 3Vo
I∙cos U EC
M Start IED>>>>
Insens-Zone
OFF IED>>>>ST-K
ON ≥ M∙threshold IED>>>>ST-L
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
t ED>>>>RES
t ED>>>>def
ON≡Enable IED>>>> directional earth fault
IED>>>> Enable t ED>>>>RES
& t ED>>>>def
0 T IED>>>>TR-K
T 0 IE>>>>TR-L
D =“modulo”
M RESET
(sheet 1)
Trip IED>>>>
Mode67N
D D
A A
C C
B B
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione”
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2)
I ED>>>>def State
&
≥ I ED>>>>def
IE
Non-directional
IEDCLP>>>>def (from 74VT)
≥ I EDCLP >>>>def
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >>>>
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>>>>
A
t CLP>>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
T 0 C
IEDCLP>>>>Mode
IED>>>> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

74VTint/ext67N
74VT
OFF
Trip IED>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED>>>> BF towards BF logic
I ED>>>>BF
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Fourth element logic diagram (IED>>>>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS4-3.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 170

Start IED>>>>
&
IED>>>>BLK1 Trip IED>> >> & BLK1IED>>>>
&
& BLK4IN IED>>>>


n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>>>>
Block1

IED>>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input
TRIPPING M ATRIX
ON IPh/IE
(LED+REL AYS)
Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
I> Block2 OUT

TRIPPING M ATRIX

(LED+REL AYS)

≥1
IED>>>>BLK2OUT B = ON IPh
t F-IE A D = ON IE
≥1
& B BLOUT1
Start IED>>>> IED>> Block2 OUT T 0 Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
Block2 output

I>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph B = OFF IPD>>>>BLK4
ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
t FI-Iph A
DthAL1 Block4 I/O
T 0 “0” B
IED>>>>BLK4 B = OFF IPD>Block4 I/O
“0”
67NS4_BL-diagram.ai
IED> Block4 I/O IED>>>> Block4 OUT

Start IED>>>> IPD>>>>Block4 I/O
IED>>> Block4 I/O
Block4
Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the fourth element (IED>>>>) (sheet 4 of 4)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 171
Setting notes (67N)
KTAO = 100A/1A=100 fn = 50 Hz
power Grid
NA60
10000/√3 V
KTV = = 100·√3
IEn = 1 A UEn = 100 V 100/3 V
67N
Appl-67N.ai

With reference to the figure above, suppose you want to adjust the directional earth fault protection
as a protection against phase to ground fault of a neutral isolated network as follows:
• Residual current threshold: 5 A primary
• Residual voltage: 1732 V primary
• Trip sector: 0° - 180° lags the residual voltage (varmetric)
• Operate time: 0,10 s
• Operating mode: module, definite time characteristic.
The adjustment is determined as follows:
value , multiplied for √3 and divided by the VT ratio:
UEn = Ung / KTV = =(10000·√3)/[(10000/√3)/100/3] = (10000·√3)/(100·√3) = 100 V
You must select the operating mode 67 N “module”, the type of measurement of residual voltage as
“measured“ then disable the” zone of insensitivity “
The parameters are available indide the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N
\ Common configuration menu:
Mode67N = I
3V0Type67N = UE
Insens-Zone= OFF
The settings of any of the four elements must be scheduled in the current nominal value of the re-
sidual current IEn and the residual voltage rating of the relay UEn with definite time characteristic,
then they are calculated with the general formula :
IED >, IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>> = desired trip residual current (primary ampere) /(IEn·KTAO)
UED >, UED >>, UED >>>, UED >>>> = desired residual voltage (primary volt) /(UEn·KVT ), so:
IED > = 5 /(1·100/1) = 0.05 p.u. IEn
UED > = desired residual voltage (primary volt) / (UEn · KTV ) = 1732 / (100 · 100 · √3) = 0.1UEn
The characteristic curve must be set as definite time by setting DEFINITE the IED> curve param-
eter inside the Set \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N \ IED> Element \ Setpoints menu.[1]
IED>def-UE>def
0.050 IEn (residual current threshold)
0.100 UEn (residual voltage threshold)
90 gr (characteristic angle)
90 gr (trip half sector, corresponding to 0...180°)
The operate time must be set as:

tED>def = 0.10 s
Note 1 The element must be enabled: IED> Enable = ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N \ IED> Ele-
ment \ Setpoints and State = ON parameter concerning the IED>def parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N \ IED> Element \ Definite time menu
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 172
KTAO = 100A/1A=100 20000 / 3 V

KTV = = 200
100 / 3 V Isolated neutral
power Grid
fn = 50Hz
Ung = 20 kV NA60
Un = 100 V
IEn = 1 A UECn = Un · √3 =173 V
67N
Appl-67N-thysensor.ai
With reference to the figure above, suppose you want to adjust the directional earth fault protection
as a protection against phase to ground fault of a neutral isolated network as follows:
• Residual current threshold: 5 A primary
• residual voltage threshold equal to 10% of the residual voltage in the presence of phase ground
fault.
• Trip sector: 0° - 180° lags the residual voltage (varmetric)
• tempo di intervento 0,10 s
• Operate time: 0,10 s
• Operating mode: module, definite time characteristic.
For the setting purposes the NA60 - ThySensor pair is equivalent to a NA60 with Un = 100 V traditional
VT with ratio KTV = (20000 / √3) / (100 / √3) = 200.
The adjustment is determined as follows:

The nominal voltage (Un) of the voltage input must be set to the grid phase nominal voltage value,
divided by the VT ratio
Un = Ung / KTV = 20000 / (20000/√3)/(100/√3) = 20000 / 200 = 100 V
value, multiplied for √3 and divided by the VT ratio:
Un = Ung / KTV = 20000 / (20000/√3)/(100/√3) = 20000 / 200 = 100 V
The computed residual voltage UECn must be set to the relay nominal voltage multiplied for √3, so:
UECn = computed residual voltage of relay in volt · √3 = 100 · √3 = 173 V
The residual voltage when a phase-ground fault arises is given by:
UEg = Ung · √3 = 20000·√3 = 34641 V
then the voltage threshold is 3464 V
You must select the operating mode 67 N “module”, the type of measurement of residual voltage as
“measured“ then disable the” zone of insensitivity “
The parameters are available indide the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N
\ Common configuration menu:
Mode67N = I
3V0Type67N = UE
Insens-Zone= OFF
The settings of any of the four elements must be scheduled in the current nominal value of the re-
sidual current IEn and the residual voltage rating of the relay UEn with definite time characteristic,
then they are calculated with the general formula :
IED >, IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>> = desired residual current (primary ampere) / (IEn·KTAO)
UED >, UED >>, UED >>>, UED >>>> = desired minimum residual voltage (primary volt) /(UEn·KVT ), so:
IED > = 5 /(1·100/1) = 0.05 p.u. IEn

UED > = desired minimum residual voltage (primary volt) / (UECn · KTV ) = 3464 / (173 · 200) = 0.1UEn
The characteristic curve must be set as definite time by setting DEFINITE the IED> curve param-
eter inside the Set \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N \ IED> Element \ Setpoints menu.[1]
IED>def-UE>def
0.050 IEn (residual current threshold)
0.100 UEn (residual voltage threshold)
90 gr (characteristic angle)
90 gr (trip half sector, corresponding to 0...180°)
The operate time must be set as:

tED>def = 0.10 s
Note 1 The element must be enabled: IED> Enable = ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N \ IED> Ele-
ment \ Setpoints and State = ON parameter concerning the IED>def parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N \ IED> Element \ Definite time menu
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 173
Preface
When the protection issues a trip command but, because an anomaly, the circuit breaker cannot
open, the breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers.
The breaker failure function may be started by internal protective function (if associated with BF) or
by external protections.
The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) Start and trip of internal protective elements (trip of elements matched with BF protection) or, trip
of external protections acquired by means binary input, if enabled;
B) The CB is closed (the CB state may be acquired by means two binary inputs connected to the
auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b) or the fundamental component of at least one phase current
IL1, IL2 , IL3 is greater than the IBF> adjustable threshold or the fundamental component of the
residual current IE is greater than the IEBF> adjustable threshold.
The breaker failure protection reliability is improved by means of the CB position control or phase
or residuaI current measure; the trip can arise also for wrong auxiliary contacts state (if the current
is greater than the adjustable threshold ) or for trip of external protections (frequency, voltage,..)
without current (with CB closed information supplied from state of auxiliary contacts).
If the information concerning the CB position is not achievable (for instance the auxiliary contacts
are unavailable), such control must be disabled.
If both conditions are held along the set operate time t BF (H)>, the BF element trips at deadline, vice
versa the timer is cleared and the function is restored.
To the purpose to restore the BF element as quickly as possible, with start of the same protection
(see A condition), additionally to the trip of some internal protections, their starts are required (start
reset is faster than trip reset).
The element may be enabled or disabled by setting ON the BF Enable parameter available inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF menu.
BF Enable I BF > I EBF > t BF
I L1. . . I L3
Tr ip B F
IE S t ar t B F
52a
52b
Tr ip P ro t E x t
BF-BLK1 Block1
& BL K1 B F
Block1
General logic diagram of the breaker failure element - BF all-FBF.ai
All the IBF >, IEBF > and t BF parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B; they are avail-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF menu.
BF start from Circuit breaker

If the CB Input parameter (BF Start from circuit breaker) is set to ON, and two binary inputs are
designed for acquire the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts[1], the control of the CB position is enabled. If
the information concerning the CB position is not available, such control must be disabled by setting
OFF the CB Input parameter. The parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker
failure-BF menu, the 52a and 52b function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside
Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
To enable the breaker failure protection to operate with trips coming from external protections, one
binary input must be designed to acquire the relative contacts. The TripProtExt function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(2...) menus (IN1 or IN...
matching).
If the BF-BLK1 parameter (BF logical block) is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical
block (Block1), the breaker failure protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The
trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[2] The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF
menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \
Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
Note 1 Both auxiliary contact state 52a and 52b must be acquired (two binary inputs are required) with Fw version previous to 1.60; with later versions,
giving up an inconsistency occurs, one logical input for the acquisition of a contact (52nd or 52b ) may suffice
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 174
I BF >
I L1
I L2 Start IBF>
I L3 Max I L1 ...I L3 ≥ I BF >
I EBF > Start BF

Start IEBF>
IE ≥1 Start BF
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I E ≥ I BF > &
(LED+REL AYS)
CB Input t BF
52a Logic INx t ON INx t OFF “0” t BF Trip BF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF T 0
52a RESET
n.o. T 0 0 T CB Input OFF
Binary input INx Trip BF
ON≡CB Closed CB Input ON
&
52b Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. 52b
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip ProtExt Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1 Trip Int/Ext
Binary input INx
Trip int-prot
Start BF
Block1 enable (ON≡Enable) &
BF-BLK1 Trip BF & BLK1 BF
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Logic diagram concerning the breaker failure element -BF Fun-BF_Pro-n.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 175

4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING
Logical block - BLOCK1
To the purpose to block off the trip of one protection element, the logical block function (Block1) may
be matched with binary inputs.[1]
The binary-matching may be set inside the Inputs submenu; to the purpose the Block1 parameter
must be selected for INx matching (x=1, 2)
A protective element, where the logical block is enabled, is blocked off whenever the given input is
ON.
For a given protective element, the logical block state is reading available (ThyVisor and communi-
cation interfaces); it is ON the following condition are at the same time observed:
• Binary input ON,
• Element start ON,
• Element Trip OFF.
Generic protective element Start
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Threshold
Operate time
Input Measure Operate time

Trip
T 0
RESET
Start
&
Customized Block1 info
Trip & BLK1xxx
xxxBLK1
&

Block1 info (internal state)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
General logic diagram of the logic block - Block1 Blocco_L.ai
The logical block it is not liable for any inhibition time-out, so the protective element is disabled for
the whole time when the input is ON.[2]
Start
Operate time
Trip
Block1 (input)
Block1 (output)
t
Logic block timers - Block1 Timers-Block1.ai
Activation of any binary input assigned to logic block (Block1) function effects a block of all the
CAUTION protective elements where the logic block is enabled
Note 1 In the following treatment, the logical block is defined as “Logical block” or “Block1”
Note 2 The Block 1 signal forces a timer reset
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 176
U<BLK1 27 element
U<<BLK1 27 element
DthAL1BLK1 49 element
DthAL2BLK1 49 element
DthBLK1 49 element
I>BLK1 50-51 element
I>>BLK1 50-51 element
I>>>BLK1 50-51 element
IE>BLK1 50N-51N element
IE>>BLK11 50N-51N element
Reset timers IE>>>BLK1 50N-51N1 element

(ON≡element inhibition) U>BLK1 59 element
Start U>>BLK1 59 element
Enable (ON≡Enable) & Customized Block1 info
xxxBLK1 Trip & UE>BLK1 59N element
&
UE>>BLK1 59N element
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF IPD>BLK1 67 element
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF IPD>>BLK1 67 element
n.o. T 0 0 T
IPD>>>BLK1 67 element
Binary input INx
IPD>>>>BLK1 67 element
IED>BLK1 67N element
IED>>BLK1 67N element
IED>>>BLK1 67N element
IED>>>>BLK1 67N element
74TCSBLK1 74TCS element
BFLK1 BF element
74VTLK1 74VT element
S<BLK1 74CT element
Block1 info
Block1 (internal state)
Logic diagram concerning the logic block element -Block1 Block1_L.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 177

Selective block -BLOCK2
Preface
The logic selectivity function has been developed to the purpose to reduce the clearing times for
faults closes to the source.
The output blocking circuits of one or several Pro_N relays, shunted together, must be connected
to the input blocking circuit of the protection relay, which is installed upwards in the electric plant.
The output circuit works as a simple contact, whose condition is detected by the input circuit of the
upwards protection relay.
The logic selectivity function can be realized through any combination of the following I/O circuits:
• One committed pilot wire input BLIN1...ON Iph, ON...Iph/IE, ON...IE.
• One committed pilot wire output BLOUT1...ON Iph, ON...Iph/IE, ON...IE.
• One or more than one independent binary inputs programmed with Block2 Iph, Block2 Iph/IE
or Block2 IE.
• One or more than one independent output relays programmed with BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE-K or BLK2OUT-IE-K.
In reference to the following schematic diagram, the some protection functions of the relay placed
on the feeder may be blocked by downstream protective relays.
TRIP
BLOUT1 Pro_N
TRIP TRIP
BLIN1
BLIN1 BLOUT1 Pro_N BLIN1 BLOUT1 Pro_N
TRIP
Pro_N
INx=Blocco selettivo Iph
TRIP
Any device
BLK2OUT-Iph-K
Logic selectivity logica_acc.ai
Input selective block

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1
The input is a polarized wet type powered by internal isolated supply; it must be drive by an output
block signal coming from a Pro-N device or by a free voltage contact.
WARNING Never connect power to the block input circuit; the electronic circuit can be demaged !
The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria by phase elements (Block2
Iph), by earth elements (Block2 IE) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) when the input
BLIN1 is active. The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the
ModeBLIN1 parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block
IN menus.
Use of binary inputs

If the xxBLK2IN parameters (enable) are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective
block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph), by earth elements
(Block2 IE) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE), according the selectivity block criteria,
when the input (IN1 and/or INx) is active.
The Block2 Iph, Block2 IE and Block2 Iph/IE matching must be assigned to the selected binary
inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input 1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input x menus.
When a binary input is programmed for selective block input, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and
INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero; the Logic parameters (ON/OFF) must be programmed
in the same way of the related output relay connected with-it.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 178

Operation
For any protective element, three main conditions can arise:
A) Start = OFF: the element is at rest (no trip) regardless of the input/output blocks.
B) Start = ON: the element trips if no selective block input becomes active during the operate time.
C) Start = ON: if the selective block input (BLIN1 and/or binary input) becomes active, the element
goes in selective block state wherein the operate timer is forced to reset, so the element cannot
trip. After an adjustable time t B-Iph (common for phase protection elements) or t B-IE (common for
earth protection elements), the selective block input is disregarded and the operate timer can
start again. Information about t B-Iph and or t B-IE expired is available for reading (tB timeout data
inside Read \ Selective block - BLOCK2 \ Block2 input menu) and can drive an output relay and
or a LED (tB-K and or tB-K parameters inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block - BLOCK2 \
Selective block IN submenu).
Start I>
&
Trip I>
Block2 input enable (I> element)
I>BLK2IN & BLK2IN I>
(ON≡Enable) &
Start xx
&
Trip xx
Block2 input enable (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, elements)
xxBLK2IN & BLK2IN xx
&
PulseBLIN1
Permanently “ON”
Shorted BLIN1
Pilot wire
T 0 Diagnostic No pulses
Breaked BLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
ModeBLIN1
OFF Pulse BLIN1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
BLIN1 ON IPh
ON IPh/IE
ON IE
Pilot wire input Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

Block2 IPh/IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

Block2 IE
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Logic diagram concerning the selective block intput - Block2 input Block2-in-diagram.ai
With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t B-Iph and t B-IE timers may be used to have a backup protection
available against pilot wire short circuit.[1]
The t B-Iph and/or t B-IE timers must be adjusted according the following rule (example for t B-Iph):
t B-Iph = t F v + et + es
where t F v is the value of block output timer related to the downstream relay (example t F-Iph), et is a
chronometric selectivity margin to apply in comparison to the t B-Iph time related to the downstream
relay (does not take into account if such margin has been considered for the t F-Iph setting), es is a
safety margin. The chronometric selectivity applied among the t B-x times of the relays in accelerated
logic system allows to avoid more the contemporary circuit breaker opening after the clearing of a
fault in a line of concomitant plant to the short-circuit of the pilot wires concerning the same line.
Note 1 In the absence of suitable provisions, a short circuit on a pilot wire causes the block of the receiving relay, so a possible fault (contemporary or
following) inside the protected zone, cannot be cleared that being the case the protective relay blocked.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 179
To enable the selectivity logic input for a generic xx element, the xxBLK2IN parameters must be
set to ON inside the Set \ Parametri di configurazione A (o B) \ xxx \ Setpoints menus concerning all
element where the selective block is available, eg:
I>BLK2IN inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu.
INPUT BLOCK
(binary input and/or BLIN1)
BLIN2IN-Iph/BLIN2IN-IE
t B-Iph/t B-IE
tB timeout
t
tB timer TB-timer.ai
Output selective block

Use of output relays
If the xxBLK2OUT, xxBLK2OUT and/or xxBLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a
output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase
elements (BLK2OUT-Iph), by ground elements (BLK2OUT-IE) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE), whenever the given start is active.
The BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays must be set in-
side the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu; the same for ad-
dressing the LED indicators (BLK2OUT2-Iph-L, BLK2OUT2-IE-L and BLK2OUT2-Iph/IE_L).
When output relays are programmed for selective block output, the t TR time delays must reset to
zero; the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays submenu) and
the Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way of the
related binary input connected with-it.
Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1

The output is a dry static relay.
The information about phase (ON IPh), earth (ON IE), or phase+earth (ON IPh/IE) concerning the
sending block out signal may be select by means of the ModeBLOUT1 parameter inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.
The parameters can be set separately for A and B profiles.
Operation
The selective block outputs go ON at the same time of the xx element start; they hold steady (even
if the start reset to zero) for along the t F-IPh, t F-IE and t F-IPh/IE adjustable times for phase, earth and
phase+earth functions.
The timers starts when one or more selective block function goes ON; when a timer expires, the
selective block outputs are disregarded (even if the start holds steady).
The t F-IPh and t F-IE counters start when the output selective block becomes active. When the coun-
ters expire the block selective output is forced off (despite the start xxx remain active).
If the t F-IPh, t F-IE e t F-IPh/IE timers are cleared the selective block output state is freeze up to the start
xxx remain active.
With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t F-IPh, t F-IE e t F-IPh/IE timers may be used to provide a backup
protection against breaker failure inside a selectivity logic system, as well as to hold blocked up-
stream protective relays up after the fault is cleared with CB opening to provide solution against
unwanted trips because of a larger reset time compared with the downstream relay (the selectivity
will be lost).
Start xx
(internal elements)
BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t
t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE
tF timers TF-timer.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 180

Start I> ST-Iph BLK2
I> Block2 OUT
Block2 output &
I>> Block2 OUT
I>BLK2OUT BLK2OUT-Iph
(ON≡Enable) I>>> Block2 OUT
t F-IPh
DthAL1 Block2 OUT
Start xx
DthAL2 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-K
&
TRIPPING M ATRIX
Dth Block2 OUT ≥1 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
xxBLK2OUT
IPD>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
IPD>>Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE-K
IPD>>>Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
Start IPD>>>> BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
IPD>>>>Block2 OUT
Block2 output & t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
I PD>>>>BLK2OUT ≥1
(ON≡Enable) 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

Start IE >>> ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE >>> Block2 OUT
Block2 output & IED> Block2 OUT t F-IE A D = ON IE
IE>>>BLK2OUT ≥1 B BLOUT1
(ON≡Enable) IED>> Block2 OUT 0 T
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
IED>>>> Block2 OUT D
Pilot wire output
ST-IE BLK2
Logic diagram concerning the selective block output - Block2 output Block2-diagram.ai
With traditional selective logic systems, in the absence of suitable cares, the event of a circuit
breaker failure causes the block of the receiving relays situated upstream the circuit breaker, so the
fault cannot be cleared.
When using the Pro-N devices inside the selective logic systems, the answer to the circuit breaker
failure problem can be solved by means of, (as well as the BF-Breaker Failure element) or by means
of a threshold adjusted for time selectivity, through use of the output block reset timer too with the
intent that avoid permanently block of all upstream relays by downstream block signals (the only one
unblocked relays deals to the fault breaker).
The t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE timers must be adjusted according the following rule (example for t F-Iph):
t F-Iph = t + TAP + trip + et + es
where t is the larger phase protection operate time, TAP is the circuit breaker operate time (with arc
extinction), trip is the larger reset time of all protective relays inside the selective logic system, et is
an potential selectivity margin relative to the t F-x time of the downstream relays, es is a safety margin
need to include timers errors (tolerances).
Diagnostic
To guarantee maximum fail-safety, the relay performs a run time monitoring for pilot wire continuity
and pilot wire shorting.[1]
Exactly the output blocking circuit periodically produces a pulse, having a small enough width in
order to be ignored as an effective blocking signal by the input blocking circuit of the upstream
protection, but suitable to prove the continuity of the pilot wire.
Furthermore a permanent activation (or better, with a duration longer than a preset time) of the
blocking signal is identified, as a warning for a possible short circuit in the pilot wire or in the output
circuit of the downstream protection.
Permanently “ON”
Pilot wire Shorted BLIN
Pulse BLIN1 T 0 Diagnostic No pulses

Breaked BLIN
TRIPPING M ATRIX
BLOUT1
(LED+REL AYS)
BLIN1
BLOCK OUT Pilot wire output Pilot wire link
≥1 BLOCK IN
Pulse Pulse BLIN1
generator Pilot wire input
Pulse BLOUT1 Pulse BLOUT1
The periodic pulses that are sent by output circuit may be enabled or disabled by means the Pulse-
BLOUT1 parameter available inside the Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic menu; with OFF setting the
pulses are disabled.[2]
If no pulses are received inside an adjustable time window at the selective block input circuit, a
break pilot wire alarm is issued; the information is available for reading (Breaked BLIN1 data inside
Read \ Pilot wire diagnostic submenu) and can drive an output relay and or a LED (PulseBLIN-K
and or a PulseBLIN-L parameters inside Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic submenu).
Note 1 Full diagnostic of pilot wires is only available when committed pilot wire input/outputs are employed
Note 2 When several outputs are parallel linked the pulse emission must be enabled inside one device only, sooner inside the outermost device
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 181
The control window may be programmed for OFF (no control) - 0.1 -1 - 5 - 10 - 60 - 120 s; the
Pulse BLIN1 parameter is available inside the Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic menu; with OFF setting of
the the PulseBLIN1 parameter the pulse control is disabled.
The same setting must be for input and output (PulseBLIN1 and PulseBLOUT1).
In the following example the output pulses must be enabled inside the device B only (2nd logic se-
lectivity level) and D (1st logic selectivity level).
2nd logic selectivity level 1st logic selectivity level

2
CB2
1
TRIP
BLOUT1 B
CB1 Pro_N
CB3 CB4
LOAD
TRIP TRIP
BLIN1
TRIP BLIN1 BLOUT1 C BLIN1 BLOUT1 D
A
Pro_N Pro_N
Pro_N
Logic selectivity logica_acc-esempio.ai
Setting example
In reference to the above shown schematic diagram, the logic selectivity is performed by means of
the dedicated I/O for the short circuit elements of A, B and C protective relays, so that if a fault arises
in (2), the open order or circuit breaker CB2 is issued and no trip is issued by A device.
A command must be issued for the main circuit breaker CB1 by the A relay with a fault in (1).
A Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.5 In with operate time to 0.10 s blocked by start of B and/or C
protection.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.5 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• PulseBLOUT1 = OFF
• PulseBLIN1 = 1 s
• I>>BLK2IN = ON
• I>>BLK2OUT = OFF
• t B-IPh = 0.30 s
B Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.0 In with operate time to 0.10 s with emission of block output
toward A protection relay.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.0 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• I>>BLK2IN = OFF
• I>>BLK2OUT = ON
• PulseBLIN1 = OFF
• PulseBLOUT1 = 1 s
• t F-IPh = 0.25 s
C Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.0 In with operate time to 0.10 s with emission of block output
toward A device and block input from D protection relay.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.0 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• I>>BLK2IN = ON
• I>>BLK2OUT = ON
• PulseBLIN1 = 1 s
• PulseBLOUT1 = OFF
• t F-IPh = 0.25 s
• t B-IPh = 0.30 s
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 182

Internal selective block -BLOCK4
elements.
The internal selective block of one or more element may be enabled/disabled by means the Ixxx-
BLK4 parameters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following oper-
ating modes are available:
setting is avoided.
relays (Block2 input and Block2 output).
For any element the logic state of the internal output block and the trip state are defined by:
• Start threshold
• Internal selective logic block
according to the following table.
START threshold IxxxBK4=IN IxxxBLK4=OUT xxx TRIP threshold SELECTIVE BLOCK

xxx xxx threshold
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 within tFI-Iph 1 after the operate time 0
1 1 1 within tFI-Iph 1 0
• If the xxx threshold is started, regardless of the internal input and output, the element is always
OFF (no trip).
• If the xxx threshold start stay ON within the operating time and the internal input is OFF, when the
timer expires the trip goes ON.
• If the xxx threshold is started and the internal input is ON, the xxx threshold is blocked (the operat-
ing timer is forced to reset); the element is OFF (no trip).
The internal selective block output goes ON when the threshold is started and stays ON (despite the
start goes OFF) along an adjustable time tFI-Iph common for all phase elements 50-51-67 or tFI-IE com-
mon for all earth elements 50N-51N-67N.
The t FI-IPh and t FI-IE counters start when the output selective block becomes active; when the coun-
ters expire the internal block selective output is forced OFF (despite the start xxx remain active).
A = IN
I>BLK4 B = OFF
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4
“0” A
“0” B I> Block4 I/O
Start I> C I>> Block4 I/O
I>>> Block4 I/O
Block4 enable t FI-Iph A = IN
DthAL1 Block4 I/O
DthAL2 Block4 I/O
B = OFF xxBLK4
≥1 t FI-Iph xx Block4 OUT C = OUT Block4
Dth Block4 I/O A
0 T
IPD>Block4 I/O “0” B
xxBLK4 IPD>>Block4 I/O “0” C
A IPD>>>Block4 I/O
“0”
“0” B IPD>>>>Block4 I/O
Start xx C ≥1 Block4 OUT
IE > Block4 I/O
IE >> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
IE >>> Block4 I/O
A = IN IED> Block4 I/O t FI-IE
≥1
I ED>>>>BLK4 B = OFF IED>> Block4 I/O 0 T
C = OUT IED>>> Block4 I/O
“0” A
“0” B IED>>>> Block4 I/O
Start IED>>>> C ST-IE BLK4
Logic diagram concerning the output signals of the internal selective block function - Block4 Block4-in-out-diagram.ai
If the t FI-IPh, t FI-IE e t FI-IPh/IE timers are cleared the selective block output state is freeze up to the
start xxx remain active.
With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t FI-IPh, t FI-IE e t FI-IPh/IE timers may be used to have a backup pro-
tection available against breaker failure inside a selectivity logic system, as well as to hold blocked
upstream protective relay up to your own reset.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 183

As typical application an internal and external selective block can be used for protection of parallel
power transformers. On occurrence of a fault inside the transformer T2, the directional phase or
ground directional overcurrent element concerning the P2 relay trips to open the CB2. The 50 and
50N elements of both relays should trip if no grading margin is set in order to provide selectivity with
the directional elements. Thanks to internal (Block4) and external selective block (Block2) this grad-
ing margin can be avoided.
• The 50 and 50N element on the P1 relay are blocked by means of external selective block (Block2)
coming from P2.
• The 50 and 50N element on the P2 relay are blocked by means of internal selective block (Block4).
T1 T2
CB1 CB2
NA60
P1 P2 NA60
BLIN1 Block2 Iph/IE BLOUT1

TRIP
67 50 50 67
Block4 Block4
67N 50N 50N 67N
BLOUT1 Block2 Iph/IE BLIN1
Logic selectivity logica_block1.ai
With the following setting for P1 and P2 protection relay:

• I>>BLK4IN IN (I>> Internal selective block input)
• IPD>>BLK4IN OUT (IPD>> Internal selective block output)
• IE>>BLK4IN IN (IE>> Internal selective block input)
• IED>>BLK4IN OUT (IED>> Internal selective block output)
• IPD>>BLK2OUT ON (IPD>> External selective block output)
• IED>>BLK2OUT ON (IED>> External selective block output)
• I>>BLK2IN (I>> External selective block input)
• IE>>BLK2IN (IE>> External selective block input)
• ModeBLIN1 ON Iph/IE (BLIN1 Selective block operating mode)
• ModeBLOUT1 ON Iph/IE (BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode)
the time diagram of internal (Block4) and external (Block2) selective block concerning the phase and
residual overcurrent thresholds (I>> and IE>>) are shown in the following page.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 184

Start I>> (P2 relay)
Start IPD>> (P2 relay)

t FI-Iph
BLK4OUT (IPD>> internal block output of P2 relay)
BLK4IN I>> (I>> internal block input of P2 relay)

t F-Iph/IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE (P2 relay)
t PD>>
Trip IPD>> (P2 relay)
Trip I>> (P2 relay)
Start I>> (P1 relay)
Start IPD>> (P1 relay)
BLK4OUT (IPD>> internal block output of P1 relay)
BLK4IN I>> (I>> internal block input of P1 relay)
Trip IPD>> (P1 relay)
t B-Iph
BLK2IN-Iph (P1 relay)
Trip I>> (P1 relay)

t
Time diagram of internal (Block4) and external (Block2) selective block concerning phase overcurrent element blocking of the example
Start IE>> (P2 relay)
Start IED>> (P2 relay)

t FI-IE
BLK4OUT (IED>> internal block output of P2 relay)
BLK4IN IE>> (IE>> internal block input of P2 relay)

t F-Iph/IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE (P2 relay)
t ED>>
Trip IED>> (P2 relay)
Trip IE>> (P2 relay)
Start IE>> (P1 relay)
Start IED>> (P1 relay)
BLK4OUT (IED>> internal block output of P1 relay)
BLK4IN IE>> (IE>> internal block input of P1 relay)
Trip IED>> (P1 relay)
t B-IE
BLK2IN-IE (P1 relay)
Trip IE>> (P1 relay)

t
blk4-F50-51.ai
Time diagram of internal (Block4) and external (Block2) selective block concerning residual overcurrent element blocking of the example
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 185
Remote tripping
Preface
Some output relays may be programmed for remote trip function resulting from a command coming
from a binary input.
If a binary input is designed for remote trip acquisition, an output relay allocated to the same function
is triggered when the input (IN1 and/or IN2) is active.

The Remote trip matching must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs
\Binary input1 or Set \ Inputs \ Binary inputx menus.
When a binary input is programmed for remote trip acquisition, the IN1 tON, IN2 tON, IN1 tOFF
and IN2 tOFF time delays must be reset to zero; the Logic parameters (ON/OFF) must be pro-
grammed in the same way of the related circuit connected with-it.
The RemTrip-K matching must be assigned to the selected output relays inside the Set \ Remote
tripping submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators (RemTrip-L).
When output relays are programmed for remote tripping, the t TR time delays must reset to zero;
the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays submenu) and the
Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way of the related
binary input connected with-it.
All the parameters are common for A and B Profiles.
+UAUX
Remote trip
Remote trip
TRIPPING M ATRIX
Remote trip Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF RemTrip-K
n.o. T 0 0 T RemTrip-L
Binary input INx
-UAUX
Remote tripping logic diagram Fun-Remote-trip.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 186

Frequency tracking
Within the frequency range 45...55 Hz (fn = 50 Hz). or 54...63 Hz (fn = 60 Hz), a frequency tracking al-
gorithm adjusts the currents sampling frequency, so as to keep the number of samples in any given
period constant.
With 24 samples for periods the sampling rate is adjusted from 1.08 kHz with f = 45 Hz to 1.512 kHz with
f= 63 Hz
For a frequency step change the tracking response time is 0.1 Hz/s.
The frequency measure is based on the largest phase voltage or current.
• If the larger phase input current is lower than 25% In and the larger phase input voltage is lower
than 1.5% En the sampling frequency is fixed to fn (50 or 60 Hz).
• If the measured frequency is outside the locking range, the sampling frequency is fixed to the lower
or upper value (45 or 55 Hz with fn = 50 Hz, 54 or 63 Hz with fn = 63 Hz).
I L1
I L2
I L3 Max I L1...L3 > 0.25 I n
U L1
≥ Frequency tracking
U L2
U L3 Max U L1...L3 > 0.015 E n
Max I L1...L3 Nominal frequency f n = 50 Hz

Max U L1...L3
40 Hz 60 Hz Displayed value
45 Hz 55 Hz Locked frequency
0.25 I n - 1.5% E n
50 Hz (0 Hz) Locked frequency (Displayed value)
40 45 55 60 f (Hz)
Max I L1...L3 Nominal frequency f n = 60 Hz

Max U L1...L3
40 Hz 70 Hz Displayed value
54 Hz 63Hz Locked frequency
0.25 I n - 1.5% E n
60 Hz (0 Hz) Locked frequency (Displayed value)
40 54 63 70 f (Hz)
Frequency tracking IF.ai
All protective elements are always operative; accuracy is guaranteed inside the locked frequency
band.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 187

Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST
Preface
When a power transformer is energized, as well know an inrush current flow in the side that have
been energized with an amount and duration that depend by many factors which:
• Instantaneous value of the supply voltage at the time where the transformer is energized
• Transformer design, magnetization characteristic and size
• Residual flux
The maximum amount of the inrush current is produced by energizing the transformer at the zero
point of the voltage wave, when it increase or decrease with the residual flux respectively positive
or negative. Moreover the ratio between the maximum amount of the inrush current and the nominal
current of the transformer decrease if the size of transformer increase, whereas the duration of the
inrush current increase with the size of transformer.
Some types of instantaneous protections as overcurrent, residually connected ground fault and dif-
ferentials, are affected by this inrush current and their unwanted tripping can occur on transformer
energizing.
The second harmonic restraint is available to restraint any selected threshold of NA60 protective
relay:
• Thermal image - 49
• Phase overcurrent - 50/51
• Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N
• Directional phase overcurrent - 67
Moreover one or more output contacts may be allocated to the 2NDH-REST function in order to block
any external protection relays where second harmonic restraint is not available.

Each second harmonic component of phase currents (IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd) is compared with the
I2ndh> adjustable threshold.
When one or more currents overcome the setting threshold a start is issued.
The start may be employed to block-off one or more 50/51/50N/51N elements or to block-off external
protections by means output relays (this can be usefully used in order to restraint external protection
relays where second harmonic restraint is not available).
For the purpose to keep in block state the selected elements, an adjustable t 2ndh>RES reset delay is
provided.
ON≡Enable
I2ndh> Enable
Start I2ndh>
I 2ndh >
I L1-nd t 2ndh>RES
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1-nd ≥ I 2 ndh>
t 2ndh>RES I2ndh>ST-K
I L2-nd & I2ndh>ST-L
≥1 0 T
I L3-nd
Logic diagram concerning the second harmonic restraint function - 2NDH/REST 2NDH-REST-diagram.ai
The setting of I2ndh> and t2ndh>RES parameters are available inside the
Set\Profile A(B)\Second Harmonic Restraint menus.
The second harmonic element may be enabled or disabled; to enable it, the I2ndh> Enable param-
eter must be set to ON inside the Set\Profile A(B)\Second Harmonic Restraint menus.
All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
The output may be assigned to the selected I2ndh>-ST-K output relays inside the
Set\Profile A(B)\Second Harmonic Restraint submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators
(I2ndh>-ST-L).
When output relays are programmed for second harmonic element output, the t TR time delays must
reset to zero; the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set\Relays sub-
menu) and the Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way
of the related binary input connected with-it.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 188

Cold Load Pickup - CLP
Preface
CLP feature allows selected thresholds of phase and ground overcurrent protections to be changed
or blocked for a set time in order to overcome transient overcurrents.
The trigger of the CLP feature is the logical condition of circuit breaker closed, that Pro-N relay de-
tect by means of two digital inputs connected to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
When the circuit breaker closed condition is detected, the CLP timer set in the submenu of CLP func-
tion is initiated and, throughout the CLP set time:
• The threshold is blocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block.
• The threshold is changed to the value that is set if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
When CLP timer has elapsed, the threshold is unblocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block or the
threshold is revert back to the original value if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
Note that when the circuit breaker is open, the threshold is already blocked if CLP is set to ON
threshold block or the threshold is already changed to the value if CLP is set to ON threshold change:
this is useful in order to avoid unwanted tripping due to unblocked threshold or threshold with his
original value for cases where a delay of the circuit breaker closing happen, i.e. where the three
poles of the CB do not close at the same time or during long CB closing time.
Typical applications where the CLP feature may be useful are for overcurrent protections on feeders
where the circuit breaker closing starts air conditioning/heating loads after a long cooling time, mo-
tors or more generally momentary large loads.
The CLP may be also useful for instantaneous ground fault overcurrent protections on motors start-
ing, because it is likely that incorrect operation of the protection would occur on imbalance transient
secondary current due to asymmetric line CTs saturation.
Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the starting current, it may be necessary to block
operation of thresholds or raising his setting. Also a combination of both blocking some thresholds
and raising others may be adopted.
For each threshold the CLP function may be disabled (OFF), enabled with threshold blocking (ON-
Element blocking) or enabled with threshold change (ON-Change setting) by means the xx-
CLPx Mode parameter.
The operating mode and the relative activation time concerning each threshold of the 49, 50/51, 50N/51N,
67 and 67N elements are adjustable inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\xxx - xx \ xxx Element \Setpoints
menus.
Generic protec t iv e e le me n t
(Threshold outside CLP) Start Ixx
I xx
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Input STEADY STATE THRESHOLD t x x RES
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” Operate time
t x x RES
t xx
I C L P xx 0 T
T 0
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD ICLPxxMode RESET
A = ON - Change setting Trip Ixx
B = OFF
t C L P xx C = ON - Element blocking
A
t CLPxx B
≥1 CLP Ixx
C
2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable) T 0
Ixx2ndh-REST
& ≥1
Start I2ndh> Block1, Block2
CB State
CB OPEN CB OPEN
CB State (52a=OFF) CB CLOSED (52a=ON) (52a=OFF)
tCLPxx 0.1 s
Output tCLPxx
t
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD/ STEADY STATE TRANSIENT THRESHOLD/
BLOCK THRESHOLD/UNBLOCK BLOCK
Cold Load Pickup logic diagram - CLP CLP-diagram.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 189

Example: to change the first threshold of the definite time overcurrent element 50/51 within CLP dur-
ing a 0.1 s time interval:
• the ICLP> Mode parameter must be set as ON-Change setting,
• the tCLP> parameter must be adjusted to a wanted value (0.1 s) inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)\
Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Setpoints menu,
• The threshold within CLP parameter ICLP>def must be adjusted to a wanted value inside the
Set\Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Definite time menu.
CB position can be acquired by means one or two binary inputs; allocation of 52a and 52b func-
tions is available inside the Set\Inputs\Binary input1(x) menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 190

Preface
The CT monitoring function is employed to issue an alarm when secondary phase CTs and/or phase
input of the NA60 relay failure are detected.
Interruptions are detected by means of a symmetry criterion of the IL1, IL2 , IL3 input currents.
The symmetry factor is calculated comparing the minimum and maximum of the fundamental compo-
nents of the three phase currents (ILMIN / ILMAX ).

The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) (ILMIN / ILMAX ) < S< that is the symmetry factor is lower than the S< adjustable threshold;
B) ILMAX > I*
Where
I*: maximum phase current threshold
S<: element pickup value
t S<: operate time
If both conditions are filled over the t S< adjustable time an alarm is issued.
I LMIN
tgα=S<
NO TRIP
TRIP
α
I* I LMA X
Current asimmetry monitoring - 74CT char74CT.ai
The output may be assigned to the selected S<TR-K output relays inside the Set \ CT supervision-
74CT submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators S<TR-L.
If the S<-BLK1 parameter is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the
CT supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The trip timer is held in re-
set condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes down.[1] The S<-BLK1
parameter is available inside the Set \ CT supervision-74CT submenu.
All the parameters are common for A and B Profiles.
I L1 S< Trip S<

I L2
I LMIN
I L3 I LMIN
ts <
TRIPPING M ATRIX
I LMAX I LMIN /I LMAX < S<

(LED+REL AYS)
t S< S<TR-K
&
I* T 0 S<TR-L
RESET
I LMAX Start I*
I LMAX >I*
Block1 input (ON≡Block)

S<BLK1 & BLK1 S<
&

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Enable (ON≡Enable)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
CT monitoring logic diagram - 74CT Fun-74CT.ai
section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 191
Preface
The VT monitoring function is employed to issue an alarm when secondary phase VTs and/or phase
input of the NVA100 relay failure are detected; typical faults are internal faults, fuse failure, fault on the
interconnecting wires or MCB tripping. The function gives an alarm indication and change automati-
cally all the protection elements (27, 67 e 67N) that can output misoperations when a voltage failure is
detected.
The following VTs anomalies are detected:
• Loss of one or two phase voltages
• Loss of all three phase voltages
• No voltage detected upon energisation.
• Loss of one or two phase voltages
This fault is detected when a negative sequence voltage without presence of negative sequence
current is detected. When the negative sequence voltage exceeds the adjustable threshold (U 2VT>)
and the negative sequence current is lower than an adjustable threshold (I 2VT>), an output relay
and/or LED can be activated.
The negative sequence current is calculated according the following:
I 2 = (I∙L1+e-j120°∙
I L2+e+j120°∙
I L3)/3
Similarly the negative sequence voltage is calculated according the following:
U 2 = (U∙ L1+e-j120°U∙ L2+e+j120°U∙ L3)/3,
where e-j120° = -1/2 - j√3/2 e e+j120° = -1/2 + j√3/2
• Loss of all three phase voltages
If a collapse of the three phase voltage without a corresponding change on the phase current is
detected a VT failure is detected.
When all three voltages drop down the adjustable threshold (UVT<) and the present value of three
phase currents (IL1(k), IL2(k), IL3(k)) and the same currents one cycle previously (IL1(k-1), IL2(k-1), IL3(k-1))
don’t move away from an adjustable threshold (DIVT<), an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
• No voltage detected upon energisation
The lack of three phase voltage after line energisation is detected if the circuit breaker is closed
and all the three phase voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) are lower than an adjustable threshold (UVT<) and all
the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) are lower than an adjustable threshold (IVT>); the latter must be
adjusted to a value higher than the current at energisation and lower than the short circuit current.
When any of the previous condition is detected, the 74VT function issues a blocking command or
switches to non directional the 67 and 67N protective elements; after an adjustable delay (t VT-AL) an
output alarm is activated.
The MCB state can be acquired by means a binary input; the binary input must be programmed for
MCB VT OPEN inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input1 (or x) menu and the Logic parameters (ON/
OFF) must be programmed in the same way of the related circuit connected with-it.
When the MCB opens the 74VT function is activated.
LINE
VTs
UAUX
Pro_N
MCB
MCB VT OPEN
BINARY INPUT
MCB VT OPEN
to Pro_N voltage inputs

Logical block (Block1) VT supervision - MCB position MCB-VT.ai
If the 74VT-BLK1 parameter (74VT logical block) is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for
logical block (Block1), the VT supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
goes down.[1] The enabling parameter are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ VT supervision-
74VT menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set
\ Inputs\Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INX matching).
All the parameters, common for Profile A and Profile B are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
VT supervision-74VT menu.
After a trip of the 74VT function, when fault goes OFF and at least one phase voltage is higher than
the adjustable threshold (U VT<), a self reset is performed if the 74VT-AR parameter is ON inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ VT supervision -74VT menu. The other way round, ( 74VT-AR parameter is
OFF), a manual reset must be activated (Front key or ThyVisor).
A reset command can be send by means a binary input also; the Reset LEDs function must be as-
signed to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(or x) menus (IN1 or IN2
matching).
section
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 192
The block output can be enabled or disabled; the 74VT-BK-EN parameter is available inside the
Set\Profile A(or B)\VT supervision -74VT menu.
The alarm output goes ON after an adjustable delay (t VT-AL>); it may be assigned to the selected
74VT-AL-K output relays inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\VT supervision -74VT menu; the same for
addressing the LED indicators 74VT-AL-L.
U 2VT>
ON≡Enable 74VT
U2 74VT Enable
U 2 ≥ U 2VT>
I 2VT>
I2 &
I 2 ≥ I 2VT>
U VT< Alarm 74VT
Max(U L1...U L3)

≤ U VT< & A
S D B t VT-AL
Q & ≥1 S
C
R E
& Q t VT-AL 74VT-AL-K
Min(U L1...U L3) ≥1 &
TRIPPING M ATRIX
≥ U VT< & R F G 0 T 74VT-AL-L
(LED+REL AYS)
RESET
ΔI VT<
|I L1(k)-I L1(k-1)|
74VT-BK-K
≤ ΔI VT< H &
74VT-BK-L
|I L2(k)-I L2(k-1)|
&
≤ ΔI VT<
|I L3(k)-I L3(k-1)|
I VT>
≤ ΔI VT<
Max(I L1...I L3)
&
“1”≡ CB CLOSED ≥ I VT>
CB closed Block 74VT
BLOCK 27/67/67N
(ON=1≡Autoreset enabled)
Self-reset 74VT
(ON=1≡Reset key)
Reset key
(ON=1≡remote reset)
Reset LEDs ≥1
Reset ThySetter
(Remote interface reset)
Remote Reset
“1”≡ CB TV open
MCB VT open
Block1 input (ON≡Block)

Block1
&
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Enable (ON≡Enable)
n.o. BLK1 74VT
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
74VT Block out
A Activates 74VT if one or two phase voltages are lost in the absence of negative sequence current (to discriminate asymmetrics hort circuits).
B Activates 74VT if all phase voltages are lost with loaded generator.
C Activates 74VT if all phase voltages are lost during commissioning of the line voltage (TV not connected), checking that no of the three currents exceeds I VT >.
In order to avoid trigger at the closure on polyphase short-circuit, I VT > should be set to a value less than I CC (but higher than the max inrush current).
In any case, the circuit breaker must be closed, otherwise the 74VT function is activated with standing generator.
D Inhibits the 74VT activation of the polyphase short-circuitss, setting the flip-flop when impulsive variation of currentin at least one phase change arises.
Inhibition resets automatically when all three phase voltages goes above threshold and negative sequence voltage goes below the threshold.
E The activation of the 74VT is maintained when at least one of conditions A, B, C is true.
The reset function can be performed manually (as long as the conditions are verified in the automatic reset D) or automatically if user defined.
F The 74VT activation can occur only for circuit breaker opening to protect the VTs secondary circuit.
G The 74VT activation can be inhibited by a 74VT block command applied to a binary input.
H The 74VT activation is always detected. If the user can also be set the voltage-dependent protection blocking.
VT supervision logic diagram - 74VT Fun_74VT.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 193

Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
Preface
The trip circuit can be monitored to signal possible anomalies that would lead to the missing opening
of circuit breaker when trip and/or operator command are issued.
Circuit interruption as well as missing of auxiliary voltage and/or coil faults are detected.
Supervision with one or two binary inputs can be select; depending on association of binary inputs,
the corresponding logic is automatically selected.
For this purpose the TCS1 and TCS2 (if two binary inputs are used) matching must be assigned to
the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input INx
menus.
When a binary input is programmed for the TCS function, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and
INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero and the Logic parameter must be set to Active-ON
inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input INx menus.

The 74TCS element may be enabled or disabled; to enable it, the 74TCS Enable parameter must be
set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS submenu.

If the 74TCS-BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical
block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1]
The enabling parameter 74TCS-BLK1 parameter is available inside the
Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS submenu while the Block1 function must be as-
signed to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus.
If the 74TCS-BLK1 parameter is set to ON, and a binary input.[2] is designed for logical block
(Block1), the TCS supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The trip tim-
er is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes down. The
74TCS-BLK1 parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS
submenu.
All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
Two inputs supervision

With two binary inputs all malfunctions are detected (inclusive of mechanics faults).
The binary inputs are connected to the trip and to the 52b contacts.
The CB auxiliary voltage must be 36 V at least (twice the minimum threshold for every binary input).
+UAUX
Pro-N
TCS1
Binary input IN1 Towards 74TCS logic

TRIP
TCS2
Binary input IN2 Towards 74TCS logic

52
52a 52b
-UAUX
Trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs - 74TCS TCS2s.ai
The faulty condition is detected occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) The TRIP contact is closed (external protection relay tripped);
B) The circuit breaker is closed (52a closed and 52b open).
Because such conditions can arise with healthy circuit too (e.g. a trip command is issued by the
protection relay but the CB opening time is still in progress), to avoid untimely operations the previ-
ous condition are checked every 80 ms and the output is issued after a 2 s delay; outputs are reset
to zero if at least the A or B condition become false after 0.6 s delay.[3]
ING section
Note 2 When two binary inputs are just used (TCS1 and TCS2), an external I/O module is required for the logic block function. The exhaustive treatment
of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING section
Note 3 Following assumption are considered for the framework:
Logic: ON,
Timers tON and tOFF: reset to zero
TRIP contact of the protection: DE-energized, No latched
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 194
TCS1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Start 74TCS
n.o. T 0 0 TT
Start 74TCS 74TCS-ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
Binary input INx
(LED+REL AYS)
74TCS-ST-L
&
TCS2 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON 2s 0.6 s 74TCS-TR-K
INx t OFF &
n.o. T 0 0 T 74TCS-TR-L
T 0 0 TT
RESET
Binary input INx
Trip 74TCS
Trip 74TCS
74TCS Enable
Start 74TCS
74TCS-BLK1 Trip 74TCS & BLK1 74TCS
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 TT
Binary input INx
Logic diagram concerning the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs - 74TCS Fun-74TCS2.ai
One input supervision

By means of the right sizing of a resistor, the trip circuit supervision may be performed even with
lower control voltage (e.g. when the control voltage is less than 36 V required for driving of two
binary inputs, typically UAUX = 24V).
The binary input is connected to the trip and an external resistor must be connected the 52b auxiliary
contact.
+UAUX
Pro-N
TCS1
TRIP
Binary input INx Towards 74TCS logic
R
52
52a 52b
-UAUX
Trip circuit supervision with one binary inputs - 74TCS TCS1.ai
The fault condition of the trip circuit is detected by binary input power down.
With healthy circuit and TRIP contact closed, the binary input is feed across the 52a path (CB closed)
or across the resistor R and 52b path (CB open).
When the TRIP contact turns ON, the binary input becomes short-circuited; to avoid untimely opera-
tions the previous condition are checked every 80 ms and the output is issued after a 40 s delay in
order to allow the fault clearing and the consequent reset of the TRIP protection.
Outputs are reset to zero after 6 s from the TRIP contact open.[1]
Note 1 The trip contact (TRIP) of the protection relays must be set with automatic reset (No-latched operating mode).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 195
Start 74TCS
TCS1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Start 74TCS 74TCS-ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF 74TCS-ST-L
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
40 s 6s 74TCS-TR-K
T 0 0 T 74TCS-TR-L
74TCS Enable
RESET Trip 74TCS
Trip 74TCS
Start 74TCS
74TCS-BLK1 Trip 74TCS & BLK1 74TCS
&

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Logic diagram concerning the trip circuit supervision with one binary inputs - 74TCS Fun-74TCS1.ai
How to calculate resistance

Both the following conditions must be filled:
1) The circuit breaker coil must no be powered when the CB is open and an open command is is-
sued;
2) The binary input is energized when the trip contact open.
1) If the circuit breaker is just open an unnecessary excitation must be avoided; the most critical
event arises when the TRIP contact is closed (e.g. manual or test command), so with minimal
series resistance. To avoid an unwanted excitation the series resistance must be higher than a
minimum value defined as:
Rmin = R TC · (UAUX - U TCmin) / U TCmin
where:
U TCmin: minimum coil excitation voltage
UAUX : auxiliary voltage
R TC : coil resistance
2) To energize the binary input circuit when the TRIP contact and CB open, the series resistance
must be lowerer than a maximum value defined as:
Rmax = [(UAUX - UDIGmin) / IDIG] - R TC
where:
UDIGmin: minimum binary input excitation voltage (18 V)
UAUX : auxiliary voltage
R TC : coil resistance
IDIG: binary input excitation current (0.003 A)
To satisfy the above requirements, the R value must be chosen between the Rmin and Rmax values;
typically the normalized value nearest the arithmetic mean:
R = (Rmin + Rmax) / 2
The power dissipated by the R resistor is:
PR = R · I 2 = R · [UAUX / (R + R TC)] 2
Example
UAUX = 110 Vcc (auxiliary voltage)
P TC = 50 W (coil power)
R TC = UAUX 2 / P TC = 242 Ω (coil resistance)
U TCmin = 77 V (minimum coil excitation voltage = 70% UAUX )
UDIGmin = 18 V (minimum binary input excitation voltage)
IDIG = 0.003 A (binary input excitation current)
Rmin = R TC · (UAUX - U TCmin) / U TCmin = 242 · (110 - 77) / 77 = 103.7 Ω
Rmax = [(UAUX - UDIGmin) / IDIG] - R TC = [(110 - 18) / 0.003] - 242 = 30425 Ω
R = (Rmin + Rmax) / 2 = (103.7 + 30425) / 2 = 15264 Ω ~ 15 k Ω
PR (Power dissipated by the R resistor) = UAUX 2 /R = 110 2 / 15000 = 0.8 W[1]
Note1 In order to limit the temperature of the resistor it should be oversized (at least double the power - 2 W)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 196
Circuit breaker supervision
Preface
Several diagnostic metering and monitoring function are available:
• By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the CB position is acquired. Depending on such information
the Open and/or Close commands can be safely issued by user.
• An adjustable threshold can be set for a wear estimate of the breaker contacts; the current values
(SI or SI2) are summed and compared to a user-adjustable threshold. When the threshold or the
number of operations is exceeded the relay can activate an output relay. The function helps to
adjust maintenance planning.
• By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the opening time is calculated and compared to a user-ad-
justable threshold. If the threshold is exceeded the relay can activate an output relay.
Opening transition Towards CB diagnostic
CB monitoring
+UAUX
52a Logic INx t O N INx t O F F 52a ON/OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
TRIPPING M ATRIX
Binary input INx
52
52a 52b t mask
(LED)
t mask
52b Logic INx t O N INx t O F F =1
T 0
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx 52b ON/OFF
-UAUX
Logic diagram concerning the circuit breaker diagnostic function Fun-CB-position.ai

According to the conventional contact position
• 52a is the auxiliary contact that is in the same position as the circuit breaker, (52a open = CB
open),
• 52b is the auxiliary contact that is in the opposite position as the circuit breaker, (52a open = CB
closed).
To acquire the CB position, the 52a and 52b function must be set inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary
input 1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input x menus. The IN1 tON, IN2 tON, IN1 tOFF and IN2 tOFF
time delays must be reset to zero and the Logic parameter must be set to Active-ON inside the Set
\ Inputs \ Binary input IN1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary input INx menus.
CIRCUIT BREAKER COMMANDS

Two output relays can be set to command CB opening and closing; the CBopen-K and CBclose-K
function must be set inside the Set \ Circuit breaker supervision \ LEDs-relays allocation menu; the
CB position can be visualized by means two LEDs (CBopen-L and CBclosed-L parameters).
All the parameters are common for Profile A and Profile B.
CIRCUIT BREAKER DIAGNOSTIC

Four different criteria can be select.
1) Number of CB trip mode (ModeN.Open ON). When the number of operations (N.Open) is ex-
ceeded, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
2) Cumulative CB currents mode (ModeSumI ON). When the per-phase value exceeds the thresh-
old, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
3) Cumulative CB I2t mode (ModeSumI^2t ON). The tripping energy I2t is calculated on the base of
current measure at the time of the open command on the base of the circuit breaker opening time
provided for I2t calculation (tbreak). When the per-phase value exceeds the threshold, an output
relay and/or LED can be activated.
4) CB operating time mode (Mode-tOpen ON). The time interval between the trip command and the
CB open acquisition is calculated on the base of a programmable relay (Ktrig-break). When the
time interval (tbreak>) is exceeded, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
The four criteria can be contemporaneously or separately set.
All the named parameters are available inside the Set \ Circuit Breaker supervision \ CB Diagnostic
menu.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 197

State N.Open
TRIPPING M ATRIX
Mode- N .Open
(LED+REL AYS)
N .Open
N.Open-K
&
From CB position Opening transition N.Open-L
≥
CB Diagnostic - Number of trips
State SumI
Mode-SumI
IL1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
∑I SumI
SumI-K
IL2 &
∑I Max SumI-L
From CB position Opening transition Max ≥ Sum I
IL3
∑I
SumIL1
SumIL2
SumIL3
CB Diagnostic - Cumulative tripping currents
State SumI^2t
IL1 Mode-SumI^2t
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
∑ I2t Sum I^2t
SumI^2t-K
IL2 &
∑I2t Max SumI^2t-L
From CB position Opening transition Max ≥ Sum I^2t
IL3
∑I2t
SumIL1^2t
SumIL2^2t
SumIL3^2t
CB Diagnostic - Cumulative tripping energy I2t

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Mode-tOpen State tbreak

(LED+REL AYS)
Ktrig-break t break
tbreak-K
&
tbreak-L
≥
From CB position Opening transition
CB Diagnostic - CB operating time Fun-CB-diagnostic.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 198

Virtual I/O
Preface
By ThyVisor and ThyVisor software tools the type of operation and links between outputs (Virtual
Output - VOUT1 ... 16) and virtual inputs (Virtual Inputs - VIN1 ... VIN32) may be defined using RPC or
IEC 61850 communication protocols over Ethernet network.
The system allows:[1]
• Availability of sixteen inputs and thirty-two outputs independently programmable by the user
• Simplify wiring using one channel as the Ethernet
• Eliminate the need to install communication devices and / or external conversion
• Significantly reduce costs
• Dynamically change from sw connections and associated functions.
Pro-N & Pro-NX Pro-N & Pro-NX

PROTECTION RELAY freely customizable connections PROTECTION RELAY
IN1 IN1
IN2 IN2
IN3 IN3
IN... IN...
IN32 IN32
OUT1 OUT1
OUT2 OUT2
OUT... OUT...
OUT16 OUT16
Applications
With Pro-N and Pro-XX relay the virtual I / O can be usefully employed for:
• Transmit information between protections installed in significant distance where the traditional
connections are critical in terms of reliability.
• Making OR logic for opening control of multiple DDI (simultaneous control of all DDI operated by
each SPI) in cases of multiple interface protections (Smart Grids)
• Achieve accelerated logic discrimination in which some protection elements can be blocked by the
activation of the downstream protection start; this allows to reduce the clearing time that, in time
logic systems require trip time significantly long in correspondence of the power source.
• Circuit breaker commands
• Selection of setting profiles
• Remote trip
• Include I / O in the programmable logic (PLC)
• etc. ..
Virtual Outputs:
The t V , t-F-IPh
Funzioni di timers
and t F-IE protezione e controllo
start when the virtual output goes ON; the virtual output are disabled
(OFF) when the timers expire; if the t V , t F-IPh and t F-IE timers are cleared the virtual output follows the
associated27 signal state (Start,
Minima Trip, Digital IN).
tensione
The setting
27V1ranges are:Minima tensione di sequenza diretta
Start reset
59 time for voltage
Massima elements
tensione(t V ) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Start reset
59V2time for phase
Massimacurrent elements
tensione (t F -IPh )
di sequenza inversa 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Start reset time for ground current elements (t F -IE ) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
59N Massima tensione residua
Trip reset time (t Trip) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
59Uavg Massima tensione mediata
All settings
81Oare available insidefrequenza
Massima the Set \ Virtual Outputs \ Settings menu.
81U Minima frequenza
Virtual Inputs: 81R Derivata di frequenza
LinkLossBF timer Mancata apertura interruttore 3.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
If the Virtual input is set for Remote Trip, in case of outage of the communication network, when the
74TCS Monitoraggio del circuito
count expires the remote trip is issued.
di apertura dell’interruttore
The setting is available inside the Set \ Virtual Inputs \ Settings menu.
ARF Richiusura automatica per fotovoltaico
(opzionale)
Note 1 For a detailed description please refer to the application notes

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 199
Each virtual input can be associated with one of the following functions:
Virtual inputs
FUNCTIONS VIN1 VIN1 VIN1 VINx VINx VINx VIN32 VIN32 VIN32
Function (A) Funct. (B) -K Funct.(A) Funct.(B) -K Function (A) Funct. (B) -K
Reset LEDs   
Set profile (switching setting A and B)   
Fault trigger (fault recording)   
Block2 IPh/IE (phase and/or ground elem.)   
Block2 IPh (phase elements)   
Block2 IE (ground elements)   
Block1 (logic block)   
TCS1 (Trip Circuit Supervision)   
TCS2 (Trip Circuit Supervision)   
Trip ProtExt   
Reset counters   
Reset CB Monitor   
52a (CB auxiliary contact)   
52b (CB auxiliary contact)   
Open CB   
Close CB   
Preset DTheta (thermal image preset)   
Remote trip   
MCB VT OPEN (MCB auxiliary contact)   
Reset on demand measures   
Reset energy measures   
74VT ext. (74VT from ext. protection relays)   
I>Bk   
I>>Bk   
I>>>Bk   
IE>Bk   
IE>>Bk   
IE>>>Bk   
IPD>Bk   
IPD>>Bk   
IPD>>>Bk   
IPD>>>>Bk   
IED>Bk   
IED>>Bk   
IED>>>Bk   
IED>>>>Bk   
K1   
K2   
K3   
K4   
K5   
K6   
K7   
K8   
K9   
K10   
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 200

Each virtual output can be associated with one of the following functions:
Virtual output VOUT1 Virtual outputs VOUT2...16

FUNCTIONS
Start Trip Input Mask1 Input Mask2 Start Trip Input Mask1 Input Mask2
DthAL1  
DthAL2  
I>ST  
I>>ST  
I>>>ST  
IE>ST  
IE>>ST  
IE>>>ST  
IPD>ST  
IPD>>ST  
IPD>>>ST  
IPD>>>>ST  
IED>ST  
IED>>ST  
IED>>>ST  
IED>>>>ST  
TEST_START  
I>TR  
I>>TR  
I>>>TR  
IE>TR  
IE>>TR  
IE>>>TR  
IPD>TR  
IPD>>TR  
IPD>>>TR  
IPD>>>>TR  
IED>TR  
IED>>TR  
IED>>>TR  
IED>>>>TR  
Th1>TR  
Th2>TR  
Th3>TR  
Th4>TR  
Th5>TR  
Th6>TR  
Th7>TR  
Th8>TR  
74TCS-TR  
BF-TR  
TEST_TRIP  
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 201

Each virtual output can be associated with one of the following functions:
Virtual output VOUT1 Virtual outputs VOUT2...16

FUNCTIONS
Start Trip Input Mask1 Input Mask2 Start Trip Input Mask1 Input Mask2
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
IN6  
IN7  
IN8  
IN9  
IN10  
IN11  
IN12  
IN13  
IN14  
IN15  
IN16  
IN17  
IN18  
IN19  
IN20  
IN21  
IN22  
IN23  
IN24  
IN25  
IN26  
IN27  
IN28  
IN29  
IN30  
IN31  
IN32  
IN33  
IN34  
IN35  
IN36  
IN37  
IN38  
IN39  
IN40  
IN41  
IN42  
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 202

Demand measures
Demand measures are calculated as:
Fixed demand
Fixed demand IL1FIX , IL2FIX , IL3FIX
Every fixed demand period t FIX an average magnitude is calculated based on samples taken every 1
second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The fixed demand measures may be reset
to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (ThyVisor Commands menu).
The tFIX parameter (Fixed demand period) is available inside the Set \ Demand measures menu.
Rolling demand
Rolling demand IL1ROL , IL2ROL , IL3ROL
The average magnitude is calculated inside a mobile window of N·T length where:
• N is the user-defined number of cycles and,
• T is the user-defined sub-period.
An average magnitude is calculated based on samples taken every 1 second; update is carried out
at the end of the every sub-period. The rolling demand measures may be reset to zero by means the
Reset on demand measures command (ThyVisor Commands menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) and N.Rol (Number of cycles for rolling on demand) parameters are
available inside the Set \ Demand measures menu.
Peak demand
Peak demand IL1MAX , IL2MAX , IL3MAX
Every sub-period t ROL the maximum value of the average magnitude is calculated based on samples
taken every 1 second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The peak demand measures
may be reset to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (ThyVisor Commands menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) parameter is the same for rolling demand setting.
Minimum demand
Minimum demand IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN
Every sub-period t ROL the minimum value of the average magnitude is calculated based on samples
taken every 1 second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The peak demand measures
may be reset to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (ThyVisor Commands menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) parameter is the same for rolling demand setting.
Oscillography
Trigger Setup
Following parameters, available inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Trigger Setup menu, are user-pro-
grammable:
• Pre-trigger time and Post-trigger time.
Trigger
pre-trigger post-trigger Time
Oscillography trigger trigger.ai
• Element pickup trigger; the information recording starts when a state transition on any protec-
tive element occurs if the parameter is set to ON.
• Trigger from outputs; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
output relay occurs if the parameter is set (K1...K6).
• Binary input trigger; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
binary input occurs if the parameter is set to ON.
• Trigger from inputs; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
binary input occurs if the parameter is set (IN1...INx).
• 80% Buffer alarm; when the 80% of the buffer space is reached an alarm may be issued if the
parameter is set to ON.
Set sampled channels
The desired sampled quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set sampled channels
menu (iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE , uL1, uL2 , uL3 , uE ).
Set analog channels
The desired sampled quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set analog channels
menu.
Everyone of twelve analog channel may be associated to one of the selected measures (Frequency,
IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE , UL1, UL2 , UL3 , UE , U12 ,...etc, T1...T8[1]).
Set digital channels
The desired digital quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set digital channels
menu.
Everyone of twelve digital channel may be associated to one of the selected I/O signal (K1... K6, K7...
K10, IN1, IN2, IN3...IN42 [2]).
Nota 1 The 26 menu is available when the MPT module is enabled

Nota 2 The output relay K7...K10 and binary input IN3...IN42 states is meaningful when the I/O circuits are present (MRI and MID16 modules)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 203
5 M E A S U R E S , L O G I C S TAT E S A N D C O U N T E R S
Measures
Direct
• Frequency (f )
• RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents (I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 )
• RMS value of fundamental component for phase voltages (U L1, U L 2 , U L 3 )
• RMS value of fundamental component for residual current (I E )
• RMS value of fundamental component for residual voltage (U E ) [1]
Calculated
• Thermal image (DTheta)
• Phase-to-phase voltage (U 12 , U 23 , U 31)
• Calculated residual voltage (U EC )
• Maximum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I Lmax)
• Minimum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I Lmin)
• Average current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 (I L)
• Maximum voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 (U Lmax)
• Average voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 (U L )
• Maximum voltage between U 12 -U 23 -U 31 (U max)
• Average voltage between U 12 -U 23 -U 31 (U)
Phase
• Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U L1 (PhiL1)
• Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U L 2 (PhiL2)
• Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U L 3 (PhiL3)
• Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U 23 (Alpha1)
• Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U 31 (Alpha2)
• Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U 12 (Alpha3)
• Displacement angle of U E respect to I E (PhiE) [1]
• Displacement angle of U EC respect to I E (PhiEC)
Sequence
• Positive sequence current (I 1)
• Negative sequence current (I 2 )
• Negative sequence current/positive sequence current ratio (I 2 /I 1)
• Negative sequence voltage (U 2 )
Power
• Total active power (P )
• Total reactive power (Q )
• Total apparent power (S )
• Power factor (cosPhi )
• Phase reactive powers (P L1, P L 2 , P L 3 )
• Phase reactive powers (Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3 )
• Fattore di potenza di fase (cosPhiL1, cosPhiL2, cosPhiL3 )
2nd harmonic
• Second harmonic phase currents (I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3-2nd )
• Maximum of the second harmonic phase currents/
• fundamental component percentage ratio I-2nd /IL (I -2nd /I L )
3rd harmonic
• Third harmonic phase currents (I L1-3rd , I L 2-3rd , I L 3-3rd )
• Third harmonic of residual current (I E-3rd )
• Third harmonic of residual voltage (U E-3rd )
4th harmonic
• Fourth harmonic phase currents (I L1-4th , I L 2-4th , I L 3-4th)
5th harmonic
• Fifth harmonic phase currents (I L1-5th , I L 2-5th , I L 3-5th)
Demand phase
• Phase fixed currents demand (I L1FIX , I L 2FIX , I L 3FIX )
• Phase rolling currents demand (I L1ROL , I L 2ROL , I L 3ROL )
• Phase peak currents demand (I L1MA X , I L 2MA X , I L 3MA X )
• Phase minimum currents demand (I L1MIN , I L 2MIN , I L 3MIN )
Demand power
• Fixed active power demand (P FIX )
• Fixed reactive power demand (Q FIX )
• Rolling active power demand (P ROL )
Note 1 Available with versions with VTs inputs
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 204
MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
• Rolling reactive power demand (Q ROL )
• Peak active power demand (P MA X )
• Peak reactive power demand (Q MA X )
• Minimum active power demand (P MIN )
• Minimum reactive power demand (Q MIN )
Energy
• Positive active energy (E A +)
• Negative active energy (E A -)
• Total active energy (E A )
• Positive reactive energy (E Q +)
• Negative reactive energy (E Q -)
• Total reactive energy (E Q )

Protection
For each protection threshold, the following data are available:
• Start ON/OFF
• Trip ON/OFF
• Logic block (Block1) ON/OFF
• Selective block (Block2) ON/OFF
• Cold Load Pickup ON/OFF
Delayed inputs
The binary input states, acquired downstream the delay timers are available:
• IN1 ON/OFF
• IN2 ON/OFF
Internal states
The state of the functions assigned to binary inputs are available:
• Reset LEDs ON/OFF
• Profile selection ON/OFF
• Fault trigger ON/OFF
• IE /IPh Block2 ON/OFF
• IPh Block2 ON/OFF
• IE Block2 ON/OFF
• Block1 ON/OFF
• Tcs1 ON/OFF
• Tcs2 ON/OFF
• Trip External protections ON/OFF
• Reset partial counters ON/OFF
• Reset CB monitoring data ON/OFF
• 52a ON/OFF
• 52b ON/OFF
• Open CB ON/OFF
• Close CB ON/OFF
• Thermal image presetting ON/OFF
• Remote trip ON/OFF
• MCB VT OPEN ON/OFF
• Reset on demand measures ON/OFF
• Reset on energy measures ON/OFF
• 74VT ext. ON/OFF
Relays
For every output relay, the output operating state and diagnostic are available (Read\Relays menu):
• K1 State ON/OFF
• K1 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• K2 State ON/OFF
• ......
• K6 State ON/OFF
Counters
For every element two set of counters are available (Partial counters and Total counters); the partial
counters can be cleared by the user level, while the Total counter reset can be achieved with pass-
word (Session Level 1).
Every partial counter is reset to zero when ten thousand count is passed.
All partial counters can be cleared by means a single command; for this purpose the Reset partial
counters command must be issued (Commands\Reset submenu).
• 27 - counter
• 49 - counter
• 50/51 - counter
• 50N/51N - counter
• 59 - counter
• 59N - counter
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 205
• 67 - counter
• 67N - counter
• 2ndh-REST - counter
• 74TCS - counter
• CB - counter
• 74VT - counter
• 74CT - counter
• BF - counter
Partial counters
• xx Start partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Trip partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block1 partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block2 partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
Total counters
• xx Start total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Trip total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block1 total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block2 total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
Self test
Proper management (programming and remote monitoring) of the self-diagnosis function ensures
the fast detection of most of the protection system failures and significantly reduces the need for
periodic testing.
Following anomalies (MINOR) are not relevant (the protective elements continue to work):
• Oscillography run-time OK/NOT OK
• Data Bus minor OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned run-time minor OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O not-matching run-time minor OK/NOT OK
Lower level diagnostic (MINOR) can be output or ignored; for this purpose the MINOR Fail alarm
parameter can be set ON or OFF inside the Set \ Self test relay submenu.
All remaining anomalies disables all protective functions[1]
• Protection and controls ON SERVICE/OUT OF SERVICE
• System diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Device diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Program diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Data-base boot OK/NOT OK
• Data-base runtime OK/NOT OK
• DSP boot OK/NOT OK
• DSP run-time OK/NOT OK
• Memory boot OK/NOT OK
• Memory run-time OK/NOT OK
• Data Bus heavy OK/NOT OK
• PLC boot OK/NOT OK
• PLC run-time OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify startup OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify run-time major OK/NOT OK
• Total protection I/O assigned not-matching 0
• PLC I/O assigned not-matching OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O assigned not-matching run-time major OK/NOT OK
• Total PLC I/O assigned not-matching 0
• MMI module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MMI module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• MRI module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MRI module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• MID16-1 module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MID16-1 module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• MID16-2 module Boot OK/NOT OK
• MID16-2 module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• PT100 module Boot OK/NOT OK
• PT100 module Run-time OK/NOT OK
• Current loop module Boot OK/NOT OK
• Current loop Run-time OK/NOT OK
The diagnostic alarms can be allocated to an output relay; the Self-test relay parameter (K1...K6)
is available inside the Set \ Self-test Relay submenu.
When a higher level anomaly is recognized all protective functions are disabled and the output relays
switch in no-trip state:
• rest state if the output relay are set in De-energized mode (contacts as shown in the diagrams)
• active state if the output relay are set in Energized mode (opposite to what is shown in the dia-
grams).
The connections of the trip and diagnostic relays must be performed according to the application:
when the output relay must be normally energized and the circuit breaker must be open in case of
failure of the protection system, the self-test function must be enabled and assigned to the normally
energized relay selected for tripping..
Note 1 The relays are being switched in rest position (ON if set with Energized logic - OFF if set with De-energized logic)
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 206
Detailed diagnostic information about the pilot wire are available.
(Read \ Pilot wire diagnostic).
• BLIN1 pilot wire breaking diagnostic state ON/OFF
• Pilot wire BLIN1 shorted ON/OFF
Selective Block - BLOCK2

The input and output state concerning the selective block are available (Read \ Selective block-
BLOCK2).
Block2 input
• Phase protections input selective block state BLK2IN-Iph ON/OFF
• Ground protections input selective block state BLK2IN-IE ON/OFF
• tB-Iph/IE Elapsed state tB timeout ON/OFF
Block2 output
• Starting state of phase protections enabled
for external selective block on output ST-Iph-BLK2 ON/OFF
• Starting state of ground protections enabled
for external selective block on output ST-IE-BLK2 ON/OFF
• Phase protections output
selective block state BLK2-OUT-Iph ON/OFF
• Ground protections
output selective block state BLK2-OUT-IE ON/OFF
• Phase and ground protections
output selective block state BLK2-OUT-Iph/IE ON/OFF
Fault recording - SFR

Recording is triggered by one or more causes (up to 8 simultaneous):
• Activation (OFF-ON transition) of any relay programmed for trip of protection or control element
• External trigger (binary input programmed as Fault trigger)
Twenty events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[1][2]
Following information are stored in every record:
• Fault counter[3]
• Date and time
• Fault cause (element trip)
• Phase currents IL1r, IL2r, IL3r
• Phase voltages UL1r, UL2r, UL3r
• Phase-to-phase voltages U12r, U23r, U31r
• Residual current IEr
• Measured residual voltage UEr
• Calculated residual voltage UECr
• Displacement angle of phase current respect to phase voltage PhiL1r, PhiL2r, PhiL3r
• Displacement angle of phase current respect to phase-to-phase voltage Alpha1r, Alpha2r, Alpha3r
• Displacement angle of measured residual voltage respect to residual current PhiEr
• Displacement angle of calculated residual voltage respect to residual current PhiECr
• Thermal image Dthetar
• Inputs
• Outputs
• Fault cause info (faulted phase)
Event recording - SER

Recording is triggered by one or more causes:
• Start and/or trip of any enabled protection or control element
• Binary input activation (OFF-ON or ON-OFF transition)
• Power-on or power-down (Auxiliary power supply)
• Setting change.
Three hundred events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[2][4]
Following information are stored in every record:
• Event counter[5]
• Date and time
• Event cause (binary input/element trip/setting change)
Note 1 Fault 0 is the newest fault, while the Fault 19 is the oldest fault
Note 2 Data are stored in non volatile memory; they are held in spite of power down
Note 3 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThyVisor
Note 4 Event 0 is the newest event, while the Event 299 is the oldest event
Note 5 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThyVisor
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 207
Oscillography - DFR
Upon programmable trigger, the fault records are recorded in COMTRADE format; the sampled mea-
sures (24 sample per cycle) are stored in a circular shift memory buffer.
The fault record are self-triggered; they are stored in sequential order up the allocated memory is
used up after which the oldest memory is overwritten.
An operating procedure example for the digital fault recording is illustrated inside the ThyVisor sec-
tion.
Following parameters are user-programmable:
• Pre-trigger and post-trigger time
• Selected sampled quantities.
• Analog channels (1...12) allocation.
• Digital channels (1...12) allocation (output relay and/or binary inputs).
• Trigger setup; the information storage starts when a state transition on the selected signal occurs.
(protective element start and/or trip, output relay and/or binary input switching).
• Alarm: when the 80% of the buffer space is reached an alarm may be issued. The system being of
linear type, the records are back-to-back recorded to the end of available memory; the alarm out-
put is a warning in order that the user may download data[1] to clear memory for new records.
Trigger
pre-trigger post-trigger Time
Oscillographic recorder - trigger trigger.ai
COMTRADE
Records are recorded in COMTRADE format; (Common Format for Transient Data); This is a standard
for the data exchange for various types of tests or simulation datas, etc, for power system applica-
tions.
The measurements are recorded in ASCII or BINARY format. COMTRADE files always come by
pairs:
• The “.CFG”-file describing the configuration: number of analog and digital channels, sampling rate,
scale factors, etc.
• The “.DAT”-file containing the data
The COMTRADE is part of IEC 60255-24 standard.

The recording can be analyzed by mean of ThyVisor sw or any other standard compliant viewer.
The record quantity is depending on settings of following parameters:

• Pre-trigger and post-trigger times
• Number of allocated channels.
By means of the following formula the record quantity may be evaluated:
12000 50 (Hz)
N = int ·
(34 + 20 v i + 4 v RMS + nB)· (tpre + tpost )(s) f (Hz)
where:
•N record quantity
• vi sampled measures
• v RMS analog measures (RMS)
• nB logic variables (2 up to 16 variables)
• tpre pre-trigger time interval
• tpost post-trigger time interval
•f frequency
Example 1
With the following setting:
• Pre-trigger: 0.25 s
• Post-trigger: 0.25 s
• Sampled measures: iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE , uL1, uL2 , uL3
• Analog measures: IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE , UL1, UL2 , UL3 , UEC
• Logic variables: K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, IN1, IN2
up to 114 record can be stored if f = 50 Hz, since:
12000 50 (Hz)
N = int · = 114
(34 + 20 · 7 + 8 · 4 + 2) · (0.25 + 0.25) 50 (Hz)
Note 1 Data are stored into non-volatile memory; they are retained once power is turned off.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 208
Example 2
With following setting:
• Pre-trigger: 0.5 s
• Post-trigger: 0.5 s
• Sampled measures: iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE , uL1, uL2 , uL3
• Analog measures: IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE , UL1, UL2 , UL3 , UEC
• Digital channels: K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, IN1, IN2
up to 47 records can be stored if f = 60 Hz, since:
12000 50 (Hz)
N = int · = 47
(34 + 20 · 7 + 8 · 4 + 2) · (0.50 + 0.50) 60 (Hz)
Phase-to-earth fault record oscillo-earth.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 209

6 I N S TA L L AT I O N
6.1 PACKAGING
Packaging consists of a paperboard packaging guaranteeing adequate protection for transport and
storage under normal environmental conditions.
The Pro-N protection relays must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative hu-
midity should not cause condensation or formation of frost.
It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-
cially in extreme climatic conditions.
It is recommended that the packaging not be disposed of into the environment, but kept in case the
relay should be moved at some later time.
6.2 MOUNTING
The Pro-N protection relays are housed inside metal cases suitable for various kinds of assembly:
• Flush mounting
• Projecting mounting
• With separate operator panel
• Rack.
Removability is ensured to facilitate maintenance operations so that the electronic module can be
replaced; this provides minimum downtime and maximum protection availability.
Flush mounting
The fixed case, fitted with special fastening brackets, is mounted on the front of electric control
board, previously drilled as indicated in the drawing.
In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays the minimum drilling distance is determined by
the front dimensions indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased by 3 mm, to ensure an
adequate tolerance and gasket space between adjacent relays.
The depth dimension, as indicated in the drawing, must be increased by as much as needed to allow
room for the wiring.
107 205 30 101
D1
A1
A2
C1 C2
A3 F1
A4 RX F2
A5 F3
A6 TX F4
A7 F5
A8 C3 C4
A9 B1
A10 B2
177
171
149
A11 B3
A12 B4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START
A13 B5
TRIP A14 C5 C6 B6
A15 B7
A16 B8
A17
A18
A19
A20 C7 C8
A21
A22
E1
102.5 ±0.3
70
161
154
N.4 holes ø 3,5 Flush-mount.ai

Flush mounting
NOTE Separation of fixed and removable parts is NOT required
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 210

INSTALLATION
• Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.
Removing tie to access the fastening screws Remove-tile.ai
• The fixed case is fastened by means of four screws onto the panel as indicated in the drawing.
Four screws Flush-mount1.ai
Projecting mounting
• Remove the ground screw and open the little door to access the fastening screws.
• Make all connections and join the relay to the framework with front and earth screws.
In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays, the minimum fixing distance is determined by the
dimensions of the mounting plate indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased horizontally
and vertically by as much as needed to allow room for the wiring and to ensure an adequate toler-
ance between devices.
275
120
ON 1 2 3 4 5
START
80
TRIP
31
Projecting mounting Projecting.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 211

INSTALLATION
Separate operator panel
The solution with projecting assembly and a separate operator panel is particularly suitable for
limited in depth installations.
Cutout dimension and mounting steps concerning the separate operator panel are the same for the
flushing mounting (see previous pages.
212.5 128.5
25 15 110
107 5 30
D1
A1
A2
C1 C2
A3 F1
A4 RX F2
A5 F3
A6 TX F4
A7 F5
A8 C3 C4
A9 B1
A10 B2
200
168
170
177
A11 B3
A12 B4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START A13 B5
A14 C5 C6 B6
TRIP
A15 B7
A16 B8
A17
A18
A19
A20 C7 C8
A21
A22
E1
20
N.4 holes ø 4,5
Separate operator panel Separate-mount.ai
A standard direct shielded cable with RJ45 connectors must be used for connections.
Separate-mount1.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 212

INSTALLATION
Rack mounting
For mounting inside a standardized 19-inch system (EIA 310-D, IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 SC48D), the
MAR adapter is required (available on request).
482.6
465
177 (4U)
101.6
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
Rack mounting Rack-mount.ai
To allow opening of the keyboard door a one unit space must be provided when several rack are
overlapping mounted.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 213

INSTALLATION
6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections should be made by referring to the connection diagram; in cases where cer-
tain of the circuits (communication, block, or others) are not used, the relevant connections must
remain open. Examples of connection diagrams are reported on Appendix to this manual.
Devices must be installed by qualified personnel only.

CAUTION No liability is accepted from Thytronic due to improper use.
For the A1...A22 connections, screw terminals with following characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: 0.14...2.5 mm2 (AWG 26...16) for single conductor
da 0.14 a 0.75 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section
• Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
• Stripping length: 8 mm
For the B1...B8 connections, screw terminals with following characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: da 0.2 a 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12) for single conductor
For the F1...F5 (RS485) connections, screw terminals with following characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: da 0.2 a 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12) for single conductor
Amperometric inputs
1/5 A CTs
The connections to the current signal inputs C1...C8 can be made by ring lugs suitable for M4 screws
and an insulating panel covering the terminals may be mounted for safety purposes.
D1
UAUX
≅ A1 A1 RJ45 Ethernet
A2
A2 C1 C2
A3 A3 F1
K1 A4 A4 RX F2 RS485
A5 A5 F3
B-
A6 A6 TX F4
K2 A7 A7 F5 A+
A8 A8 C3 C4
K3 A9 A9 B1
A10 A10 B2
K4 A11 A11 B3
K5 A12 A12 B4
A13 A13 B5 Voltage inputs
K6 A14 A14 C5 C6 B6
BLOUT- B7
BLOUT+
A15 A15
A16 A16 B8
BLIN-
BLIN+
A17 A17
A18 A18
IN1
A19 A19
A20 A20 C7 C8
A21 A21
IN2
A22 A22 RJ45 Thybus
E1
Current inputs
Connections for NA60 versions with traditional CT and VT inputs
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 214

INSTALLATION
ThySensor inputs
The inputs current and voltage connections are made through pre-wired RJ45 plug.
D1
≅ A1 A1 RJ45 Ethernet
UAUX
A2
A2 C1 C2
A3 A3 F1
K1 A4 A4 RX F2 RS485
A5 A5 F3
B-
A6 A6 TX F4
K2 A7 A7 F5 A+
A8 A8
K3 A9 A9 B1
A10 A10 B2
K4 A11 A11 B3
K5 A12 A12 B4
A13 A13 B5
K6 A14 A14
L1 B6 Voltage and amperometric
BLOUT- B7
BLOUT+
A15 A15
inputs from ThySensor
A16 A16 B8
BLIN-
BLIN+
A17 A17
L2
A18 A18
IN1
A19 A19
A20 A20
L3
A21 A21
IN2
A22 A22
RJ45 Thybus
E1
Connections for NA60 versions with ThySensor inputs
A protective ground connection is required, which must be connected to the suitable screw with a
separate lead of at least 2.5 mm2.
Ground screw
Earthing rear.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 215

INSTALLATION
Core balanced CT
The current balance transformer, when used for measuring residual current, must be crossed in the
same direction by all active conductors and hence, also by the neutral conductor if distributed, with
the exception of the ground connection protective conductor. The drawing below shows cases of
assembly of the toroid on unscreened and screened cables; prior to proceeding with assembly, it is
necessary to check that there are no screen-to-ground connections upstream of the sensor.
Source Source
Insulated cables
Shielded cables
Armoring Armoring
Load Load
Fig. 1a Fig. 1b
Current balanced transformer Toroide.ai
In order to ensure a linear response from the sensor, the cables must be positioned in the centre
of the transformer so that the magnetic effect of the three cables is perfectly compensated in the
absence of residual current (Fig.2a).
Hence, the assembly indicated in the drawing of fig.2b, in which phase L3 causes local magnetic
saturation whereby the vectorial sum of the three currents would be non-null, should be avoided.
The same considerations also apply when the sensor is positioned near bends in the cabling.
It is recommended that the transformer be placed away from bends in the conductors).
L1 L1
L2 L3 L2 L3
Fig. 2a Fig. 2b Fig. 2c

Current balanced transformer Toroide.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 216

INSTALLATION
Amperometric inputs
The amperometric input circuits are assembled inside the fixed module, so no short circuit on the
secondary CT must be provided when the removable module is pulled out.
CAUTION In case of disconnection CT wiring to the case, pay attention must to do not open live circuits.
When making the current connections, attention must be paid to not exceeding the performance of
the line current transformers. To be exact, the total load, constituted by the NA60 protective relay,
any other protective relays or measuring instruments and the resistance of the connections, must
not exceed the line CT performance. In particular, consumption of the NA60 relay input circuit must
not exceed 0.2 VA while the load (expressed in VA) constituted by the conductors is given by:
0.018 × L × In 2 / S
where:
L the overall length, expressed in m, of the two conductors in relation to each phase;
In nominal current of the line CT expressed in A;
S cross sectional area of the current conductors expressed in mm2.
It is recommended that cabling of a suitable thickness be used in order to limit wear of the CT sec-
ondary circuits.
Binary inputs
The dry input circuits, despite being galvanically isolated, must preferably be supplied with the same
auxiliary voltage of the control panel.
The inputs are polarity free with wide voltage range.
+UAUX
A B A19
IN1
A20
-UAUX A21
IN2
A22
Binary inputs Binary-sch.ai
The optoisolated inputs are immune to transitory interferences, however the following recommenda-
tion must be considered in high disturbed environments:
• Position input wiring away from high energy sources.
• Set a debounce timer (tON and/or tOFF) to alloy the transient to decay.
• Use shielded cables with ground connection on only one end (preferably at the relay side.
Output relays
Six output relays are available.
It is advisable to verify that the technical characteristic of the contacts be suitable for the applied
load (about current, nominal voltage, make and break current , etc..).
Output relay K1 and K2 have one change over contacts (SPDT, type C).
Output relay K3 and K4 have one make contact (SPST-NO, type A) and a common reference (A10
terminal).
Output relay K5 and K6 have one make contact (SPST-NO, type A for K5), one break contact (SPST-
NC, type B for K6) and a common reference (A13 terminal).
All contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 217

INSTALLATION
USB port
The link from PC and local USB port must be established by means a L10042 cable.
After installation, the same communication port must be selected to define the ThyVisor parameters
(typically COM4, COM5,...).
Ethernet port
One RJ45 (copper) or FX (optics fiber) port may be provided.
Connections to the TX (RJ45) port must be made with shielded cable FTP Cat.5e category or higher.
For testing a PC may be directly connect to the Ethernet port (D1) on the rear side.
With TX interface a cross cable must be employed, while an Ethernet-optical fiber converter, suit-
able for 100 Mb data rate must be employed if an FX port is implemented.
TX connector (RJ45 copper)
shielded cable - FTP Cat.5e
FX connector (optical fiber)

RX
TX
ethernet-wiring.ai
The link must be enabled by means ThyVisor sw and USB connection:

• Set the IP address (Host IP address e IP net mask) in order that the Relè and PC parameters are
matched; the parameters are inside the Communication \ Ethernet submenu.
• Set to OFF the Autonegotiation parameter of NA10 device (Autonegotiation parameter inside
Communication \ Ethernet submenu).
For security reasons, a change of the Ethernet communication parameters become active only after
an hw reset.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 218

INSTALLATION
RS485 port
RS485 communication circuit connections must be made using screened twisted pair cable observ-
ing the polarities; screening must only be connected to the end terminating at the RS485 interface
circuit pertaining to the monitoring unit.
It is recommended to terminate the line at the extremities of the same; this must be performed on the
RS485 line control unit and on the NA60 device placed at the furthest point connecting the specially
provided resistor; termination can be made by means a jumper between the F2-F3 terminals.
Termination resistors allow adjusting the impedance of the line, reducing the influence of the induc-
tive components of the same, which might compromise good communication.
Pro-N Pro-N
K1 A3
A4
A5
K2 A6
C1
A7
C2
I L1 A8
OUTPUT RELAYS
C3 K3 A9
CURRENT INPUTS
C4
I L2
K4 A10
C5 A11
I L3 K5 A12
C6
K6 A13
C7
IE A14
C8
F1 F1
F2 F2
F3 F3
RS485
RS485
B- F4 B- F4
A+ F5 A+ F5
ETHERNET
A1 ≅ D1
UAUX
A2
SUPERVISION UNIT E1
THYBUS
RS485 B-
BLOCK OUT
BLOUT-
BLOCK IN
A17 A15
BLOUT+
120 Ω A18 A16
A+
A19
BINARY INPUTS
IN1 FRONT PANEL

A20
USB
A21
IN2
A22
RS485-wiring.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 219

INSTALLATION
Thybus port
In order to extend I/O capability, the Pro_N relays can be customized through external auxiliary mod-
ules; moreover 4...20 mA converter and temperature measuring modules are provided.
The modules do not need external auxiliary supply. It is fed directly by Thybus port.
The Thybus link must be carried out by means category 5 shielded cable with RJ45 connectors.
MRI
THYBUS INTPUT THYBUS OUTPUT
Pro_N
52
IN1
51
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 50 K1 5
IN2
49 6
A1 ≅ E1
THYBUS
UAUX 48 7
A2 IN3
47 11
K2
43
OUTPUT RELAYS
BINARY INPUTS
IN4
12
BLOCK OUT
BLOUT- 42 13
BLOCK IN
A17 A15
BLOUT+ OUTPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
INPUT ON 41
A18 A16 RUN IN5 K3 16
BUS
BUS
40
ON
MODULO 4 RELE’ + 8 INGRESSI DIGITALI 1 MID8 15

2
3
4
5
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI RUN MRI
4 RELAYS + 8 BINARY INPUTS MODULE
35 14
IN6
A19 34
22
BINARY INPUTS
IN1 FRONT PANEL 33 K4

A20 IN7 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 32 20
USB
A21
IN2 31
A22 IN8
30
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
3
PT8 MPT8 PT7 MPT7 PT6 MPT6 PT5 MPT5
MPT
THYBUS INPUT THYBUS OUTPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
RUN
BUS
ON
MODULO PT100
MPT
PT100 MODULE
PT1 MPT1 PT2 MPT2 PT3 MPT3 PT4 MPT4

6 PT1 PT8
49
7 MPT1 T1 T8 MPT8 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 8 47
PT2 PT7
11 44
MPT2 T2 T7 MPT7
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 12 43
13 42
PT3 PT6
15 40
MPT3 T3 T6 MPT6
16 39
17 38
PT4 PT5
OUTPUT INPUT ON
20 35
MPT4 T4 T5 MPT5
BUS 21 34
RUN
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI MID-16 22 33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
MID16
THYBUS INTPUT THYBUS OUTPUT
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
52 5
IN1 IN9
51 6
50 7
IN2 IN10
49 8
OUTPUT INPUT ON
48 11
BUS IN3 IN11
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI RUN
MID-16
47 12
43 13
BINARY INPUTS
IN4 IN12
42 14
41 15
IN5 IN13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 40 16
35 20
IN6 IN14
34 21
33 22
IN7 IN15
32 23
31 24
IN8 IN16
30 25
3
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 220

INSTALLATION
The maximum length of the Pro-N device - module link is:
• 2 m for MRI module (max one module)
• 20 m for MMOS-4 module (max one MMI module)
• 30 m for MID16 and MPT modules
• 30 m for MPT module (max one Pt100 module)
• 30 m for MCI module (max one current converter module)
For upgrading, that may be operated at any time with in service devices too, the following operations
must be performed:
• Turn OFF power supply
• Connect the auxiliary modules to the Thybus port in daisy chain mode following the INPUT-OUTPUT
sequence.[1]
If two MID16 (binary inputs) are installed, the hardware address must be set to avoid communication
collisions on the Thybus; for this purpose the default address must be changed on one module, by
means of dip-switch on the top circuit board (front plate must be removed).
default address modified address (2nd MID16 module)
8 1 8 1
OFF OFF
S1 ON S1 ON
MID16 hardware address setting DIP-MID16.ai
• Turn on power
• Go on to the sw setting (see SETTING section of instruction manual).
Note 1 The insertion order is free.

One MRI module, two MID16 modules, one MPT module, one MCI module and one MMI module (separate operator panel) can be connect at the
same time to the Thybus port (maximum expansion).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 221
INSTALLATION
Block circuits
Block circuits may be connected to equipment located in a different switchboard: For the aim of
reliability, it is recommended to use conductors having a cross sectional thickness of at least 1 mm2
and to not exceed 5 km in length. For connections that are particularly critical in terms of electro-
magnetic pollution, it is recommended to use BFO adaptor modules with fibre optic connection.
TRIP I>>
BLIN1
BLOUT1
BLIN1
TRIP I>> Block2 IPh TRIP I>>
BLIN1
BLOUT1
TRIP I>>
Any device
Logic selectivity with BFO Block-sch.ai
When devices without committed pilot wire circuits must be embedded (devices other than Pro_N),
or in the event that further I/O circuits are need, output relays and binary inputs can be customized
to work in the logic selectivity system together with the committed pilot wire circuits.
S1
TRIP I>>
PRO_N
A19
Uaux
BINARY INPUTS
A20
A21
A22
A17
BLOCK OUT
BLOUT-
BLOCK IN
A15
A18 BLOUT+
A16
BLIN1
S2 S3
BLOUT1
TRIP I>> TRIP I>> PRO_N
START I>> A15

BLOCK OUT
BLOUT-
BLOCK IN
A17
BLOUT+ A16
A18
A19
BINARY INPUTS
A20
A21
A22
Example for accelerated protection system with joint use of binary input and pilot wire links Block-misto.ai
A ring network example[1] is shown on the following pages.

Block out signals concerning the NA60 devices (S3.1, S3.2 e S3.3) are split on two isolated outputs by
means of MRB devices (B2.1, B2.2 and B2.3) to allow proper selectivity logic operation.
Nota 1 All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 222
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
B1 B2 B3
RX2 BFO TX1 RX2 BFO TX1 RX2 BFO TX1
FO B1.1 Cu FO B1.2 Cu FO B1.3 Cu
Cu FO Cu FO Cu FO
FO Cu FO Cu FO Cu
Cu FO Cu FO Cu FO
TX2 RX1 TX2 RX1 TX2 RX1
NA60 NA60 NA60 NA60 NA60 NA60
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
BLIN
S1.1 S2.1 S1.2 S2.2 S1.3 S2.3

67-67N 67-67N 67-67N 67-67N 67-67N 67-67N
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
BLOUT
MRB MRB MRB
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022

B1.1 B1.2 B1.3
BLOUT1
BLOUT2
BLOUT3
BLOUT1
BLOUT2
BLOUT3
BLOUT1
BLOUT2
BLOUT3
BLIN1
BLIN1
BLIN1
BLOUT BLOUT BLOUT
50-51 50-51 50-51

50N 50N 50N
NA10 NA10 NA10
S3.1 S3.2 S3.3
SWITCHGEAR 1 SWITCHGEAR 2 SWITCHGEAR 3
223
INSTALLATION
SWITCHGEAR 1 SWITCHGEAR 2 SWITCHGEAR 3
NA60 S1.1 NA60 S2.1 NA60 S1.2 NA60 S2.2 NA60 S1.3 NA60 S2.3
A16 A16 A16 A16 A16 A16
A15 A15 A15 A15 A15 A15
A18 A18 A18 A18 A18 A18
A17 A17 A17 A17 A17 A17
Accelerated logic example

NA10 S3.1 MRB B1.1 NA10 S3.2 MRB B1.2 NA10 S3.3 MRB B1.3
3 3 3
BLOUT1 BLOUT1 BLOUT1 4
4 4
A16 BLOUT+ 11 BLIN- A16 BLOUT+ 11 BLIN- A16 BLOUT+ 11 BLIN-

5 5 5
BLOUT2 BLOUT2 BLOUT2
A15 BLOUT- 12 BLIN+ A15 BLOUT- 12 BLIN+ 6 A15 BLOUT- 12 BLIN+ 6
6
A18 7 A18 7 A18 7

BLOUT3 8 BLOUT3 8 BLOUT3 8
A17 A17 A17
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022

BFO B1.1 BFO B1.2 BFO B1.3
RX2 20 RX2 20 RX2 20
OUT2 21 OUT2 21 OUT2 21
TX2 IN2+ 30 TX2 IN2+ 30 TX2 IN2+ 30

IN2- 29 IN2- 29 IN2- 29
RX1 22 RX1 22 RX1 22

OUT1 23 OUT1 23 OUT1 23
TX1 IN1+ 32 TX1 IN1+ 32 TX1 IN1+ 32

IN1- 31 IN1- 31 IN1- 31
224
6.4 NOMINAL CURRENT I n AND I En SETTING
Factory default settings:
• Nominal phase current In: 5 A
• Nominal residual current IEn: 1 A
To modify settings the plug-in module must be extracted from the case.
Turn off power supply before extracting or re-inserting the relay.

CAUTION If an attempting is made to insert a relay into an un-matching case, a mechanical code will prevent
full insertion. Demage can result if excessive force is applied.
The following operations must be performed:

• Remove the auxiliary supply
• Unplug the RS485 and RJ45 cables (Ethernet and/or Thybus).
• Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.
Removing tie to access the fastening screws Remove-tile.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 225

INSTALLATION
• Unscrew gradually back to back the four fastening screw in order avoid loss of the internal wash-
er.
Unmounting of the case from the switchboard is not needed.
Unmounting set-in.ai
• Split the MMI module and disconnect cable
Split MMI module from fixed module Split-MMI.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 226

INSTALLATION
• Pull out the removable module grabbing the metal handles.
Pull-out the module from the case extract.ai
• Lean out the module on the grounded surface[1],

• Set the dip-switches on the right-hand circuit board in accordance with the drawing shown be-
low,
Note 1 There are components present which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
When the module is removed, it is important to pay particular attention to avoid any accidental contact with the internal components.
In order to avoid the static electricity accumulated in the human body from causing damage, it is recommended to observe the following precautions:
- eliminate any potential differences between the human body and the device by touching the metallic case,
- avoid touching the printed circuit and connections (tracks, component terminals),
- avoid handing the device to others,
- set the programming DIPs by using antistatic tools.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 227
INSTALLATION
Amperometric inputs
1/5 A CTs
Dip-switch localization concerning the nominal current setting inside the CPU board set-in-0.ai
• Move dip-switches according the following layout.

IL1
IL2
IL3
IE
ETHERNET
5A Default settings:
S5 - In =5 A
1A - IEn =1 A
1 2 3 4
485
IL1
IL2
IL3
IE
5A Settings:
S5 - In =1 A
1A - IEn =1 A
1 2 3 4
IL1
IL2
IL3
IE
5A Settings:
S5 - In =1 A
1A - IEn =5 A
IL1
IL2
IL3
1 2 3 4
IE
5A
S5
IL1
IL2
IL3
1A
IE
1 2 3 4
5A Settings:
S5 - In =5 A
THYBUS
1A - IEn =5 A
1 2 3 4
Dip-switch localization concerning the nominal current setting inside the CPU board set-In.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 228

INSTALLATION
ThySensor inputs
To change the setting of nominal residual current relay 1 A (factory setting) the bridge X19 (card inputs) must
be inserted.
Selection jumper for rated residual current setting (Thysensor versions)
C16
T1
V9
V10
C21
C28
R32
C27
R31
R11
R12
C22
C32
R38
C31
R37
R5
C3
R6
C4
C7
C8
R27
R33
R1
R7
N1 N2
C20
R29
R35
R3
R9
C17
R30
R10
C18
R36
R4
C24
R25
C14
R26
C15
C23
R23
R24
R17
C11
R18
C12
C39
C36
R44
C35
R43
R22
C13
V4
V18
R13
R39
R19
V2
V1
N4 N3
V3
V17 R20
R15
R41
L15
X19
L16 R21
R47
R45 C19 X1
X19 Factory default:
R16
C37
R42
L18 L17
R46
C1
V6 V5
- IEn =1 A
V7
L1
X2 L19
V8
V12 V11 F1
L20
L21 L9
V13
F7
V15
X19 Setting>
V14
C25
C5
V16
R48
- IEn =5 A L3
F3
L11 F9
C29
F5
C9
L5
F11
L7
C33
L13
L8
C38 C40
Selection jumper for rated residual current setting (Thysensor versions)
• Reassemble all parts with the previous operations in reverse order.

• Reconnect the RS485 and RJ45 cables (Ethernet and/or Thybus).
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 229

INSTALLATION
6.5 LED ALLOCATION
Following indicator LEDs are available on the front panel:
• LED ON (green): if no diagnostic anomalies are detected, the green LED is turned ON while any fault
is highlighted by flashing.
• LEDs 1...5 (red) are freely assignable from the user to any protective and/or control functions.
• LED START (yellow) committed for start information of any protective functions.
• LED TRIP (red) committed for trip information of any protective functions.
50N-51N (IE>, IE>>) CB OPEN (52a)

50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>) CB CLOSED (52b)
79
Start
Trip
CB Open
CB Close
6.6 FINAL OPERATIONS
Before energizing the electric board, it is advisable to check that:

• The auxiliary voltage in the panel falls within the operative range of Pro_N relays.
• The rated current (1 A or 5 A) of the line CT’s corresponds to the setting of Pro_N relays.
• All wirings are correct.
• All screws are tightly screwed.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 230

INSTALLATION
7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS
All relay programming and adjustment operations may be performed through MMI (keyboard and
display) or using a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThyVisor software.
For safety reasons, a change of the following parameters become active only after an hw reset:
WARNING - Relay nominal frequency (fn)
- The changes become operational after the relay is turned off and on again.
7.1 SW ThyVisor
The ThyVisor sw is a “browser” of data (setting, measure, etc..); it implements an engine that is
afford to rebuild the menu set up and the relationships to data concerning all Thytronic protective
relays by means of XML files.
ThyVisor installation
The latest release of ThyVisor can be downloaded free of charge from the www.thytronic.it site
(Products - Software).[1]
ThyVisor use
Please refer to ThyVisor user manual for detailed instructions.
The document is available on www.thytronic.it (Product / Sotware / ThyVisor - Download area).
Note 1 Starting from the 3.5.9 release it is necessary to download and install not only the application setup but the Template setup also. In case off
updating download and install only the new release.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 231
SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface)
On the front panel there are eight buttons which allow the user to perform all the settings, reading
and modification operations.[1]
Led
CB Open
CB Close
The adjustment of the settings and the operation mode of the output relays must be performed while
the unit is electrically powered; the alphanumeric display shows the necessary information with
reference to the operations performed through the keyboard. One minute after the keyboard is not
more in use, the display backlight switches automatically to OFF.
All preset values are permanently stored in the nonvolatile memory.
The buttons take the following operations:
- (Up) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options
- (Down) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options
- (Left) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options
- (Right) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options
- (Enter) access to the selected menu with the option of modifying any given parameter
- (Reset) abort the current changes and/or accessing the previous menu
- Circuit breaker Open command
- Circuit breaker Close command
At power-up, the display shows the text:
“THYTRONIC
PRO-NA10-xxx-x serial number
date and time: (01/01/2000 00:00”
The ON green Led points out the auxiliary power supply voltage (permanent lighted) and possible
faults (blink lighted).
The display backlight is automatically activated when any key switch is set.
By means of the Up or Down buttons, it is possible to cyclically browse through the menu options:
READ, SET, COMMUNICATION, TEST
Having identified the sub-menu of interest, it is possible to gain access by using the Right button and
then analogously, run through the relevant options by using the Up or Down buttons.
The full menu tree and some examples are showed in the following pages (numerical values and
settings are pointed out as examples and does not agree with real situations.
Reading variables (READ)

All data (measure, settings, parameters, etc...) may be displayed:
“SERIAL NUMBER >>”
“INFO >>”
“MEASURES >>”
“ACTIVE PROFILE >>”
“PROTECTIONS >>”
“PLC >>”
“CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION >>”
“DELAYED INPUTS >>”
“INTERNAL STATES >>”
“RELAYS >>”
“PARTIAL COUNTERS >>”
“TOTAL COUNTERS >>”
“SELF-TEST >>”
“PILOT WIRE DIAGNOSTIC >>”
“SELECTIVE BLOCK BLOCK2 >>”
“FAULT RECORDING >>”
“EVENTS RECORDING >>”
Setting modifying (SET)
Note 1 Setting changes are enabled when the La mEnabling setting by MMI parameter is set
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 232
All changes in the setting parameters are carried out through MMI only if the Enable setting by MMI
parameter is ON. (ENABLE SETTING BY MMI submenu inside the SET menu).
To effect a change, having identified the parameter intended for change, the following procedure
must be performed:
• Select the parameter going through the menus by means the Up, Down and Right keys.
• Press the Enter button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the Enter button,
• Change the parameter by means the Up (increment) or Down (decrement) buttons,
• Press the Enter button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display,
• Press the Enter button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the Enter button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the START LED blinking points out the end of procedure; the changes become right now
active.
The abort command may be used to abandon changes (prior to use of the ENTER: YES); the same
effect is achieved by removing the auxiliary power supply to the relay.
As example, to set the operating mode of the K1 output relay as ENERGIZED, LATCHED, the following
procedure must be issued:
• By means Down button select the Set menu “SET >>”,
• Press the Right button to enter; the following submenu title i displayed: “BASE >>”
• Scroll menus by means Down button
“INPUTS >>”
“RELAYS >>”
“LEDS >>”
“SELF-TEST RELAY >>”
“MMI >>”
“PROFILE SELECTION >>”
“PROFILE A >>”
“PROFILE B >>”
“PLC >>”
“CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION 52 >>”
“CT SUPERVISION 74CT >>”
“REMOTE TRIPPING >>”
“PILOT WIRE DIAGNOSTIC >>”
“DEMAND MEASURES >>”
• Select the Set menu “RELAYS >>”, the “K1 relay Setpoints >>” message is displayed,
• Press the Right button to enter; the following messages are displayed:
“Logic DE-ENERGIZED Mode NO LATCHED”
• Press the Enter button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by the
both START and TRIP flashing.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the Enter button, (in our case on
the message “Logic DE-ENERGIZED”,
• Change the parameters by means the Up (increment) or Down (decrement) buttons, “Logic EN-
ERGIZED”,
• Press the Enter button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display, “Mode NO
LATCHED”,
• Change the parameters by means the Up (increment) or Down (decrement) buttons, “Mode
LATCHED”,
flashing),
The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 233

TEST
The operational tests with command of the selected output relays may be activated.
By means of Up or Down buttons it is possible to browse the main menu till the “TEST” message; to
enter you must press the Right button.[1]
The display message “Test state: OFF” shows the test state (OFF or test in progress).
• Test K2
• Test K3
• Test K4
• Test K5
• Test K6
As example, to start the test of K1, the following procedure must be issued:
• Select the Start test menu “Start test >>”.
• Press the Right button to start; the test in progress status is highlighted by activation of all LEDs,
• Come back by pressing the Left button and select the relay to be tested by means the Up or Down
buttons until the message “Test K1 >>” is displayed.
• Press the Right button to start the test.
• To terminate the test, it is necessary to select the “Stop test >>” message and press the
Right button to end the test. In any case the test will be automatically terminated after a delay of
one minute.
COMMUNICATION
Inside the COMMUNICATION menu it is possible to read/modify the setting data of the RS485 Proto-
col and Ethernet parameters.
By means of Up or Down buttons it is possible to browse the main menu till the “RS485 Protocol
>>” or “Ethernet parameters >>” message; to enter you must press the Right button.
As example, to select the address 12 for the ModBus protocol, the following procedure must be issued:
• Select the Communication menu “COMMUNICATION >>”.
• By means Down button select the “RS485 Protocol >>”.
• Press the Right button to enter; the following message is displayed:
“Protocol MODBUS”
“Address 1”
“9600 baud”
• Start the procedure to effect a change explained in the Setting modifying (SET) paragraph:
• Press the Enter button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by the
both START and TRIP flashing.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the Enter button, (in the example
on the 1 address),
• Change the parameters by means the Up (increment) button (up to 12 address),
• Press the Enter button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display,
flashing),
The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.
Note 1 Instantly all the relays are switched in rest state, including relays programmed as “normally energized”
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 234
Circuit breaker commands
By means of the Open command and Close command keys, the circuit breaker commands may be
issued.
The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Circuit Breaker supervision \
LEDs-relays allocation menu.
Enable / block changes via keyboard - Password
All parameters (measurements and settings) are available for reading from the operator panel
(MMI), while the setting changes are enabled or disabled depending on possible operation modes:
• Enable without password (factory setting)
• Enable with password
• Disabled
The choice of operation modes is possible only through ThyVisor operating at the session level 1:
• Connect the PC serial port to the relay socket on the RJ10 front panel
• Run the ThyVisor sw (the latest version latest version available on the site is recommended).
• Select the Preference - Session menu; when you start the session level is set to 0 as shown in
the bottom of the window
• Select the level 1. Prompted for a password (the default level1) to move to level 1. Confirm twice
with “OK”. (Level 1, as shown in the bottom of the window).
• Open the communication session by executing the menu command Communication - Open.
Verify that inside the modality box Serial and Automatic are selected
• ThyVisor will search automatically the relay from the template, regardless of what is selected in
the device family.
• Inside the Serial Configuration panel select the COM port (eg COM1, COM4 etc), give the Start
command and wait for the opening of the new window
• Save the file. Choose the location to save the file and give the Save command. The configuration
data of the relay are transferred to the PC (the progress bar is displayed from 0 ... 100%). A folder
on a yellow background with the name of the file is highlighted on the left side of the windows.
The serial connection is operative, at the bottom of the screen the word ON-LINE is highlighted
in green field.
• Select the Set \ MMI folder (MMI stands for Man-Machine-Interface = keyboard). On the right side
of the window (first row) select Parameter setting enable; with a “click” on the column value 3
options are available:
- OFF = keyboard enabled only for reading
- By password = keyboard enabled for reading and setting by means of password
- ON = keyboard enabled for reading and setting without password
To modify any parameter the calibration session must be open by means of Start setting command
from the menu or directly by clicking on F4 key. the opening of the session setting is highlighted by its
Programming state:Open on yellow field on the bottom bar. To save the monifiche it is necessary
to send the command from the menu “IED / close” or directly by clicking on F5 key.
Operation with Password

If the By password mode is selected a new menu password is inserted at the top of the display
menu.
• Press the Right key the: password not ok >> message is displayed and any changes of
parameters is disabled
• Press the Right key; you can enter the password page enter password where you are
prompted to enter the 4 characters password (the default password is 0000)
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom
• Change the parameters by means the Up (increment) or Down (decrement) buttons, using the Left
and Right keys to move to the previous or next character
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 235
• Press the Enter button; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps flashing),
• Press the Enter button for a few seconds; new message appears: Confirm settings?
• The message: password ok >> is displayed
• To exit from password menu use Left or Up keys: if you press the Right button you go back in the
password menu and the password must be entered. The parameter changes are enabled from the
keyboard. After any confirming with (Enter) or abandoning the change (reset button) the password
must be entered again.
• The possibility of modifying the parameters from the keyboard is automatically disabled after about
3 minutes elapsed without pressing any button. If you do not want to wait three minutes of waiting,
it must go back to the password menu and come out without input any data ( Left and Right until the
the message password not ok >> is displayed.
Changing the password
Changing the password is possible only after entering the correct password (password ok
>> message); press the Down key, a new menu is displayed change password that you
access with the Right key. Inside this menu the password can be changed.
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom
• Change the parameters by means the Up (increment) or Down (decrement) buttons, using the Left
and Right keys to move to the previous or next character
• Press the Enter button; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps flashing),
• Press the Enter button for a few seconds; new message appears: Confirm settings?
Lost password
If password is lost the data base of the device must be restored, proceed with the following steps:
• Activate the session level 1
• Send Set default settings command available inside the Command \ Default settings menu.
The command Set default settings restores the factory settings, all user- defined adjustments are cleared.
Be carefully to enter the correct parameter !
WARNING The device serial number should be set to avoid IP address conflicts for devices connected to the
Ethernet network.
Following the Set default settings command the password is reset to 0000.
7.3 MODULES MANAGEMENT

After installation, the modules must be enabled (working with level 1 session level).
The Thybus modules may be set inside the Procedure menu (or by means a click on the icon).
Following up any module configuration an automatic reset is issued and the I/O devices are included
inside the device menu. [1] When two MID16 modules are enabled, the hardware address must be
set; the dip-switch layout is showed inside the INSTALLATION section.
Note 1 Binary inputs and output names (ThyVisor):

Binary inputs for devices with two inputs onboard IN1, IN2 on board
Binary inputs for devices with five inputs onboard IN1...IN5 on board
Output relays K1...K6 on board
K7...K10 with MRI module
LEDs: ON, START, TRIP, L1...L5 on board
L6...L10 with MRI module
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 236
7.4 MAINTENANCE
The Pro-N relays do not require any particular maintenance; all circuits use high quality static com-
ponents, the subassembly products undergo dynamic checks on their functioning before the final
assembling of the complete equipment. The dedicated circuits and the firmware for the self-test
function continuously check the relay operation; the continuously operating auto-zeroing function
dynamically corrects the measuring errors due to offset, heat dependent drifts, aging of compo-
nents, etc. The processor is equipped with a watch-dog circuit which restores the correct operation
of the firmware in case of fault.
If the following criteria are properly implemented:
• comprehensive functional tests at commissioning,
• absence of significant modification on the protection system,
• activation and permanent remote control of self-test alarms through supervision,
• control of self-test undetectable failures (comparing of measures with the external instruments,
auxiliary voltage control, etc ..)
• analysis of the stored information (faults and events, and oscillographic records),
periodic checks can be avoided. In the absence of some of the criteria listed above, it is advisable to
perform periodic checks every five years.
7.5 REPAIR
No repair of possible faults by the client is foreseen; if following to any irregularity of operation, the
above tests confirm the presence of a fault, it will be necessary to send the relay to the factory for
the repair and the consequent settings and checks.
7.6 PACKAGING
The Pro-N devices must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative humidity should
not cause condensation or formation of frost.
It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-
cially in extreme climatic conditions, it is recommended that the device is supplied with power for
some hours before the commissioning, in order to bring the circuits to the rating conditions and to
stabilize the operation of the components.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 237

8 APPENDIX
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves
Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula, according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standards is:[1]
K
t = t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)α-1]
Where:
• t = operate time (in seconds)
• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting
K = coefficient:
• K = 0.14 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse)
• K = 13.5 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse)
• K = 80 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)
α = curve shape constant:

• α = 0.02 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse)
• α = 1 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse)
• α = 2 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)

• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In
Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 238
APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)
t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)0.02-1]
1000
t> inv = 60 s
100
t> inv = 10 s
t> inv = 5 s
10
t> inv = 1 s
t> inv = 0.5 s

1
t> inv = 0.2 s
t> inv = 0.1 s
0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s
0.01
I /I>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 700
F_51-IECA-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 239

APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)
t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 13.5
[(I/I> inv) -1]
1000
100
t> inv = 60 s
10
t> inv = 10 s
t> inv = 5 s
1
t> inv = 1 s
t> inv = 0.5 s

t> inv = 0.1 s
t> inv = 0.2 s
0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s
0.01
I /I>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 14.5
F_51-IECB-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 240

APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)
t [s]
100000
t =t> inv · 80
[(I/I> inv)2-1]
10000
1000
100
t> inv = 60 s
10
t> inv = 10 s
1 t> inv = 5 s
t> inv = 1 s
0.1
t> inv = 0.02 s t> inv = 0.1 s t> inv = 0.2 s t> inv = 0.5 s
0.01 I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51-IECC-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 241

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)
t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t E> inv ·
[(IE/IE> inv)0.02-1]
1000
t E>inv = 60 s
100
t E>inv = 10 s
t E>inv = 5 s
10
t E>inv = 1 s
t E>inv = 0.5 s
1
t E>inv = 0.2 s
t E>inv = 0.1 s
0.1 t E>inv = 0.02 s
0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 700
F_51N-IECA-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 242

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)
t [s]
10000
t =t E> inv · 13.5
[(IE/IE> inv) -1]
1000
100
t E>inv = 60 s
10
t E>inv = 10 s
t E>inv = 5 s
1
t E>inv = 1 s
t E>inv = 0.5 s
t E>inv = 0.1 s
t E>inv = 0.2 s
0.1 t E>inv = 0.02 s
0.01
I E /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE/IE>inv = 14.5
F_51N-IECB-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 243

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)
t [s]
100000 80
t =t E> inv ·
[(IE/IE> inv)2-1]
10000
1000
100
t E> inv = 60 s
10
t E> inv = 10 s
1 t E> inv = 5 s
t E> inv = 1 s
0.1
t E> inv = 0.02 s t E> inv = 0.1 s t E> inv = 0.2 s t E> inv = 0.5 s
0.01 IE /IE >inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE/IE>inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 244

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)
t [s]
10000 t =t PD> inv · 0.14
[(IPD/IPD> inv)0.02-1]
t =t PD>> inv · 0.14

[(IPD/IPD>> inv)0.02-1]
1000
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
100
t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 5 s
10 t PD>> inv = 5 s
t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s

1 t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
t PD> inv = 0.2 s

t PD>> inv = 0.2 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s

t PD>> inv = 0.1 s
t PD> inv = 0.02 s

0.1
t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
0.01 I PD/IPD>
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I PD/IPD>>
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IPD/IPD>inv = 700 or IPD/IPD>>inv = 700
F_67-IECA-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 245

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)
t [s]
10000
t =t PD> inv · 13.5
[(IPD/IPD> inv)-1]
t =t PD>> inv · 13.5

[(IPD/IPD>> inv)-1]
1000
100
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
10
t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 5 s
1
t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s

t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s

t PD>> inv = 0.1 s t PD> inv = 0.2 s
t PD>> inv = 0.2 s
0.1 t PD> inv = 0.02 s
t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
0.01 IPD /IPD>inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IPD /IPD>inv
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IPD/IPD>inv = 14.5 or IPD/IPD>>inv = 14.5
F_67-IECB-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 246

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)
t [s]
100000
t =t PD> inv · 80
[(IPD/IPD> inv)2-1]
t =t PD>> inv · 80
[(IPD/IPD>> inv)2-1]
10000
1000
100
t PD> inv = 60 s
10 t PD>> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 5 s
1
t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 1 s
0.1
t PD> inv = 0.02 s t PD> inv = 0.1 s t PD> inv = 0.2 s t PD> inv = 0.5 s
t PD>> inv = 0.02 s t PD>> inv = 0.1 s t PD>> inv = 0.2 s t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
IPD /IPD>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
IPD /IPD>>inv
1.1
F_67-IECC-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 247

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)
t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t ED> inv ·
[(IED/IED> inv)0.02-1]
t =t ED>> inv · 0.14

[(IED/IED>> inv)0.02-1]
1000
t ED> inv = 60 s
t ED>> inv = 60 s
100
t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED>> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 5 s
10 t ED>> inv = 5 s
t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED>> inv = 1 s
t ED> inv = 0.5 s

1 t ED>> inv = 0.5 s
t ED> inv = 0.2 s

t ED>> inv = 0.2 s
t ED> inv = 0.1 s

t ED>> inv = 0.1 s
t ED> inv = 0.02 s

0.1
t ED>> inv = 0.02 s
0.01 IED/IED>
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IED/IED>>
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 700 or IED/IED>>inv = 700
F_67N-IECA-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 248

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)
t [s]
10000
t =t ED> inv · 13.5
[(IED/IED> inv)-1]
t =t ED>> inv · 13.5

[(IED/IED>> inv)-1]
1000
100
t ED> inv = 60 s
t ED>> inv = 60 s
10
t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED>> inv = 10 s
t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED>> inv = 5 s
1
t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED>> inv = 1 s
t ED> inv = 0.5 s

t ED>> inv = 0.5 s
t ED> inv = 0.1 s

t ED>> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 0.2 s
t ED>> inv = 0.2 s
0.1 t ED> inv = 0.02 s
t ED>> inv = 0.02 s
0.01 IED /IED>inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IED /IED>inv
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 14.5 or IED/IED>>inv = 14.5
F_67N-IECB-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 249

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)
t [s]
100000
t =t ED> inv · 80
[(IED/IED> inv)2-1]
t =t ED>> inv · 80
[(IED/IED>> inv)2-1]
10000
1000
100
t ED> inv = 60 s
10 t ED>> inv = 60 s
t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED> inv = 5 s
1
t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED> inv = 1 s
0.1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s t ED> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 0.2 s t ED> inv = 0.5 s
t ED>> inv = 0.02 s t ED>> inv = 0.1 s t ED>> inv = 0.2 s t ED>> inv = 0.5 s
IED /IED>inv
0.01
IED /IED>>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_67-IECC-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 250

APPENDIX
8.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves
The mathematical formula, according the ANSI/IEEE standards is:[1]
K
t = t> inv · +L
[(I/I> inv)α-1]
Where:
K = coefficient:
• K = 0.01 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• K = 3.922 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• K = 5.64 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

• α = 0.02 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• α = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• α = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve
L = coefficient:
• L = 0.023 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• L = 0.098 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• L = 0.024 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 251
APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)
t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 0.01
+ 0.023
[(I/I> inv)0.02 -1]
1000
100
t> inv = 60 s
10
t> inv = 10 s
1 t> inv = 5 s
t> inv = 0.1 s t> inv = 1 s

t> inv = 0.5 s
t> inv = 0.2 s
0.1
t> inv = 0.02 s
0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51-ANSIMI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 252

APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)
t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(I/I> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t> inv = 60 s
t> inv = 10 s
1
t> inv = 0.02 s
t> inv = 0.1 s t> inv = 5 s
t> inv = 0.2 s
t> inv = 0.5 s
t> inv = 1 s
0.1
0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51-ANSIVI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 253

APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)
t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(I/I> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t> inv = 60 s
1
t> inv = 0.02 s
t> inv = 0.1 s
t> inv = 0.2 s t> inv = 10 s
t> inv = 0.5 s

t> inv = 5 s
t> inv = 1 s
0.1
0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51-ANSIEI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 254

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)
t [s]
10000 0.01
t =t E> inv · + 0.023
[(IE/IE> inv)0.02 -1]
1000
100
t E > inv = 60 s
10
t E > inv = 10 s
1 t E > inv = 5 s
t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 1 s

t E > inv = 0.5 s
t E > inv = 0.2 s
0.1
t E > inv = 0.02 s
0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 1.664
F_51N-ANSIMI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 255

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)
t [s]
10000
t =tE > inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(IE /IE > inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t E > inv = 60 s
t E > inv = 10 s
1
t E > inv = 0.02 s
t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 5 s
t E > inv = 0.2 s
t E > inv = 0.5 s
t E > inv = 1 s
0.1
0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51N-ANSIVI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 256

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)
t [s]
10000
t =t E> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(IE/IE> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t E > inv = 60 s
1
t E > inv = 0.02 s
t E > inv = 0.1 s
t E > inv = 0.2 s t E > inv = 10 s
t E > inv = 0.5 s

t E > inv = 5 s
t E > inv = 1 s
0.1
0.01
IE /IE >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51N-ANSIEI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 257

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)
t [s]
10000 0.01
t =tPD> inv · + 0.023
[(IPD/IPD> inv)0.02 -1]
t =tPD>> inv · 0.01

+ 0.023
[(IPD/IPD>> inv)0.02 -1]
1000
100
t PD> inv = 60 s
10 t PD>> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s
1 t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 5 s
t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 0.1 s
0.1
t PD> inv = 0.02 s t PD> inv = 0.2 s t PD> inv = 0.5 s

t PD>> inv = 0.02 s t PD>> inv = 0.2 s t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
IPD/IPD>inv
0.01
IPD/IPD>>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_67-ANSIMI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 258

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)
t [s]
10000
t =tPD> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(IPD/IPD> inv)2 -1]
t =tPD>> inv · 3.922

+ 0.092
[(IPD/IPD>> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 10 s
1 t PD> inv = 0.02 s t PD>> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 0.1 s t PD>> inv = 5 s
t PD> inv = 0.2 s
t PD>> inv = 0.2 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s
t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
t PD> inv = 1 s
0.1 t PD>> inv = 1 s
0.01 IPD/IPD>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IPD/IPD>>inv
1.1
F_67-ANSIVI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 259

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)
t [s]
10000 5.64
t =tPD> inv · + 0.024
[(IPD/IPD> inv)2 -1]
t =tPD>> inv · 5.64

+ 0.024
[(IPD/IPD>> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 60 s
1
t PD> inv = 0.02 s
t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 0.1 s t PD>> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 0.2 s
t PD>> inv = 0.2 s t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD> inv = 1 s t PD>> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
0.1
t PD> inv = 0.5 s
t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
IPD/IPD>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
IPD/IPD>>inv
1.1
F_67-ANSIEI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 260

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)
t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 0.01
+ 0.023
[(IED/IED> inv)0.02 -1]
1000
100
t ED> inv = 60 s
10
t ED> inv = 10 s
1 t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 0.5 s t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED> inv = 0.2 s

0.1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s
0.01
IED/IED>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 1.664
F_67N-ANSIMI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 261

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)
t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(IED/IED> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t ED> inv = 60 s
t ED> inv = 10 s
1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s
t ED> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED> inv = 0.2 s
t ED> inv = 0.5 s
t ED> inv = 1 s
0.1
0.01
IED/IED>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_67N-ANSIVI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 262

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)
t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(IED/IED> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t ED> inv = 60 s
1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s
t ED> inv = 0.1 s
t ED> inv = 0.2 s t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED> inv = 0.5 s

t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED> inv = 1 s
0.1
0.01
IED/IED>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_67N-ANSIEI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 263

APPENDIX
8.3 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time - RECTIFIER, I2t and EM curves
The mathematical formula for RECTIFIER, I-squared-t (I2t) and Electromechanical curves (EM) is:[1]
K
t = t>inv ·
A·(I/I> inv)α-B]
Where:

K = coefficient:
• K = 2351 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• K = 16 for I2t curve
• K = 0.28 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

• α = 5.6 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• α = 2 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• α = -1 for Electromechanical curve (EM)
A = coefficient:
• A = 1 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• A = 1 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• A = -0.236 for Electromechanical curve (EM)
B = coefficient:
• B = 1 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• B = 0 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• B = -0.339 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 264
APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Rectifier curves
t [s]
1000 000 2351
t =t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)5.6 -1]
100 000
10 000
1000
100 t> inv = 60 s
t> inv = 10 s
t> inv = 5 s
10
t> inv = 1 s
t> inv = 0.5 s
1
t> inv = 0.1 s
0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s
t> inv = 0.1 s
0.01
I /I >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51-RI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 265

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Rectifier curves
t [s]
1000 000
t =tPD> inv · 2351
[(IPD/IPD> inv)5.6 -1]
t =tPD>> inv · 2351

[(IPD/IPD>> inv)5.6 -1]
100 000
10 000
1000
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s
100
t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 5 s
t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s

10 t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
t PD> inv = 0.2 s

t PD>> inv = 0.2 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s

t PD>> inv = 0.1 s
1 t PD> inv = 0.02 s

t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
0.1
IPD/IPD>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 PD/IPD>>inv
I
1.1
F_67-RI-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 266

APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K)
t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 16
[(I/I> inv)2]
1000
100
10
t>inv = 60 s
t>>inv = 60 s
t>inv = 1 s
t>>inv = 1 s
1
t>inv = 0.5 s
t>>inv = 0.5 s
t>inv = 0.2 s
t>inv = 10 s
t>>inv = 0.2 s
t>>inv = 10 s
t>inv = 0.02 s t>inv = 5 s

t>>inv = 0.02 s t>>inv = 5 s
0.1
t>inv = 0.1 s
t>>inv = 0.1 s
I /I >inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I /I >>inv
1.1
F_51-I2t-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 267

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K)
t [s]
10000
t =tPD> inv · 16
[(IPD/IPD> inv)2]
t =tPD>> inv · 16
[(IPD/IPD>> inv)2]
1000
100
10
t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s
t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
1 t PD> inv = 0.2 s
t PD>> inv = 0.2 s
t PD> inv = 0.1 s

t PD>> inv = 0.1 s t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 5 s
0.1
t PD> inv = 0.02 s

t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
0.01
IPD/IPD>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IPD/IPD>>inv
1.1
F_67-I2t-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 268

APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)
t [s]
10000
t =t> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (I/I> inv)-1+ 0.339]
1000
100
t> inv = 60 s
10 t> inv = 10 s
t> inv = 5 s
1
t> inv = 1 s
t> inv = 0.5 s
t> inv = 0.02 s t> inv = 0.2 s

t> inv = 0.1 s
0.1
0.01
2 3 4 5 6
I /I>inv
7 8 9 10 20
1.1
F_51-EM-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 269

APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)
t [s]
10000
t =tE > inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (IE /IE > inv)-1+ 0.339]
1000
100
t E > inv = 60 s
10 t E > inv = 10 s
t E > inv = 5 s
1
t E > inv = 1 s
t E > inv = 0.5 s
t E > inv = 0.02 s t E > inv = 0.2 s

t E > inv = 0.1 s
0.1
0.01
2 3 4 5 6
IE /IE >inv
7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 4
F_51N-EM-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 270

APPENDIX
Phase directional overcurrent 67 - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)
t [s]
10000 0.28
t =t> inv ·
[-0.236 · (I/I> inv)-1+ 0.339]
t =t>> inv · 0.28

[-0.236 · (I/I>> inv)-1+ 0.339]
1000
100
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
10 t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s
t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 5 s
1 t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s

t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
t PD> inv = 0.2 s

t PD> inv = 0.1 s t PD>> inv = 0.2 s
t PD>> inv = 0.1 s
0.1
t PD> inv = 0.02 s

t PD>> inv = 0.02 s
IPD/IPD>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IPD/IPD>>inv
20
1.1
F_67-EM-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 271

APPENDIX
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)
t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (IED/IED> inv)-1+ 0.339]
t =tED>> inv · 0.28

[-0.236 · (IED/IED>> inv)-1+ 0.339]
1000
100
t ED> inv = 60 s
t ED>> inv = 60 s
10 t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED>> inv = 10 s
t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED>> inv = 5 s
1 t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED>> inv = 1 s
t ED> inv = 0.5 s

t ED>> inv = 0.5 s
t ED> inv = 0.2 s

t ED> inv = 0.1 s t ED>> inv = 0.2 s
t ED>> inv = 0.1 s
0.1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s

t ED>> inv = 0.02 s
IED/IED>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IED/IED>>inv
20
1.1
F_67N-EM-Char.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 272

APPENDIX
8.4 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram
NA60
K1 A3
B1 A4
UL1 A5
B2 K2 A6
B3 A7
OUTPUT RELAYS
UL2 A8
VOLTAGE INPUTS
D1
B4 K3 A9
B5
K4 A10
A1 UL3
A2
C1 C2 B6 A11
A3 F1
K5 A12
A4 RX F2 B7
A5 F3
UE A13
A6 TX F4 K6
A7 F5 B8
A8 C3 C4 A14
A9 B1
A10 B2
A11 B3
A12 B4
A13 B5
A14 C5 C6 B6
A15 B7 C1
A16 B8
IL1
A17
A18 C2
F1
A19
C3
C7 C8
F2
CURRENT INPUTS
A20
RS485
A21 IL2
F3
A22 C4 B-
F4
E1
C5 A+
F5
IL3
C6
C7
ETHERNET
IE
C8 D1
THYBUS
A1 ≅ E1
UAUX
A2
BLOCK OUT
BLOCK IN
A17 BLOUT-
A15
BLOUT+
A18 A16
BINARY INPUTS
A19
IN1 FRONT PANEL
A20
USB
A21
IN2
A22
I/O for version with traditional CT and VT inputs NA60-I-O.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 273

APPENDIX
NA60
K1 A3
A4
A5
K2 A6
IL1-UL1 A7
A8
ThySensor INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
K3 A9
IL2-UL2
K4 A10
A11
IL3-UL3 K5 A12
K6 A13
A14
D1
F1
RS485 F2
A1
F3
Residual current
A2
B-
A3
C1 C2
F1
C1 F4
INPUT
A+
A4 RX F2
IE F5
A5 F3 C2
A6 TX F4
A7 F5
A8
A9 B1
ETHERNET
A10 B2
A11 B3
A12 B4 D1
A13 B5
A14 B6
A15 L1 B7
A16 B8
A17
A18 L2
A1 ≅
THYBUS
A19
UAUX E1
A20
A21 L3
A2
A22
BLOCK OUT
E1
BLOCK IN
BLOUT-
A17 A15
BLOUT+
A18 A16
A19
BINARY INPUTS
IN1
A20
USB
A21
IN2
A22
I/O circuits for versions with ThySensor inputs
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 274

APPENDIX
8.5 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces
F1
F2
RS485
F3
B- F4 Supervision
A+ F5 unit
ETHERNET
D1
HUB
THYBUS
E1 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
OUTPUT INPUT
N.8 Pt100
RUN
BUS
ON
MODULO PT100
MPT
PT100 MODULE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
OUTPUT INPUT
N.16 binary inputs
RUN
BUS
ON
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI MID16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
N.8 binary inputs

+ 4 output relay
OUTPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
INPUT ON
RUN
BUS
BUS
ON
MODULO 4 RELE’ + 8 INGRESSI DIGITALI MID8

1
2
3
4
5
MODULO INGRESSI REMOTI RUN MRI

4 RELAYS + 8 BINARY INPUTS MODULE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FRONT PANEL
USB
Interfaces.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 275

APPENDIX
8.6 APPENDIX B3- Connection diagrams
Note: Some typical connection diagram are shown.
All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications.
For all diagrams the output contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference.
L1
L2 BUSBAR
L3
Note: Raf - antiferrorisonance NA60
dn da
dn db B7
Raf UE
dn dc 59N
B8
A N n a B1
B N n b UL1
B2
C N n c
B3
UL2
B4
B5 27
UL3
B6
59
74VT
67
49
P1 C1
50/51
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2 74CT
C3 50BF
IL2
C4
C5
IL3
C6
P1 C7
OPERATION (*)
S1
IE 50N/51N 67N
S2 C8
P2
BINARY INPUTS
CB position
LINE SIDE (**)

PROTECTION(*):
- Operation for 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0°... 90° or 270°...359° ranges
- Operation for 67N elements with isolated neutral and characteristic angle = 90°
MEASURES(**):
- Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load
- Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators
Three phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT NA60-SCH.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 276

APPENDIX
L1
L2 BUSBAR
L3
Note: Raf -antiferrorisonance NA60
dn da
dn db B7
Raf UE
dn dc 59N
B8
A N n a B1
B N n b UL1
B2
C N n c
B3
UL2
B4
B5 27
UL3
B6
59
74VT
67
49
P1 C1
50/51
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2 74CT
C3 50BF
IL2
C4
C5
IL3
C6
P1 C7
OPERATION (*)
S1
IE 50N/51N 67N
S2 C8
P2
BINARY INPUTS
CB position
LINE SIDE (**)
PROTECTION(*):
MEASURES(**):
Two phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT NA60-SCH2.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 277

APPENDIX
L1
L2 BUSBAR
L3
NA60
Note: Raf - antiferrorisonance
dn da
dn db B7
Raf UE
dn dc 59N
B8
A N n a B1
B N n b UL1
B2
C N n c
B3
UL2
B4
B5 27
UL3
B6
59
74VT
67
49
P1 C1
50/51
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2 74CT
C3 50BF
IL2
C4
C5
IL3
C6
C7
OPERATION (*)
IE 50N/51N 67N
C8
BINARY INPUTS
CB position
LINE SIDE (**)
PROTECTION(*):
MEASURES(**):
Three phase CTs and residual current from common return of phase CTs (Holmgreen) NA60-SCH4.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 278

APPENDIX
L1
L2 BUSBAR
L3
NA60
B7
UE
B8
B1
UL1
B2
B3
UL2
B4
B5 27
UL3
B6
59
74VT
67
49
P1 C1
50/51
S1
IL1
S2 C2
P2 74CT
C3 50BF
IL2
C4
C5
IL3
C6
P1 C7
OPERATION (*)
S1
IE 50N/51N
S2 C8
P2
BINARY INPUTS
CB position
LINE SIDE (**)
PROTECTION(*):
MEASURES(**):
Direct connection of the input voltages (UR = 400 V version) NA60-SCH5.ai
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 279

APPENDIX
8.7 APPENDIX C - Dimensions
FRONT VIEWS REAR VIEWS

128.5
107 120 101 ø 4.5 110
D1 D1
A1 A1
A2 A2
ø 4.5
C1 C2 C1 C2
A3 F1 A3 F1
A4 RX F2 A4 RX F2
A5 F3 A5 F3
A6 TX F4 A6 TX F4
A7 F5 A7 F5
A8 C3 C4 A8 C3 C4
A9 B1 A9 B1
A10 B2 A10 B2
177
171
149
200
168
A11 B3 A11 B3
A12 B4 A12 B4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START
A13 B5 A13 B5
80
TRIP TRIP A14 C5 C6 B6 A14 C5 C6 B6

A15 B7 A15 B7
A16 B8 A16 B8
A17 A17
A18 A18
A19 A19
A20 C7 C8 A20 C7 C8
A21 A21
A22 A22
31
E1 E1
20
FLUSH MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING FLUSH MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING
(Separate operator panel)
SIDE VIEWS
212.5 275
25 15
205 30 5 30 ø 4.5
170
FLUSH MOUNTING SEPARATE PROJECTING MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING

OPERATOR PANEL (Separate operator panel) (Stand alone)
RACK MOUNTING FLUSH MOUNTING CUTOUT

482.6 102.5 ±0.3
465 70
177 (4U)
161
101.6
154
ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START ON 1 2 3 4 5 START
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
N.4 holes ø 3.5
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 280

APPENDIX
8.8 APPENDIX D - Setting table
Note The 26 element, the output relay and LEDs K7...K10, L6...L10 and the binary input IN3...IN42 settings are available only when the concerning I/O
circuits are implemented (MPT, MRI and MID16 modules on Thybus)
Description Parameter Unit Setting range

Set
Base
Relay reference name
Relay nominal frequency - fn Hz 50 ... 60 step = 10
Relay phase nominal current - In 1A|5A
Relay residual nominal current - IEn 1A|5A
V 50 ... 130 step = 1
Relay nominal voltage ( phase to phase ) - Un
200 ... 520 step = 1
Relay nominal voltage ( phase to ground ) - En = Un / 1.73
Relay residual nominal voltage ( direct measurement ) - UEn V 50 ... 130 step = 1
Relay residual nominal voltage ( calculated measurement )
- UECN = 1.73 * Un = 3 * En
Relay nominal active power - Pn = 1.73 * Un * In = 3 * En * In
Relay nominal reactive power - Qn = 1.73 * Un * In = 3 * En * In
Relay nominal apparent power - Sn = 1.73 * Un * In = 3 * En
* In
A 1 ... 499 step = 1
Phase CT primary nominal current - Inp 500 ... 4990 step = 10
5000 ... 10000 step = 100
A 1 ... 499 step = 1
Residual CT primary nominal current - IEnp 500 ... 4990 step = 10
5000 ... 10000 step = 100
V 50 ... 499 step = 1
500 ... 4990 step = 10
Line VT primary nominal voltage ( phase to phase ) - Unp
5000 ... 49900 step = 100
50000 ... 500000 step = 1000
V 50 ... 499 step = 1
500 ... 4990 step = 10
Residual primary nominal voltage ( phase to phase ) * 1.73 - UEnp
5000 ... 49900 step = 100
50000 ... 500000 step = 1000
Measurements reading mode RELATIVE | PRIMARY
Language English | Turkish | Russian
Inputs
Binary input IN1
IN1
Logic Active-ON | Active-OFF
IN1 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN1 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Reset LEDs | Set profile | Fault trigger | Block2
IPh/IE | Block2 IPh | Block2 IE | Block1 | TCS1
| TCS2 | Trip ProtExt | Reset counters | Reset
IN1 matching CB Monitor | 52a | 52b | Open CB | Close CB |
Preset DTheta | Remote trip | MCB VT OPEN |
Reset on demand measures | Reset on energy
measures | 74VT ext. | None
Binary input IN2
IN2
IN2 tON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 281

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN2 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN3
IN3
IN3 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN3 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN4
IN4
IN4 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN4 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN5
IN5
IN5 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN5 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 282

APPENDIX
Binary input IN6
IN6
IN6 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN6 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN7
IN7
IN7 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN7 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN8
IN8
IN8 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN8 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN9
IN9
IN9 tON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 283

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN9 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN10
IN10
IN10 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN10 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN11
IN11
IN11 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN11 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN12
IN12
IN12 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN12 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 284

APPENDIX
Binary input IN13
IN13
IN13 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN13 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN14
IN14
IN14 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN14 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN15
IN15
IN15 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN15 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN16
IN16
IN16 tON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 285

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN16 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN17
IN17
IN17 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN17 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN18
IN18
IN18 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN18 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN19
IN19
IN19 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN19 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 286

APPENDIX
Binary input IN20
IN20
IN20 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN20 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN21
IN21
IN21 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN21 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN22
IN22
IN22 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN22 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN23
IN23
IN23 tON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 287

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN23 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN24
IN24
IN24 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN24 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN25
IN25
IN25 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN25 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN26
IN26
IN26 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN26 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 288

APPENDIX
Binary input IN27
IN27
IN27 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN27 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN28
IN28
IN28 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN28 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN29
IN29
IN29 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN29 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN30
IN30
IN30 tON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 289

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN30 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN31
IN31
IN31 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN31 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN32
IN32
IN32 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN32 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN33
IN33
IN33 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN33 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 290

APPENDIX
Binary input IN34
IN34
IN34 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN34 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN35
IN35
IN35 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN35 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN36
IN36
IN36 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN36 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN37
IN37
IN37 tON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 291

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN37 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN38
IN38
IN38 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN38 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN39
IN39
IN39 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN39 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN40
IN40
IN40 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN40 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 292

APPENDIX
Binary input IN41
IN41
IN41 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN41 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Binary input IN42
IN42
IN42 tON
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IN42 tOFF
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Relays
K1
Logic De-energized | Energized
Operation MODE No-latched | Pulse | Latched
Minimum pulse width ms 0 ... 500 step = 5
K2
K3
K4
K5
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 293

APPENDIX
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
LEDs
START
Type No-latched | Latched
TRIP
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
Analog outputs
Current loop 1
Loop1-Mis Frequency | IL1 | IL2 | IL3 | IE | IL | UL1 | UL2 |
Loop 1 Measure assigned UL3 | UE | UL | U12 | U23 | U31 | UEC | U | I1 |
I2 | U2 | PLC | None
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 294
APPENDIX
Loop1-Range 0-2 mA | 0-4 mA | 0-5 mA | 1-5 mA | 0-6 mA |
Loop 1 Output range
1-6 mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Loop 1 Sign Loop1-Sign Unipolar | Bipolar
Loop 1 Nominal multiplier Loop1-M 0.01 ... 100.00 step = 0.01
Current loop 2
Loop 2 Output range
1-6 mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Current loop 3
Loop 3 Output range
1-6 mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Current loop 4
Loop 4 Output range
1-6 mA | 0-10 mA | 4-20 mA
Self-test Relay
MINOR Fail alarm NO | YES
Self-test relay K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
MMI
Modules data visualization Assigned modules | All modules
Profile selection
Active profile A | B | By INPUT
Profile A
Base current IB
Base current IB In 0.10 ... 2.50 step = 0.01
PT1 Probe
ThAL1 Alarm
ThAL1 Enable ThAL1 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT1 Alarm threshold ThAL1 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
ThAL1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL1 Alarm relays ThAL1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
ThAL1-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
ThAL1 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>1 Trip
Th>1 Enable Th>1 Enable OFF | ON
26 PT1 Trip threshold Th>1 ^C 0 ... 200 step = 1
Th>1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>1 Breaker failure Th>1BF OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 295

APPENDIX
Th>1 Trip relays Th>1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Th>1-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Th>1 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT2 Probe
ThAL2 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL2 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>2 Trip
Th>2 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>2 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT3 Probe
ThAL3 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL3 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>3 Trip
Th>3 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>3 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT4 Probe
ThAL4 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL4 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>4 Trip
Th>4 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 296

APPENDIX
Th>4 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT5 Probe
ThAL5 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL5 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>5 Trip
Th>5 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>5 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT6 Probe
ThAL6 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL6 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>6 Trip
Th>6 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>6 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT7 Probe
ThAL7 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL7 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>7 Trip
Th>7 Operating time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 297

APPENDIX
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>7 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT8 Probe
ThAL8 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL8 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>8 Trip
Th>8 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>8 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Diagnostic
PT100 probe diagnostic relays PT100Diag-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
PT100Diag-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
PT100 probe diagnostic LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Undervoltage - 27
Voltage measurement type for 27 - phase to phase/pha- Utype27 Uph-ph | Uph-n
se to neutral
27 Operating logic Logic27 OR | AND
U< Element
Setpoints
U< Enable U< Enable OFF | ON
U< Curve type U<Curve INVERSE | DEFINITE
U< Logical block U<BLK1 OFF | ON
U< Breaker failure U<BF OFF | ON
U< Start relays U<ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U< Trip relays U<TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U<ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U< Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U<TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U< Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
27 First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
Pickup value Un 0.05 ... 1.10 step = 0.01
U<def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Inverse time
27 First threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 298

APPENDIX
tU<inv s 0.10 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
U<inv Operating time
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
U<< Element
Setpoints
U<< Logical block U<<BLK1 OFF | ON
U<< Breaker failure U<<BF OFF | ON
U< Disabling by U<< start U<disbyU<< OFF | ON
U<< Start relays U<<ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U<< Trip relays U<<TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U<<ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U<< Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U<<TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U<< Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
27 Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
U<<def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Thermal image - 49
Initial thermal image DthIN DThetaB 0.0 ... 1.0 step = 0.1
Reduction factor at inrush KINR 1.0 ... 3.0 step = 0.1
Thermal time constant T min 1 ... 200 step = 1
DthCLP Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
DthCLP Operating mode
setting
DthCLP Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
49 Second harmonic restraint Dth2ndh-REST OFF | ON
DthAL1 Element
DthAL1 Enable DthAL1 Enable OFF | ON
49 First alarm threshold DthAL1 DThetaB 0.3 ... 1.0 step = 0.1
DthAL1 Logical block DthAL1BLK1 OFF | ON
DthAL1 Input selective block DthAL1BLK2IN OFF | ON
DthAL1 Output selective block DthAL1BLK2OUT OFF | ON
DthAL1 Internal selective block DthAL1BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
DthAL1 Alarm relays DthAL1-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
DthAL1-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
DthAL1 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
DthAL2 Element
49 Second alarm threshold DthAL2 DThetaB 0.5 ... 1.2 step = 0.1
DthAL2 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Dth> Element
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 299

APPENDIX
Dth> Enable Dth> Enable OFF | ON
49 Trip threshold Dth> DThetaB 1.2 ... 1.2 step = 0.1
Dth> Logical block Dth>BLK1 OFF | ON
Dth> Input selective block Dth>BLK2IN OFF | ON
Dth> Output selective block Dth>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
Dth> Internal selective block Dth>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
Dth> Breaker failure Dth>BF OFF | ON
Disabling Dth> by 50-51 start Dth>disby50-51 OFF | ON
Dth> Trip relays Dth>-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Dth>-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Dth> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I> Element
Setpoints
I> Enable I> Enable OFF | ON
I>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
I> Curve type | ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t
| EM | DEFINITE
ICLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
ICLP> Mode
setting
ICLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Logical block I>BLK1 OFF | ON
I> Input selective block I>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I> Output selective block I>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I> Internal selective block I>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
I> Second harmonic restraint I>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I> Breaker failure I>BF OFF | ON
I> Start relays I>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I> Trip relays I>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
ICLP>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>def within CLP
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
I>def Operating time
s 0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
50/51 First threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 300

APPENDIX
ICLP>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
t>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
I>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
I>> Element
Setpoints
I>> Enable I>> Enable OFF | ON
I>> Curve type I>>Curve I2t | DEFINITE
ICLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
ICLP>> Mode
setting
ICLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Logical block I>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>> Input selective block I>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>> Output selective block I>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>> Internal selective block I>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
I>> Second harmonic restraint I>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>> Breaker failure I>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>> start I>disbyI>> OFF | ON
I>> Start relays I>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>> Trip relays I>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
ICLP>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
ICLP>>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
I>>inv Operating time t>>inv s 0.02 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
I>>> Element
Setpoints
I>>> Enable I>>> Enable OFF | ON
ICLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
ICLP>>> Mode
setting
ICLP>>> Activation time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 301

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Logical block I>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>>> Input selective block I>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>>> Output selective block I>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>>> Internal selective block I>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
I>>> Second harmonic restraint I>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>>> Breaker failure I>>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>>> start I>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>> Disabling by I>>> start I>>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>>> Start relays I>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>> Trip relays I>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
ICLP>>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE> Element
Setpoints
IE> Enable IE> Enable OFF | ON
IE>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IE> Curve type
| ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | EM | DEFINITE
IECLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IECLP> Mode
setting
IECLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE> Logical block IE>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE> Input selective block IE>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE> Output selective block IE>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE> Internal selective block IE>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IE> Second harmonic restraint IE>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE> Breaker failure IE>BF OFF | ON
IE> Start relays IE>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE> Trip relays IE>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 302

APPENDIX
IE>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50N/51N First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>def Operating time
s 0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>inv IEn 0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
tE>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IE>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Element
Setpoints
IE>> Enable IE>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IECLP>> Mode
setting
IECLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Logical block IE>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>> Input selective block IE>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>> Output selective block IE>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>> Internal selective block IE>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IE>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>> Breaker failure IE>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>> start IE>disbyIE>> OFF | ON
IE>> Start relays IE>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>> Trip relays IE>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IE>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 303

APPENDIX
IE>>> Element
Setpoints
IE>>> Enable IE>>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IECLP>>> Mode
setting
IECLP>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>>> Logical block IE>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>>> Input selective block IE>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>>> Output selective block IE>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>>> Internal selective block IE>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IE>>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>>> Breaker failure IE>>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>>> Start relays IE>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>> Trip relays IE>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IE>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Overvoltage - 59
se to neutral
U> Element
Setpoints
U> Enable U> Enable OFF | ON
U> Curve type U>Curve INVERSE | DEFINITE
U> Logical block U>BLK1 OFF | ON
U> Breaker failure U>BF OFF | ON
U> Start relays U>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U> Trip relays U>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 304

APPENDIX
U>def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
tU>inv s 0.10 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
U>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
U>> Element
Setpoints
U>> Logical block U>>BLK1 OFF | ON
U>> Breaker failure U>>BF OFF | ON
U> Disabling by U>> start U>disbyU>> OFF | ON
U>> Start relays U>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U>> Trip relays U>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
U>>def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Residual voltage measurement type for 59N - direct/cal- 3VoType59N UE | UEC
culated
59N Operation from 74VT internal 74VTint59N OFF | Block
59N Operation from 74VT external 74VText59N OFF | Block
UE> Element
Setpoints
UE> Enable UE> Enable OFF | ON
UE> Curve type UE>Curve INVERSE | DEFINITE
UE> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
UE> Logical block UE>BLK1 OFF | ON
UE> Breaker failure UE>BF OFF | ON
UE> Start relays UE>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE> Trip relays UE>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
UE>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
59N First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
Pickup value UEn 0.01 ... 0.70 step = 0.01
UE>def Operating time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 305

APPENDIX
s 0.07 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Inverse time
59N First threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
tUE>inv s 0.10 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
UE>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
UE>> Element
Setpoints
UE>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
UE>> Logical block UE>>BLK1 OFF | ON
UE>> Enable UE>>BF OFF | ON
UE> Disabling by UE>> start UE>disbyUE>> OFF | ON
UE>> Start relays UE>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE>> Trip relays UE>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
UE>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
59N Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
UE>>def Operating time
s 0.07 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Directional phase overcurrent - 67
67 Operating mode Mode67 I | I*cos
67 Operating logic Logic67 1/3 | 2/3
67 Operation from 74VT internal 74VTint67 OFF | Block | Not directional
67 Operation from 74VT external 74VText67 OFF | Block | Not directional
IPD> Element
Setpoints
IPD> Enable IPD> Enable OFF | ON
IPD>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IPD> Curve type | ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t
| EM | DEFINITE
IPDCLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD> Logical block IPD>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD> Input selective block IPD>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD> Output selective block IPD>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD> Internal selective block IPD>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD> Second harmonic restraint IPD>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 306

APPENDIX
IPD> Breaker failure IPD>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Start relays IPD>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD> Trip relays IPD>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>def characteristic angle ThetaP>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>def Operating time
s 0.05 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IPD>inv characteristic angle ThetaP>inv gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tPD>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IPD>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IPD>> Element
Setpoints
IPD>> Enable IPD>> Enable OFF | ON
IPD>>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IPD>> Curve type | ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t
| EM | DEFINITE
IPDCLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP>> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>> Logical block IPD>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD>> Input selective block IPD>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD>> Output selective block IPD>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD>> Internal selective block IPD>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD>> Second harmonic restraint IPD>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD>> Breaker failure IPD>>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Disabling by IPD>> start IPD>disbyIPD>> OFF | ON
IPD>> Start relays IPD>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>> Trip relays IPD>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 307

APPENDIX
IPD>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>def characteristic angle ThetaP>>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>def Operating time
s 0.05 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
67 Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IPD>>inv characteristic angle ThetaP>>inv gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tPD>>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IPD>>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>> Element
Setpoints
IPD>>> Enable IPD>>> Enable OFF | ON
IPDCLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP>>> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>> Logical block IPD>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD>>> Input selective block IPD>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD>>> Output selective block IPD>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD>>> Internal selective block IPD>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD>>> Second harmonic restraint IPD>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD>>> Breaker failure IPD>>>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Disabling by IPD>>> start IPD>disbyIPD>>> OFF | ON
IPD>> Disabling by IPD>>> start IPD>>disbyIPD>>> OFF | ON
IPD>>> Start relays IPD>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>> Trip relays IPD>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67 Third threshold definite time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 308

APPENDIX
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>def characteristic angle ThetaP>>>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IPD>>>> Element
Setpoints
IPD>>>> Enable IPD>>>> Enable OFF | ON
IPDCLP>>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP>>>> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP>>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>> Logical block IPD>>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Input selective block IPD>>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Output selective block IPD>>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Internal selective block IPD>>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD>>>> Second harmonic restraint IPD>>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Breaker failure IPD>>>>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Disabling by IPD>>>> start IPD>disIPD>>>> OFF | ON
IPD>> Disabling by IPD>>>> start IPD>>disIPD>>>> OFF | ON
IPD>>> Disabling by IPD>>>> start IPD>>>disIPD>>>> OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Start relays IPD>>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>>> Trip relays IPD>>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67 Fourth threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>>def characteristic angle ThetaP>>>>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N
67N Operating mode Mode67N I | I*cos
culated
67N Insensitive zone Insens-Zone OFF | ON
67N Multiplier of thresholds for insensitive zone M 1.5 ... 10.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 309
APPENDIX
67N Operation from 74VT internal 74VTint67N OFF | Block | Not directional
67N Operation from 74VT external 74VText67N OFF | Block | Not directional
IED> Element
Setpoints
IED> Enable IED> Enable OFF | ON
IED>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IED> Curve type
IEDCLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED> Logical block IED>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED> Input selective block IED>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED> Output selective block IED>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED> Internal selective block IED>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED> Breaker failure IED>BF OFF | ON
IED> Start relays IED>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED> Trip relays IED>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Residual current pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Residual voltage pickup value UEn 0.004 ... 0.500 step = 0.001
Characteristic angle gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
Half operating sector gr 1 ... 180 step = 1
IEDCLP>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>def Operating time
s 0.05 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>inv IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
tED>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IED>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IED>> Element
Setpoints
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 310

APPENDIX
IED>> Enable IED>> Enable OFF | ON
IED>>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IED>> Curve type
IEDCLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP>> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>> Logical block IED>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED>> Input selective block IED>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED>> Output selective block IED>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED>>>> Internal selective block IED>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED>> Breaker failure IED>>BF OFF | ON
IED> Disabling by IED>> start IED>disbyIED>> OFF | ON
IED>> Start relays IED>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>> Trip relays IED>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Inverse time
Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>inv IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>>>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IED>>inv Operating time tED>>inv s 0.02 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>> Element
Setpoints
IED>>> Enable IED>>> Enable OFF | ON
IEDCLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP>>> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 311

APPENDIX
IED>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>> Logical block IED>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED>>> Input selective block IED>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED>>> Output selective block IED>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED> Internal selective block IED>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED>>> Breaker failure IED>>>BF OFF | ON
IED> Disabling by IED>>> start IED>disbyIED>>> OFF | ON
IED>> Disabling by IED>>> start IED>>disbyIED>>> OFF | ON
IED>>> Start relays IED>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>> Trip relays IED>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67N Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>>> Element
Setpoints
IED>>>> Enable IED>>>> Enable OFF | ON
IEDCLP>>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP>>>> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP>>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>>> Logical block IED>>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED>>>> Input selective block IED>>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED>>>> Output selective block IED>>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED>>>> Internal block IED>>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED>>>> Breaker failure IED>>>>BF OFF | ON
IED> Disabling by IED>>>> start IED>disIED>>>> OFF | ON
IED>> Disabling by IED>>>> start IED>>disIED>>>> OFF | ON
IED>>> Disabling by IED>>>> start IED>>>disIED>>>> OFF | ON
IED>>>> Start relays IED>>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>>> Trip relays IED>>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 312

APPENDIX
Definite time
67N Fourth threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Second harmonic restraint threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value % 10 ... 50 step = 1
I2ndh> reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I2ndh> Start relays I2ndh>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I2ndh>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I2ndh> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
74TCS Enable 74TCS Enable OFF | ON
74TCS Logical block 74TCS-BLK1 OFF | ON
74TCS Start relays 74TCS-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74TCS Trip relays 74TCS-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74TCS-ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
74TCS Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
74TCS-TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
74TCS Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Selective block IN
BLIN1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLIN1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling relays tB-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
tB-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Selective block OUT
BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLOUT1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Phase protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-Iph-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Ground protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-IE-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Phase and ground protections output selective block BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
relays
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 313

APPENDIX
BLK2OUT-Iph-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Phase protections output selective block LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
BLK2OUT-IE-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Ground protections output selective block LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Phase and ground protections output selective block BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
LEDs L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Output internal selective block dropout time for phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Output internal selective block dropout time for ground protections
Value s 0.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BF Enable BF Enable OFF | ON
BF Phase current threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value In 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BF Residual current threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value IEn 0.01 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
BF Time delay
Value s 0.06 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BF Logical block BF-BLK1 OFF | ON
BF Start from circuit breaker CB Input OFF | ON
BF Start relays BF-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
BF Trip relays BF-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
BF-ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
BF Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
BF-TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
BF Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Profile B
Base current IB
Base current IB In 0.10 ... 2.50 step = 0.01
PT1 Probe
ThAL1 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL1 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>1 Trip
Th>1 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>1 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT2 Probe
ThAL2 Alarm
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 314
APPENDIX
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL2 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>2 Trip
Th>2 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>2 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT3 Probe
ThAL3 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL3 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>3 Trip
Th>3 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>3 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT4 Probe
ThAL4 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL4 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>4 Trip
Th>4 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>4 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT5 Probe
ThAL5 Alarm
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 315

APPENDIX
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL5 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>5 Trip
Th>5 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>5 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT6 Probe
ThAL6 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL6 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>6 Trip
Th>6 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>6 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT7 Probe
ThAL7 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL7 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>7 Trip
Th>7 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>7 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PT8 Probe
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 316

APPENDIX
ThAL8 Alarm
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
ThAL8 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Th>8 Trip
Th>8 Operating time
Value s 0 ... 100 step = 1
Th>8 Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Diagnostic
PT100 probe diagnostic relays PT100Diag-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
PT100Diag-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
PT100 probe diagnostic LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Undervoltage - 27
se to neutral
U< Element
Setpoints
U< Enable U< Enable OFF | ON
U< Curve type U<Curve INVERSE | DEFINITE
U< Logical block U<BLK1 OFF | ON
U< Breaker failure U<BF OFF | ON
U< Start relays U<ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U< Trip relays U<TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U<ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U< Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U<TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U< Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
U<def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
tU<inv s 0.10 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
U<inv Operating time
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
U<< Element
Setpoints
U<< Logical block U<<BLK1 OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 317

APPENDIX
U<< Breaker failure U<<BF OFF | ON
U< Disabling by U<< start U<disbyU<< OFF | ON
U<< Start relays U<<ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U<< Trip relays U<<TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U<<ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U<< Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U<<TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U<< Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
U<<def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Thermal image - 49
Initial thermal image DthIN DThetaB 0.0 ... 1.0 step = 0.1
Reduction factor at inrush KINR 1.0 ... 3.0 step = 0.1
Thermal time constant T min 1 ... 200 step = 1
DthCLP Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
DthCLP Operating mode
setting
DthCLP Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
49 Second harmonic restraint Dth2ndh-REST OFF | ON
DthAL1 Element
49 First alarm threshold DthAL1 DThetaB 0.3 ... 1.0 step = 0.1
DthAL1 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
DthAL2 Element
49 Second alarm threshold DthAL2 DThetaB 0.5 ... 1.2 step = 0.1
DthAL2 Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Dth> Element
Dth> Enable Dth> Enable OFF | ON
49 Trip threshold Dth> DThetaB 1.2 ... 1.2 step = 0.1
Dth> Logical block Dth>BLK1 OFF | ON
Dth> Input selective block Dth>BLK2IN OFF | ON
Dth> Output selective block Dth>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
Dth> Internal selective block Dth>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 318
APPENDIX
Dth> Breaker failure Dth>BF OFF | ON
Disabling Dth> by 50-51 start Dth>disby50-51 OFF | ON
Dth> Trip relays Dth>-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Dth>-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Dth> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I> Element
Setpoints
I> Enable I> Enable OFF | ON
I>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
I> Curve type | ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t
| EM | DEFINITE
ICLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
ICLP> Mode
setting
ICLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I> Logical block I>BLK1 OFF | ON
I> Input selective block I>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I> Output selective block I>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I> Internal selective block I>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
I> Second harmonic restraint I>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I> Breaker failure I>BF OFF | ON
I> Start relays I>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I> Trip relays I>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50/51 First threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
ICLP>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>def within CLP
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
I>def Operating time
s 0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
50/51 First threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
ICLP>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01
t>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
I>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
I>> Element
Setpoints
I>> Enable I>> Enable OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 319

APPENDIX
I>> Curve type I>>Curve I2t | DEFINITE
ICLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
ICLP>> Mode
setting
ICLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>> Logical block I>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>> Input selective block I>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>> Output selective block I>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
I>> Internal selective block I>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
I>> Second harmonic restraint I>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>> Breaker failure I>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>> start I>disbyI>> OFF | ON
I>> Start relays I>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>> Trip relays I>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50/51 Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
ICLP>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Inverse time
50/51 Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
ICLP>>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 20.00 step = 0.01
I>>inv Operating time t>>inv s 0.02 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
I>>> Element
Setpoints
I>>> Enable I>>> Enable OFF | ON
ICLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
ICLP>>> Mode
setting
ICLP>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I>>> Logical block I>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
I>>> Input selective block I>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
I>>> Output selective block I>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 320
APPENDIX
I>>> Internal selective block I>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
I>>> Second harmonic restraint I>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
I>>> Breaker failure I>>>BF OFF | ON
I> Disabling by I>>> start I>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>> Disabling by I>>> start I>>disbyI>>> OFF | ON
I>>> Start relays I>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>> Trip relays I>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
I>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50/51 Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
ICLP>>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
I>>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
I>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE> Element
Setpoints
IE> Enable IE> Enable OFF | ON
IE>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IE> Curve type
IECLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IECLP> Mode
setting
IECLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE> Logical block IE>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE> Input selective block IE>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE> Output selective block IE>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE> Internal selective block IE>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IE> Second harmonic restraint IE>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE> Breaker failure IE>BF OFF | ON
IE> Start relays IE>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE> Trip relays IE>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IE>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 321

APPENDIX
IECLP>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>def Operating time
s 0.04 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>inv IEn 0.010 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
tE>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IE>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Element
Setpoints
IE>> Enable IE>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IECLP>> Mode
setting
IECLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>> Logical block IE>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>> Input selective block IE>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>> Output selective block IE>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>> Internal selective block IE>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IE>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>> Breaker failure IE>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>> start IE>disbyIE>> OFF | ON
IE>> Start relays IE>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>> Trip relays IE>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IE>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50N/51N Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>> Element
Setpoints
IE>>> Enable IE>>> Enable OFF | ON
IECLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IECLP>>> Mode
setting
IECLP>>> Activation time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 322

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
tE>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IE>>> Logical block IE>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IE>>> Input selective block IE>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IE>>> Output selective block IE>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IE>>> Internal selective block IE>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IE>>> Second harmonic restraint IE>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IE>>> Breaker failure IE>>>BF OFF | ON
IE> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>> Disabling by IE>>> start IE>>disbyIE>>> OFF | ON
IE>>> Start relays IE>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>> Trip relays IE>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IE>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IE>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IE>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
50N/51N Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IECLP>>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IE>>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IE>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Overvoltage - 59
se to neutral
U> Element
Setpoints
U> Enable U> Enable OFF | ON
U> Curve type U>Curve INVERSE | DEFINITE
U> Logical block U>BLK1 OFF | ON
U> Breaker failure U>BF OFF | ON
U> Start relays U>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U> Trip relays U>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
U>def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Inverse time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 323

APPENDIX
State OFF | ON
tU>inv s 0.10 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
U>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
U>> Element
Setpoints
U>> Logical block U>>BLK1 OFF | ON
U>> Breaker failure U>>BF OFF | ON
U> Disabling by U>> start U>disbyU>> OFF | ON
U>> Start relays U>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U>> Trip relays U>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
U>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
U>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
U>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
U>>def Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
culated
59N Operation from 74VT internal 74VTint59N OFF | Block
59N Operation from 74VT external 74VText59N OFF | Block
UE> Element
Setpoints
UE> Enable UE> Enable OFF | ON
UE> Curve type UE>Curve INVERSE | DEFINITE
UE> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
UE> Logical block UE>BLK1 OFF | ON
UE> Breaker failure UE>BF OFF | ON
UE> Start relays UE>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE> Trip relays UE>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
UE>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
UE>def Operating time
s 0.07 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 324

APPENDIX
tUE>inv s 0.10 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
UE>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
UE>> Element
Setpoints
UE>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
UE>> Logical block UE>>BLK1 OFF | ON
UE>> Enable UE>>BF OFF | ON
UE> Disabling by UE>> start UE>disbyUE>> OFF | ON
UE>> Start relays UE>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE>> Trip relays UE>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
UE>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
UE>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
UE>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
59N Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
UE>>def Operating time
s 0.07 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
Directional phase overcurrent - 67
67 Operating mode Mode67 I | I*cos
67 Operating logic Logic67 1/3 | 2/3
67 Operation from 74VT internal 74VTint67 OFF | Block | Not directional
67 Operation from 74VT external 74VText67 OFF | Block | Not directional
IPD> Element
Setpoints
IPD> Enable IPD> Enable OFF | ON
IPD>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IPD> Curve type | ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t
| EM | DEFINITE
IPDCLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD> Logical block IPD>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD> Input selective block IPD>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD> Output selective block IPD>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD> Internal selective block IPD>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD> Second harmonic restraint IPD>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD> Breaker failure IPD>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Start relays IPD>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD> Trip relays IPD>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 325

APPENDIX
IPD>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>def characteristic angle ThetaP>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>def Operating time
s 0.05 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IPD>inv characteristic angle ThetaP>inv gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tPD>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IPD>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IPD>> Element
Setpoints
IPD>> Enable IPD>> Enable OFF | ON
IPD>>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IPD>> Curve type | ANSI/IEEE VI | ANSI/IEEE EI | RECTIFIER | I2t
| EM | DEFINITE
IPDCLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP>> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>> Logical block IPD>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD>> Input selective block IPD>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD>> Output selective block IPD>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD>> Internal selective block IPD>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD>> Second harmonic restraint IPD>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD>> Breaker failure IPD>>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Disabling by IPD>> start IPD>disbyIPD>> OFF | ON
IPD>> Start relays IPD>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>> Trip relays IPD>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 326

APPENDIX
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>def characteristic angle ThetaP>>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>def Operating time
s 0.05 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
67 Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
Pickup value
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IPD>>inv characteristic angle ThetaP>>inv gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tPD>>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IPD>>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>> Element
Setpoints
IPD>>> Enable IPD>>> Enable OFF | ON
IPDCLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP>>> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>> Logical block IPD>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD>>> Input selective block IPD>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD>>> Output selective block IPD>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD>>> Internal selective block IPD>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD>>> Second harmonic restraint IPD>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD>>> Breaker failure IPD>>>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Disabling by IPD>>> start IPD>disbyIPD>>> OFF | ON
IPD>> Disabling by IPD>>> start IPD>>disbyIPD>>> OFF | ON
IPD>>> Start relays IPD>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>> Trip relays IPD>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67 Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>def characteristic angle ThetaP>>>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 327

APPENDIX
IPDCLP>>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IPD>>>> Element
Setpoints
IPD>>>> Enable IPD>>>> Enable OFF | ON
IPDCLP>>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IPDCLP>>>> Operating mode
setting
IPDCLP>>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>> Logical block IPD>>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Input selective block IPD>>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Output selective block IPD>>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Internal selective block IPD>>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IPD>>>> Second harmonic restraint IPD>>>>2ndh-REST OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Breaker failure IPD>>>>BF OFF | ON
IPD> Disabling by IPD>>>> start IPD>disIPD>>>> OFF | ON
IPD>> Disabling by IPD>>>> start IPD>>disIPD>>>> OFF | ON
IPD>>> Disabling by IPD>>>> start IPD>>>disIPD>>>> OFF | ON
IPD>>>> Start relays IPD>>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>>> Trip relays IPD>>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IPD>>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IPD>>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IPD>>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67 Fourth threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>>def characteristic angle ThetaP>>>>def gr 0 ... 359 step = 1
IPDCLP>>>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IPD>>>>def within CLP 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
IPD>>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N
67N Operating mode Mode67N I | I*cos
culated
67N Insensitive zone Insens-Zone OFF | ON
67N Multiplier of thresholds for insensitive zone M 1.5 ... 10.0 step = 0.1
67N Operation from 74VT internal 74VTint67N OFF | Block | Not directional
67N Operation from 74VT external 74VText67N OFF | Block | Not directional
IED> Element
Setpoints
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 328

APPENDIX
IED> Enable IED> Enable OFF | ON
IED>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IED> Curve type
IEDCLP> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED> Logical block IED>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED> Input selective block IED>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED> Output selective block IED>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED> Internal selective block IED>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED> Breaker failure IED>BF OFF | ON
IED> Start relays IED>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED> Trip relays IED>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>def Operating time
s 0.05 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
Inverse time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>inv IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
tED>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
IED>inv Operating time
10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
IED>> Element
Setpoints
IED>> Enable IED>> Enable OFF | ON
IED>>Curve IEC/BS A | IEC/BS B | IEC/BS C | ANSI/IEEE MI
IED>> Curve type
IEDCLP>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP>> Operating mode
setting
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 329
APPENDIX
IEDCLP>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>> Logical block IED>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED>> Input selective block IED>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED>> Output selective block IED>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED>>>> Internal selective block IED>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED>> Breaker failure IED>>BF OFF | ON
IED> Disabling by IED>> start IED>disbyIED>> OFF | ON
IED>> Start relays IED>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>> Trip relays IED>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
Second threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Inverse time
Second threshold inverse time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>inv IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>>>inv within CLP
1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
IED>>inv Operating time tED>>inv s 0.02 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>> Element
Setpoints
IED>>> Enable IED>>> Enable OFF | ON
IEDCLP>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP>>> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>> Logical block IED>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED>>> Input selective block IED>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 330

APPENDIX
IED>>> Output selective block IED>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED> Internal selective block IED>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED>>> Breaker failure IED>>>BF OFF | ON
IED> Disabling by IED>>> start IED>disbyIED>>> OFF | ON
IED>> Disabling by IED>>> start IED>>disbyIED>>> OFF | ON
IED>>> Start relays IED>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>> Trip relays IED>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67N Third threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IEDCLP>>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>>> Element
Setpoints
IED>>>> Enable IED>>>> Enable OFF | ON
IEDCLP>>>> Mode OFF | ON - Element blocking | ON - Change
IEDCLP>>>> Operating mode
setting
IEDCLP>>>> Activation time
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>>> Reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
IED>>>> Logical block IED>>>>BLK1 OFF | ON
IED>>>> Input selective block IED>>>>BLK2IN OFF | ON
IED>>>> Output selective block IED>>>>BLK2OUT OFF | ON
IED>>>> Internal block IED>>>>BLK4 OFF | OUT | IN
IED>>>> Breaker failure IED>>>>BF OFF | ON
IED> Disabling by IED>>>> start IED>disIED>>>> OFF | ON
IED>> Disabling by IED>>>> start IED>>disIED>>>> OFF | ON
IED>>> Disabling by IED>>>> start IED>>>disIED>>>> OFF | ON
IED>>>> Start relays IED>>>>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>>> Trip relays IED>>>>TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IED>>>>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>>> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
IED>>>>TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
IED>>>> Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Definite time
67N Fourth threshold definite time
State OFF | ON
IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 331

APPENDIX
IEDCLP>>>>def IEn 0.002 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
IED>>>>def within CLP
1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
IED>>>>def Operating time
Value s 0.05 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Second harmonic restraint threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value % 10 ... 50 step = 1
I2ndh> reset time delay
s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value
10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1
I2ndh> Start relays I2ndh>ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
I2ndh>ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
I2ndh> Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
74TCS Enable 74TCS Enable OFF | ON
74TCS Logical block 74TCS-BLK1 OFF | ON
74TCS Start relays 74TCS-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74TCS Trip relays 74TCS-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74TCS-ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
74TCS Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
74TCS-TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
74TCS Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Selective block IN
BLIN1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLIN1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections
Value s 0.10 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling relays tB-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
tB-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
tB-Iph/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Selective block OUT
BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode ModeBLOUT1 OFF | ON IPh/IE | ON IPh | ON IE
BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Phase protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-Iph-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Ground protections output selective block relays BLK2OUT-IE-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Phase and ground protections output selective block BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
relays
BLK2OUT-Iph-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Phase protections output selective block LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
BLK2OUT-IE-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Ground protections output selective block LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Phase and ground protections output selective block BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
LEDs L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 332

APPENDIX
Output internal selective block dropout time for phase protections
Value s 0.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
Output internal selective block dropout time for ground protections
Value s 0.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BF Enable BF Enable OFF | ON
BF Phase current threshold
State OFF | ON
BF Residual current threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value IEn 0.01 ... 2.00 step = 0.01
BF Time delay
Value s 0.06 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
BF Logical block BF-BLK1 OFF | ON
BF Start from circuit breaker CB Input OFF | ON
BF Start relays BF-ST-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
BF Trip relays BF-TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
BF-ST-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
BF Start LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
BF-TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
BF Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
PLC
Setpoints
Enable PLC Enable OFF | ON
Relays PLC-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
PLC-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Switches
Switch 1 0|1
Switch 2 0|1
Switch 3 0|1
Switch 4 0|1
Switch 5 0|1
Switch 6 0|1
Switch 7 0|1
Switch 8 0|1
Switch 9 0|1
Switch 10 0|1
Switch 11 0|1
Switch 12 0|1
Switch 13 0|1|2
Switch 14 0|1|2
Switch 15 0|1|2
Switch 16 0|1|2
Switch 17 0|1|2
Switch 18 0|1|2
Switch 19 0|1|2
Switch 20 0|1|2
Switch 21 0|1|2|3
Switch 22 0|1|2|3
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 333
APPENDIX
Switch 23 0|1|2|3
Switch 24 0|1|2|3
Switch 25 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
Switch 26 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
Switch 27 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
Switch 28 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 |
13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23
| 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 |
34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44
| 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 |
Switch 29
55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 | 65
| 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74 | 75 |
76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 | 86
| 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 |
97 | 98 | 99
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 |
13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23
| 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 |
34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44
| 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 |
Switch 30
55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 | 65
| 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74 | 75 |
76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 | 86
| 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 |
97 | 98 | 99
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 |
13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23
| 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 |
34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44
| 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 |
Switch 31
55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 | 65
| 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74 | 75 |
76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 | 86
| 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 |
97 | 98 | 99
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 |
13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23
| 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 |
34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 | 41 | 42 | 43 | 44
| 45 | 46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 54 |
Switch 32
55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 | 60 | 61 | 62 | 63 | 64 | 65
| 66 | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 71 | 72 | 73 | 74 | 75 |
76 | 77 | 78 | 79 | 80 | 81 | 82 | 83 | 84 | 85 | 86
| 87 | 88 | 89 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 93 | 94 | 95 | 96 |
97 | 98 | 99
Timers
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 1
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 2
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 3
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 4
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 5
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 6
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 7
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 334

APPENDIX
s 0.00 ... 0.99 step = 0.01
Timer 8
1.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 9 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 10 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 11 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 12 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 13 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 14 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 15 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0.0 ... 59.9 step = 0.1
Timer 16 60 ... 299 step = 1
300 ... 3600 step = 10
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 17 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 18 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 19 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 20 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 21 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 22 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 23 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
s 0 ... 59 step = 1
Timer 24 60 ... 3540 step = 60
3600 ... 86400 step = 600
Circuit Breaker supervision
LEDs-relays allocation
Open CB command relays CBopen-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Close CB command relays CBclose-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
CBclose-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
CB Closed LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
CBopen-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
CB Open LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
CB Diagnostic
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 335

APPENDIX
Number of CB trips mode ModeN.Open OFF | ON
Number of CB trips threshold N.Open 0 ... 10000 step = 1
Cumulative CB tripping currents mode ModeSumI OFF | ON
Cumulative CB tripping currents threshold SumI In 0 ... 5000 step = 1
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t mode ModeSumI^2t OFF | ON
Circuit breaker opening time for I^2t calculation tbreak s 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t threshold SumI^2t In^2s 0 ... 5000 step = 1
CB operating time mode Mode-tOpen OFF | ON
Trigger relay for CB opening time trigger measurement Ktrig-break K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Circuit breaker maximum allowed opening time
Value s 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Number of CB trips diagnostic relays N.Open-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic relays SumI-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic relays SumI^2t-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic relays tbreak-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
N.Open-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Number of CB trips diagnostic LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
SumI-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
SumI^2t-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
tbreak-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
74VT Enable 74VT Enable OFF | ON
74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value En 0.05 ... 0.50 step = 0.01
74VT Negative sequence overcurrent threshold
State OFF | ON
74VT Phase undervoltage threshold
State OFF | ON
Pickup value En 0.05 ... 0.50 step = 0.01
74VT Minimum change of current threshold
State OFF | ON
74VT Undercurrent inhibition threshold
State OFF | ON
In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001
10.0 ... 40.0 step = 0.1
74VT Alarm time delay
Value s 0.0 ... 10.0 step = 0.1
74VT Logical blobk 74VT-BLK1 OFF | ON
74VT Self-reset 74VT-AR OFF | ON
Block functions enable from 74VT 74VT-BK-EN OFF | ON
74VT Output block relays 74VT-BK-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74VT Alarm relays 74VT-AL-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
74VT-BK-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
74VT Output block LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
74VT-AL-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
74VT Alarm LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 336

APPENDIX
74CT Enable 74CT Enable OFF | ON
74CT Threshold S< 0.10 ... 0.95 step = 0.01
74CT Overcurrent threshold
State OFF | ON
S< Operating time
s 0.03 ... 9.99 step = 0.01
Value 10.0 ... 99.9 step = 0.1
100 ... 200 step = 1
S< Logical block S<BLK1 OFF | ON
S< Trip relays S<TR-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
S<TR-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
S< Trip LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Remote tripping
Remote tripping relays RemTrip-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
RemTrip-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Remote tripping LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
BLOUT1 Diagnostic pulses period PulseBLOUT1 OFF | 100ms | 1s | 5s | 10s | 60s | 120s
BLIN1 Diagnostic pulses control time interval PulseBLIN1 OFF | 100ms | 1s | 5s | 10s | 60s | 120s
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling relays PulseBLIN-K K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
PulseBLIN-L reserved | START | TRIP | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling LEDs
L6 | L7 | L8 | L9 | L10
Demand measures
Fixed demand period tFIX min 1 ... 60 step = 1
Rolling demand period tROL min 1 ... 60 step = 1
Number of cycles for rolling on demand N.ROL 1 ... 24 step = 1
Oscillography
Readings
Initialization | Start recording | Acquire |
State
Trigger | Stopped | Wait | Fail | Off
Records 0 ... 0 step = 0
Buffer storage % 0 ... 0 step = 0
Trigger Setup
Pre-trigger time s 0.05 ... 1.00 step = 0.01
Post-trigger time s 0.05 ... 60.00 step = 0.05
Element pickup trigger ON | OFF
Trigger from outputs K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
Binary input trigger ON | OFF
IN1 | IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 |
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
Trigger from inputs IN1-IN32 IN16 | IN17 | IN18 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32
IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 | IN37 | IN38 | IN39 |
Trigger from inputs IN33-IN42
IN40 | IN41 | IN42
80% Buffer alarm OFF | ON
Set sample channels
iL1 On | Off
uL1 On | Off
iL2 On | Off
uL2 On | Off
iL3 On | Off
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 337

APPENDIX
uL3 On | Off
iE On | Off
uE On | Off
Set analog channels
Frequency | IL1 | UL1 | IL2 | UL2 | IL3 | UL3 | IE
| UE | U12 | U23 | U31 | UEC | PhiL1 | PhiL2 |
Analog 1 PhiL3 | Alpha1 | Alpha2 | Alpha3 | PhiE | PhiEC
| IL1-2nd | IL2-2nd | IL3-2nd | I-2nd/IL | T1 | T2
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 338

APPENDIX
| T3 | T4 | T5 | T6 | T7 | T8 | Off
Set digital channels
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
| IN1 | IN2 | IN3 | IN4 | IN5 | IN6 | IN7 | IN8 |
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
Binary 1 IN16 | IN17 | IN18 | IN19 | IN20 | IN21 | IN22 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
IN37 | IN38 | IN39 | IN40 | IN41 | IN42 | Off
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 339

APPENDIX
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | K5 | K6 | K7 | K8 | K9 | K10
IN9 | IN10 | IN11 | IN12 | IN13 | IN14 | IN15 |
IN23 | IN24 | IN25 | IN26 | IN27 | IN28 | IN29 |
IN30 | IN31 | IN32 | IN33 | IN34 | IN35 | IN36 |
Communication
RS485
Protocol MODBUS | IEC60870-5-103
Address 1 ... 254 step = 1
1200 baud | 2400 baud | 4800 baud | 9600
Baudrate RS485
baud | 19200 baud | 38400 baud | 57600 baud
Ethernet
IP host address
IP net mask
Autonegotiation OFF | ON
NTP synchronizing OFF | ON
NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 340

APPENDIX
8.9 APPENDIX F - EC Declaration of conformity
Manufacturer: THYTRONIC S.p.A.

Address: Piazza Mistral 7 - 20139 MILANO
The undersigned manufacturer herewith declares that the product

Protection relay - type NA60
is in conformity with the previsions of the following EC directives (including all applicable amendments) when installed in accordance
with the installation instructions:
Reference n° Title
2014/35/EC Low Voltage Directive
2014/30/EC EMC Directive
Reference of standards and/or technical specifications applied for this declaration of conformity or parts thereof:
- harmonized standards:
Reference n° Issue Title
EN 61010-1 2010 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
EN 50263 2000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Product standard for measuring relays and protection equipments
EN 61000-6-4 2007-2011 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Emission standard for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-2 2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Immunity standard for industrial environments
- other standards and/or technical specifications:
Reference n° Issue Title
EN 60255-1 2011 Electrical relays

Part 6: General requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment
Year of CE marking: 2006
Signature .............................................
Name FIORE Mattia

Title Managing director
Date 07-2006
Headquarter: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63
Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dell’Artigianato, 26 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0
www.thytronic.it thytronic@thytronic.it www.pro-n.it

NA 60 Manual 02 2016 A8a5b0253e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NA 60 Manual 02 2016 A8a5b0253e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NA60

PHASE & RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT,

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 3

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 5

Settings must be established on the basis of a coordination study.

The display messages (MMI) are shown as:

Notes are highlighted with cursive letters inside colored bar

Note: Useful description note

DFR Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography)

K1...K6...K10 Output relays

MMI (Man Machine Interface) Operator front panel

ThyVisor Setting and monitoring software

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 8

I>> Threshold setting (e.g. pickup I>>).

I Limit block (I>> threshold).

Curve type (definite/inverse time)

& & AND and NAND logic gates

≥1 ≥1 OR and NOR logic gates

=1 EXOR logic gate

T 0 ON delay timer with reset (t ON delay)

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 9

t OFF t OFF t OFF

0 T OFF delay timer (dropout) with reset (t OFF delay)

Latched Latched operating mode for output relays and LEDs

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 10

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 11

The most significant constructive features are:

The most significant operating features are:

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 12

 Voltage dip and interruption

 EMC tests for interference immunity

Apparati di automazione e controllo per centrali e stazioni elettriche

NA60 - Manual - 04 - 2022 13

Reference standards EN 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-5

Reference standards EN 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-6

Reference standards EN 61000-4-8 IEC 61000-4-8

Reference standards EN 61000-4-10 IEC 61000-4-10

 Phase current input circuits (traditional CTs)

 Residual current input circuit

 Voltage input circuits (traditional VTs)

 Residual voltage input circuit (traditional VTs)[3]

 Phase current input circuits (ThySensor)

 ThySensor primary ratings[4]

 Binary input circuits

 Block input (Logic selectivity)

3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS

 Block output (Logic selectivity)

3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

Note 1 Different version must be selected at ordering

 Rated values for version with ThySensor inputs

 Base current - IB[1]

 Thermal protection with Pt100 probes - 26[2]

I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

 Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (ThySensor inputs)

I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

 Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N

Pickup time ≤ 0.03 s

 Residual overvoltage - 59N (traditional VT inputs)

 Residual overvoltage - 59N (ThySensor inputs)

 Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (Traditional CT & VT inputs)

IPD>> Reset time delay (t PD >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

IPD>>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Voltage dip and interruption

EMC tests for interference immunity

Phase current input circuits (traditional CTs)

Residual current input circuit

Voltage input circuits (traditional VTs)

Residual voltage input circuit (traditional VTs)[3]

Phase current input circuits (ThySensor)

ThySensor primary ratings[4]

Binary input circuits

Block input (Logic selectivity)

Block output (Logic selectivity)

Rated values for version with ThySensor inputs

Base current - IB[1]

Thermal protection with Pt100 probes - 26[2]

Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (ThySensor inputs)

Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N

Residual overvoltage - 59N (traditional VT inputs)

Residual overvoltage - 59N (ThySensor inputs)

Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (Traditional CT & VT inputs)

Directional phase overcurrent - 67 (ThySensor inputs)

Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (Traditional CT & VT inputs)

Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (ThySensor inputs)

Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS

Selective block - BLOCK2

Internal selective block - BLOCK4

Circuit Breaker supervision

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)[5]

Accuracy (type tests)